Mitsubishi Electric GT16 User Manual Download

Page: 892 / 1306

41 - 6

41. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC
41.2 Serial Connection

41.2.5 PLC Side Setting

POINT

TOSHIBA PLC
For details of the TOSHIBA PLC, refer to the following
manual.

TOSHIBA PLC user's Manual



Connecting to T2 (PU224), T2E or T2N

(1) Switch setting

Set the switches accordingly.
(a) Operation mode setting switch

(b) DIP switch on module PCB (T2N only)

Can be used as RS-422.

(2) Transmission parameter setting

Enter the transmission parameters.

Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
the GOT side.

Fixed to 9600bps for T2E only.

The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that
of the GOT side.



Connecting to T3 or T3H

Enter the transmission parameters.

Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
the GOT side.

The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that
of the GOT side.



Connecting to model 2000 (S2, S2T, S2E),
model 3000 (S3)

Enter the transmission parameters.

Can be used as RS-422.

Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
the GOT side.

The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that
of the GOT side.

Switch No.

Settings

Setting details

OFF (fixed)

Computer link

OFF (fixed)

Switch No.

Set value

For RS-232

communication

For RS-422

communication

DIP switch: No. 1

ON (RS-232C)

OFF (RS-485

)

Item

Set value

Transmission speed

*1*2*3

4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps

Data bit

7bit

Stop bit

2bit

Parity bit

Even

Station No.

Item

Set value

Transmission speed

*1*2

4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps

Data bit

7bit

Stop bit

2bit

Parity bit

Even

Station No.

Item

Set value

Transmission method

RS485

COM1

Timeout time

5sec

Transmission speed

*2*3

4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps

Data bit

7bit

Stop bit

2bit

Parity bit

Even

Station No.

Summary of Contents for GT16

Page 1: ......

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...ystem where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or m...

Page 4: ...tion cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network the available IP addr...

Page 5: ...fied connectors while the power is turned OFF Imperfect connection may cause malfunction or failure When inserting a CF card into the GOT push it into the CF card interface of GOT until the CF card eject button will pop out Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact When inserting removing a CF card into from the GOT turn the CF card access switch off in advance Failure to do so ...

Page 6: ...tal pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in ...

Page 7: ...rews or unit CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure Do not drop or apply strong impact to the unit Doing so may damage the unit Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit Doing so may damage the b...

Page 8: ...y be activated This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations For details on models subject to restrictions refer to the User s Manual for the GOT you are using Before transporting the GOT turn the GOT power on and check that the battery voltage status is normal on ...

Page 9: ...Power Supply Specifications 3 4 3 4 Battery specifications 3 5 4 PARTS NAME 4 1 Front Panel 4 1 4 1 1 Name and specifications 4 1 4 2 Back Panel 4 2 4 2 1 Name and specifications 4 2 4 2 2 Opening and closing of environmental protection back cover 4 3 4 2 3 Changing the grip angle 4 3 4 3 Top Face Interface 4 4 4 3 1 Names and specifications 4 4 INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graph...

Page 10: ...edure 6 5 6 5 Protective Sheet 6 6 6 5 1 Applicable protective sheet 6 6 6 5 2 Installing procedure 6 6 6 6 Emergency Stop Switch Guard Cover 6 7 6 6 1 Applicable emergency stop SW guard cover 6 7 6 6 2 Installing procedure 6 7 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 6 8 6 7 1 Applicable Connector Conversion Box 6 8 6 7 2 Connector Conversion Box GT16H CNB 42S 6 8 6 7 3 Connector Conversion Box GT16H CNB 37S...

Page 11: ... GOT SET UP 11 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 11 1 11 1 1 Time setting 11 1 11 1 2 Transparent setting Transparent mode setting 11 5 11 1 3 Cleaning of display section Clean 11 6 11 1 4 Behavior of duplicate IPs 11 8 11 1 5 License Management 11 11 11 2 Display Settings 11 13 11 2 1 Display setting functions 11 13 11 2 2 Display operation of display setting 11 14 11 2 3 Display setting operatio...

Page 12: ...ns 13 1 13 1 1 Function of monitor screens 13 1 13 1 2 Display operation of monitor screens 13 2 13 2 Debug Setting 13 3 13 2 1 Q L QnA ladder monitor setting 13 3 13 2 2 Backup restoration setting 13 5 13 2 3 Trigger backup settings 13 7 13 3 Memory Data Control 13 9 13 3 1 Functions of memory data control 13 9 13 3 2 Backup restoration 13 10 13 3 3 GOT data package acquisition 13 11 13 3 4 Memor...

Page 13: ...F Card or USB Memory 16 4 16 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT 16 5 16 3 2 Installing using the data control function Utility 16 7 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 16 9 16 5 CoreOS 16 11 16 5 1 Installing the CoreOS 16 11 16 5 2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed 16 14 17 DRAWING SOFTWARE SETTINGS CONTROLLER SETTING AND COMMON SETTINGS 17 1 Setting the C...

Page 14: ...ing to MELSEC iQ F Series 20 6 20 2 6 Connecting to FXCPU 20 8 20 2 7 Connecting to WSCPU 20 12 20 2 8 Connecting to the motion controller CPU 20 12 20 3 Connection diagram 20 13 20 3 1 RS 232 cable 20 13 20 3 2 RS 422 cable 20 13 20 4 GOT Side Settings 20 14 20 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 20 14 20 4 2 Communication detail settings 20 14 20 5 PLC Side Setting 20 16 2...

Page 15: ...module 22 12 22 2 5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I F 22 13 22 3 GOT Side Settings 22 14 22 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 22 14 22 3 2 Communication detail settings 22 14 22 3 3 Ethernet setting 22 15 22 3 4 Routing parameter setting 22 16 22 4 PLC Side Setting 22 17 22 4 1 Connecting to Built in Ethernet port CPU one to one connection 22 18 22 4 2 Connecting to Built in Et...

Page 16: ...A500 A500L F500 F500L V500 V500L 24 1 24 2 2 Connecting to FREQROL E500 S500 S500E F500J D700 F700PJ 24 3 24 2 3 Connecting to FREQROL E700 sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX 24 4 24 2 4 Connecting to FREQROL A700 F700 F700P 24 5 24 2 5 Connecting to FREQROL A800 F800 24 7 24 2 6 Connecting to MD CX522 K A0 24 9 24 3 Connection Diagram 24 10 24 3 1 RS 422 cable 24 10 24 4 GOT Side Settings 24 14 24 4...

Page 17: ...ing to the MELSERVO J2M series 25 11 25 5 3 Connecting to the MELSERVO J4 J3 JE Series 25 12 25 5 4 Station number setting 25 12 25 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 25 13 25 7 Precautions 25 13 26 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 26 1 Connectable Model List 26 1 26 2 System Configuration 26 1 26 2 1 Connecting to robot controller CRnD 700 26 1 26 3 GOT Side Settings 26 2 26 3 1 Setting communication inte...

Page 18: ...ing Unit Electric Multi measuring Instrument 28 4 28 5 1 Connecting to an energy measuring unit electronic multi measuring instrument 28 4 28 5 2 Station number setting 28 4 28 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 28 5 28 7 Precautions 28 6 MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS 29 GOT MULTI DROP CONNECTION 29 1 Connectable Model List 29 1 29 2 System Configuration 29 2 29 3 Connection Diagram 29 3 29 3 1 RS 485 cabl...

Page 19: ... Configurator 31 25 31 4 6 FX Configurator FP FX3U ENET L Configuration tool 31 25 31 4 7 RT ToolBox2 31 26 31 4 8 NC Configurator 31 26 31 5 GOT Side Settings 31 27 31 5 1 Setting communication interface 31 27 31 6 Personal Computer Side Setting 31 29 31 6 1 Accessing by GX Works3 31 29 31 6 2 Accessing by CW Configurator 31 33 31 6 3 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer PX Developer GX Configur...

Page 20: ...Can Be Set 32 21 32 7 Precautions 32 21 33 CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 33 1 Connectable Model List 33 1 33 2 Serial Connection 33 2 33 2 1 System Configuration for connecting to CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C or CQM1 33 2 33 2 2 System Configuration for connecting to CQM1H 33 3 33 2 3 System Configuration for connecting to CJ1H CJ1G CJ1M CJ2H or CJ2M 33 4 33 2 4 System Configuration for connecting to CP1H CP1...

Page 21: ...unication settings 34 6 34 4 2 Communication detail settings 34 6 34 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 34 7 34 5 1 Connecting E5AN E5EN E5CN E5GN 34 7 34 5 2 Connecting E5ZN 34 7 34 5 3 Connection to interface converter K3SC 10 34 7 34 5 4 Station NO setting 34 8 34 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 34 9 34 7 Precautions 34 9 35 CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 35 1 Connectable Model List 35 1 35 2 Seri...

Page 22: ...16 36 5 9 Station NO setting 36 16 36 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 36 17 37 CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 37 1 Connectable Model List 37 1 37 2 System Configuration 37 2 37 2 1 Connecting to PC3JG PC3JG P PC3JD or PC3JD C 37 2 37 2 2 Connecting to PC3J or PC3JL 37 3 37 2 3 Connecting to PC2J PC2JS or PC2JR 37 4 37 2 4 Connecting to PC2JC PC216P or PC2J16PR 37 5 37 3 Connection Diagram 37 6 37 3 1 RS 2...

Page 23: ...9 2 39 2 1 Connecting to ACS 13A JC JCM 33A JIR 301 M PCD 300 Series PC 900 Series PC 955 M C5 PC 935 M C5 39 2 39 2 2 Connecting to FCD 100 FCR 100 FCR 23A FIR Series PC 900 Series PC 955 M C PC 935 M C 39 2 39 2 3 When connecting to DCL 33A Series 39 3 39 3 Connection Diagram 39 4 39 3 1 RS 232 cable 39 4 39 3 2 RS 485 cable 39 5 39 4 GOT Side Settings 39 6 39 4 1 Setting communication interface...

Page 24: ...0 Connecting to KE3000 40 15 40 5 11 Connecting to LE5100 LE5200 LE5300 40 15 40 5 12 Connecting to converter SC8 10 40 16 40 5 13 Station number setting 40 17 40 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 40 18 40 7 Precautions 40 18 41 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 41 1 Connectable Model List 41 1 41 2 Serial Connection 41 2 41 2 1 System configuration for connecting to PROSEC T series 41 2 41 2 2 System config...

Page 25: ...ier Side 43 4 43 5 1 Connecting to MINAS A4 A4F A4L 43 4 43 5 2 Connecting to MINAS A5 43 4 43 5 3 Station number setting 43 4 43 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 43 5 43 7 Precautions 43 5 44 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 44 1 Connectable Model List 44 1 44 2 System Configuration 44 2 44 2 1 Connecting to FP0 C16CT FP0 C32CT or FP0R 44 2 44 2 2 Connecting to FP1 C24C or FP1 C4...

Page 26: ...2 cable 46 3 46 4 GOT Side Settings 46 4 46 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 46 4 46 4 2 Communication detail settings 46 4 46 5 PLC Side Setting 46 5 46 5 1 Connecting to communication module 46 5 46 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 46 6 47 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 47 1 Connectable Model List 47 1 47 2 Serial Connection 47 2 47 2 1 System Configuration for connecting to MICR...

Page 27: ...8 7 Precautions 48 11 49 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 49 1 Connectable Model List 49 1 49 2 Serial Connection 49 2 49 2 1 System configuration for connecting to GL120 or GL130 49 2 49 2 2 System configuration for connecting to GL60S GL60H or GL70H 49 2 49 2 3 System configuration for connecting to MP 920 930 CP 9300MS 9200 H or PROGIC 8 49 3 49 2 4 System configuration for connecting to MP 940 49 4 4...

Page 28: ...Ethernet Interface Module F3LE12 0T 50 17 50 3 6 Connecting to F3SP66 F3SP67 F3SP71 4N built in Ethernet interface 50 18 50 3 7 Precautions 50 18 50 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 50 18 51 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 51 1 Connectable Model List 51 1 51 2 System Configuration 51 2 51 2 1 Connecting to GREEN Series 51 2 51 2 2 Connecting to UT100 51 4 51 2 3 Connecting to UT2000 51...

Page 29: ... Connecting to SDC20 21 SDC30 31 52 20 52 5 5 Connecting to CMC10L 52 20 52 5 6 Connecting to DMC50 52 21 52 5 7 Connecting to SDC45 46 52 21 52 5 8 Connecting to CMS CMF015 52 21 52 5 9 Connecting to CML CMF050 52 21 52 5 10 Connecting to MQV 52 21 52 5 11 Connecting to MPC 52 22 52 5 12 Connecting to PBC201 VN2 52 22 52 5 13 Connecting to MVF 52 22 52 5 14 Connecting to AUR350C AUR450C 52 23 52 ...

Page 30: ...0 Connecting to AG500 53 20 53 5 11 Connecting to RMC500 53 21 53 5 12 Connecting to MA900 MA901 53 21 53 5 13 Connecting to THV A1 53 21 53 5 14 Connecting to SA100 SA200 53 21 53 5 15 Connecting to X TIO Module 53 22 53 5 16 Connecting to SB Series 53 23 53 5 17 Connecting to B 400 53 24 53 5 18 Station number setting 53 25 53 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 53 26 53 7 Precautions 53 26 54 CONNEC...

Page 31: ...13 56 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 56 1 Connectable Model List 56 1 56 2 System Configuration 56 2 56 2 1 Connecting to K80S or K120S 56 2 56 2 2 Connecting to K200S 56 3 56 2 3 Connecting to K300S 56 4 56 3 Connection Diagram 56 5 56 3 1 RS 232 cable 56 5 56 3 2 RS 422 cable 56 5 56 4 GOT Side Settings 56 7 56 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 56 7 56 4 2 Commu...

Page 32: ...e that Can Be Set 58 12 59 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER 60 CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION 61 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 61 1 Microcomputer Connection Serial 61 1 61 2 System Configuration 61 3 61 2 1 For the microcomputer connection serial 61 3 61 3 Connection diagram 61 4 61 3 1 RS 232 cable 61 4 61 3 2 RS 422 cable 61 4 61 4 Device Data Area 61 ...

Page 33: ...on 62 16 62 4 4 Formats 3 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection 62 28 62 4 5 Format 5 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method 62 42 62 4 6 Formats 6 7 4E frame 62 46 62 4 7 Formats 8 9 3E frame 62 56 62 5 GOT Side Settings 62 65 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 62 65 62 5 2 Communication detail settings 62 65 62 6 System configuration 62 67 62 7 Devic...

Page 34: ...e Setting 64 3 64 5 Device Range that Can Be Set 64 4 64 6 Connection Example 64 6 64 6 1 Connecting to SCHNEIDER PLC Modicon Premium series and Modicon Quantum series 64 6 64 6 2 Connecting to YOKOGAWA PLC STARDOM 64 8 64 7 Precautions 64 11 CONNECTIONS TO PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 65 VNC R SERVER CONNECTION 65 1 Connectable Model List 65 1 65 2 System Configuration 65 1 65 3 GOT Side Settings 65 2 65...

Page 35: ...ed in CD ROM SH 080871ENG 1D7MC5 GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM SH 080861ENG 1D7MB1 GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Functions for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM SH 080863ENG 1D7MB3 Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 Setting available functions o...

Page 36: ...1562 VN Abbreviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT155 GT1555 V Abbreviation of GT1555 VTBD GT1555 Q Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT157 GT156 GT155 GT145 GT1455 Q Abbreviation of GT1455 QTBDE GT1455 QTBD GT1450 Q Abbreviation of GT1450 QLBDE GT1450 QLBD GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455 Q GT1450 Q GT1275 GT1275 V Abbreviat...

Page 37: ... 25P Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z 1 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX CC Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z 3 Interface converter unit GT15 75IF900...

Page 38: ...5 50PSCW GT15 50PSGW For GT14 GT14 50PSCB GT14 50PSGB GT14 50PSCW GT14 50PSGW For GT12 GT11 70PSCB GT11 65PSCB For GT11 GT11 50PSCB GT11 50PSGB GT11 50PSCW GT11 50PSGW GT11H 50PSC For GT10 GT10 50PSCB GT10 50PSGB GT10 50PSCW GT10 50PSGW GT10 40PSCB GT10 40PSGB GT10 40PSCW GT10 40PSGW GT10 30PSCB GT10 30PSGB GT10 30PSCW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSCB GT10 20PSGB GT10 20PSCW GT10 20PSGW Protective cover fo...

Page 39: ...tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C GPPW E EV SW D5F GPPW E type software package GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN VIEWER E type software package PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 SW DNC MTW2 ...

Page 40: ... SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co Ltd PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by ...

Page 41: ...The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 5 3 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed 5 3 2 Communication detail settings 1 Bus Q 2 Bus A QnA 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Co...

Page 42: ...ternal cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name RS 422 connector conversion cable Communi cation type Cable model MELSEC Q RS 232 GT11H C30R2 6P 3m GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H CNB 42S 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC FA CNV2402CBL 0 2m FA CNV2405CBL 0 5m RS 422 GT01 C30R4 25P 3m GT01 C100R4 25P 10m or GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13 5m The config...

Page 43: ...eens are available user screen and utility screen 1 User Screen The user screen is a screen created by drawing software The objects such as Touch switch Lamp display Comment display and Numerical display can be arbitrarily placed on the display Moreover multiple screens created by drawing software can be displayed individually or overlapped with each other For details refer to the following GT Des...

Page 44: ...perations including screen design startup adjustment management and maintenance works The 15MB built in flash memory is included as standard CF card interface is included as standard USB interface host device is included as standard Ethernet interface is included as standard System font types are increased by the adoption of the font installation system Four types of alarms system alarm user alarm...

Page 45: ...ns Create a sequence program to control the operation switch LED Controller manuals Wire for the GOT power supply and the controller 9 HANDLING OF POWER WIRING AND SWITCH 20 to 64 Wire for the controller power supply and I O Controller manuals Turn on the power of GOT and controller Install the OS to GOT 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STAN DARD MONITOR OS Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Scree...

Page 46: ...1 4 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features ...

Page 47: ...TION 7 INSTALLATION 8 COMMUNICATION CABLE 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 Overall Configuration The overall configuration of GT16 Handy is as follows The GT16 Handy cannot be connected to a bar code reader or a printer USB memory Battery CF card GOT Connector conversion box Drawing PC Commercially available Memory card CF card Memory card adaptor Protective sheet ...

Page 48: ...anel color type 6 6 5 Screen size type 5 65536 colors supported Display color type V 640x480 VGA Resolution Type D DC24V Power type T TFT color High intensity wide angle view Display device type B Black HS Handy type GT16 G T H 60 Dedicated for 6 5 H For Handy GOT 16 Dedicated for GT16 15 Dedicated for GT15 11 Dedicated for GT11 10 Dedicated for GT10 09 05 01 Common for GT16 GT15 GT11 ...

Page 49: ...ion Box GT16H CNB 42S Box for converting 42 pin connectors into terminal block 9 pin D Sub connector or Ethernet RJ 45 connector GT16H CNB 37S Box for converting D Sub 37 pin connectors into terminal block or Ethernet RJ 45 connector Product name Model name Cable length Contents RS 422 Cable FXCPU direct connection cable FX expansion board connection GT01 C10R4 8P 1m For connecting FXCPU MINI DIN ...

Page 50: ...nversion Box to KEYENCE PLC GT09 C30R21102 9S 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to KEYENCE multi communication unit GT09 C30R21103 3T 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to KEYENCE multi communication unit Product name Model name Cable length Description RS 422 cable GT09 C30R40601 15P 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to Sharp PLC GT09 C100R40601 15P 10m GT09 C30R40602 15...

Page 51: ...HITACHI IES PLC Product name Model name Cable length Description RS 232 cable GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to FUJI FA RS 232C interface card RS 232C 485 interface capsule general purpose interface module RS 422 cable GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m Product name Model name Cable length Description RS 232 cable GT09 C30R20901 25P 3m For connecting Connect...

Page 52: ...R40302 6T 3m GT09 C100R40302 6T 10m GT09 C30R40303 6T 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to YOKOGAWA temperature controller GT09 C100R40303 6T 10m GT09 C30R40304 6T 3m GT09 C100R40304 6T 10m RS 232 cable GT09 C30R20301 9P 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to YOKOGAWA CPU port D Sub 9 pin conversion cable GT09 C30R20302 9P 3m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to YOKOGAWA PC l...

Page 53: ...memory Commercially available USB memory 3 Product name Model name Contents Memory card adaptor GT05 MEM ADPC CF card to memory card Type II conversion adaptor Product name Model name Contents Battery 4 GT15 BAT Battery for clock data and maintenance report data backups Product name Model name Contents Protective sheet GT16H 60PSC Display section clear 5 sheets Transparent protective sheet which p...

Page 54: ...2 8 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 2 System Equipment ...

Page 55: ... generated in the environment where the equipment is used In pollution degree 2 only non conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to condensation Item Specifications Operating ambient temperature Display section 0 to 40 Other than display section 0 to 40 Storage ambient temperature 20 to 60 Operating ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH non condensing Storage ambient humi...

Page 56: ... OFF 2 N O contacts Maximum rating 1A 24VDC resistance load Maximum rating 0 3A 24VDC induction load Life 100 000 times Emergency stop switch 1 switch single wiring IDEC XA1E BV303R 3 N C contacts Maximum rating 1A 24VDC resistance load Maximum rating 0 3A 24VDC induction load Life 100 000 times Keylock switch 2 position switch 1 switch single wiring IDEC AS6M 2KT1PB 2 notch type Manual stop at ea...

Page 57: ...en within the described view angle 3 The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen 11 2 Display Settings 4 The touch panel is analog resistive film type If you touch the panel simultaneously in 2 points or more the switch that is located around the center of the touched point if any may operate Do not touch the panel in 2 points...

Page 58: ...r is restored Item Specifications Input power supply voltage DC24V 10 15 Power consumption 11 6W 480mA 24VDC or less At backlight off 8 2W 340mA 24VDC or less Inrush current 30A or less maximum load 2ms Permissible instantaneous power failure time Within 5ms Noise immunity Noise voltage 1000Vp p Noise width 1 s by noise simulator of 30 to 100Hz noise frequency Dielectric withstand voltage 500VDC f...

Page 59: ...life and replacement time 1 Battery life reference Approx 4 years in actual use Ambient temperature 25 C Battery replacement time reference 3 to 4 years The battery is susceptible to natural discharge Order one when necessary 2 Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility Refer to the following for the details of battery status display 11 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings Item Speci...

Page 60: ...3 6 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 4 Battery specifications ...

Page 61: ...h for external direct wiring independent contact 4 Operation switch name sheet installation place Place concave shape where the operation switch name sheet Insert into the space from a transverse direction is installed 5 Emergency stop switch Switch for external direct wiring independent contact 6 POWER LED Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving and backlight not lit ...

Page 62: ...standard angle as before shipping or 15 degrees to the right 7 Grip switch Switch for external direct wiring independent contact 8 Battery For storing clock data maintenance timing notification and system log data 9 Connector for battery connection For battery connection 10 RS 232 connector Connector for PLC communication using RS 232 11 RS 422 485 connector Connector for PLC communication using R...

Page 63: ...o points to remove the cover 1 Mount the environmental protection back cover and tighten the screws with the following torque Too much tightening may cause damage Tightening torque 0 36 to 0 48 N m 1 Loosen the five grip angle changing screws on the back surface Do not loosen or remove the screws marked with two screws 2 Turn the grip Adjust the threaded holes and tighten the grip angle changing s...

Page 64: ...s accessing the CF card before removing the card from the Handy GOT OFF before shipping ON CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible 5 CF card interface Connector for mounting the CF card compact flash card to the Handy GOT 6 CF card eject button CF card removal button 7 CF card access LED Lit green CF card being accessed transferring betwe...

Page 65: ...MC Directive For the products sold in European countries the conformance to the EMC Directive which is one of the European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1996 Also conformance to the Low Voltage Directive another European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1997 Manufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage Directive are required to decla...

Page 66: ...conducted in the following conditions 30M 230MHz QP 40dB V m 10m in measurement range 230M 1000MHz QP 47dB V m 10m in measurement range Applied standard Test standard Test details Standard value EN61131 2 2007 EN55011 Radiated noise 1 Electromagnetic emissions from the product are measured 30M 230MHz QP 30dB V m 30m in measurement range 2 3 230M 1000MHz QP 37dB V m 30m in measurement range 2 3 EN6...

Page 67: ...relieve the noise the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna Note A long conductor will become a more efficient antenna at high frequency 3 Shock protection In order to prevent those who are unfamiliar with power facility e g an operator from getting a shock make sure to take the following measures on the control p...

Page 68: ...factured by other company create the cable by the user and configure the system to meet the EMC Directive specifications for the connected device POINT POINT POINT 1 System configuration GT16 Handy conforms to the EMC Directive only when used in the connection type above via connector conversion box 2 Connected devices If connecting to the PLC or microcomputer other than Mitsubishi products MELSEC...

Page 69: ...on cables are used 1 External cable GT16H C30 42P GT16H C60 42P GT16H C100 42P 2 Direct connection cable 3 Ethernet connection cable Shielded twisted pair cable STP 4 PLC manufactured by other company microcomputer temperature controller inverter servo amplifier CNC MODBUS R RTU or MODBUS R TCP connection Produce the cable RS 232 cable RS 422 485 cable for connecting the GOT to a controller with r...

Page 70: ...ing instructions the system may not comply with EMC directives Power and ground wires wiring method 1 Power and ground wires wiring method Connect the power wire and connection cable as shown in the illustration and be sure to attach a ferrite core TDK Corporation type ZCAT3035 1330 within the range shown below Lead the power wire and ground wire as shown in 5 2 1 Control panel 2 Be sure to ground...

Page 71: ...er the manufacturer of the machinery must finally determine how to make it comply with the EMC Directives if it is actually compliant with the EMC Directives a For RS 422 485 cable Each signal wire excluding SG and FG should be made into a two power wires and connected then twisted Make the SG wire more than two wires and connect b For RS 232 cable Use a twisted pair style for each signal wire exc...

Page 72: ...5 8 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 2 EMC Directive ...

Page 73: ...e above OS versions a CF card with more than 2GB is not recognized correctly POINT POINT POINT Checking method of BootOS standard monitor OS version Check the version of BootOS or Standard monitor OS installed in GOT at OS information of the utility Refer to the following for details 15 3 OS Project Information Confirm the version of BootOS installed in the GOT at product shipment by rating plate ...

Page 74: ...cess LED turns off the CF card can be installed even during the GOT power on 3 To install the CF card to the GOT insert the CF card into the CF card interface with its front side outside 4 Push in the CF card until the CF card eject button snaps 5 Turn the CF card access switch on After the CF card access switch is turned on the CF card can be used 6 Close the interface environmental protection co...

Page 75: ...e to do so may cause a fall of the CF card leading to failure or damage of the card 1 Open the interface environmental protection cover in the arrow pointing direction 2 Set the CF card access switch of the GOT to OFF Make sure that the CF card access LED turns off When the CF card access LED turns off the CF card can be installed or removed even during the GOT power on 3 Push in the CF card eject...

Page 76: ...it the CS or project data and to save the data of the alarm history function For details refer to the following 15 DATA CONTROL 6 3 1 Applicable USB memory The following USB memories are applicable for Handy GOT 1 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT 1000 series GOT A 0010 separately ava...

Page 77: ...eeping the GOT turned ON more than 10 minutes turn OFF the GOT After turning OFF the GOT perform the procedure to within 5 minutes 2 Loosen the environmental protection back cover screws at two points on GOT rear face to remove the cover 3 Remove the old battery from the holder and disconnect the connecter 4 Insert the connector of the new battery 5 Install the battery to the GOT 6 Attach the envi...

Page 78: ... becomes worse when there is too much dirt and cracks causing malfunction Proceeds replacement promptly Product name Model Contents Protective sheet GT16H 60PSC Protective sheet for GOT Clear 5 sheets 1 If the protective sheet has been already attached to the GOT remove the old one from the GOT display section holding the lower right corner If the protective sheet for transportation is attached to...

Page 79: ...mergency stop SW guard cover is applicable for the Handy GOT 6 6 2 Installing procedure Product name Model Contents Emergency stop SW guard cover GT16H 60ESCOV Mounting screw M3 6 1 accessory 1 Remove the Handy GOT from the device or turn the entire system power off Make sure that the device does not operate even if the emergency stop of the Handy GOT is activated while mounting the emergency stop...

Page 80: ...ions Operation switch SW1 to SW6 10mA 24VDC resistance load only Each contact coordinates the operation switch status of Pressed close Not pressed open When the external cable is not connected contacts are always open regardless of the switch status Emergency stop switch ES1A to ES3A 1A 24VDC resistance load 0 3A 24VDC induction load Each contact coordinates the emergency stop switch status of Pus...

Page 81: ...ixing on the board etc For M4 screw 8 Terminal block 1 Connects the GT16H CNB 42S the 24VDC power supply of Handy GOT and the emergency stop switch ES 1 to 3 with M3 terminal screw and the cover 9 Terminal block 2 Connects the operation switch of the Handy GOT SW1 to 6 the grip switch DSW 1 2 and the keylock switch KSW 1 2 with M3 terminal and the cover 10 External connection device communication ...

Page 82: ...PTION 6 7 Connector Conversion Box External dimensions GT16H CNB 42S Unit mm inch 55 2 17 56 2 21 110 4 34 126 4 97 about 65 2 56 about 130 5 12 External cable connected Space required for connecting the cable ...

Page 83: ...rews prepared by user In the Connector Conversion Box thread of M4 6 mm in depth is cut in each mounting hole Prepare four M4 mounting screws separately while considering the thickness of the panel face Tighten the mounting screw with the specified torque Tightening screws too much may cause damage Make sure that interfering objects are not located within 65 mm from the rear face so that the conne...

Page 84: ...tor Conversion Box on the DIN rail with using its DIN rail hook The clearance between screws for installing the DIN rail should be 150 mm or less Tightening torque 0 69 to 0 88 N m Applicable DIN rail DIN46277 width 35mm M4 screw and nut 4 sets prepared by user 4 4 5 0 18 118 4 65 4 0 16 43 1 7 6 0 24 ON OFF Unit mm inch DIN rail depth more than 10mm 0 4 inch 1 Pull out the hook for DIN rail 2 Ada...

Page 85: ...Box Install to the adapter and the flange with two screws which are packed together with the connector conversion adapter Tighten the screws with the following torque Tightening screws too much may cause damage on the connector conversion adapter 2 Installation to the Connector Conversion Box Mount the connector conversion adapter to the RS 422 485 connector of the Connector Conversion Box and fix...

Page 86: ...ation connector Ethernet External device communication connector RS 422 485 D Sub 9pin female 1 RJ 45 5 6 9 External device communication connector RS 232 D Sub 9pin male 5 1 9 6 GT16H CNB 42S Application External device communication connector RS 422 485 Pin No Signal name 1 TXD SDA Signal line for external device communication For wiring refer to the chapter corresponding to the connected contro...

Page 87: ...on switches grip switch keylock switch GT16H CNB 42S Application Terminal block 1 Terminal No Signal name 1 24VDC 24VDC power supply 2 FG Frame ground 3 24VDC 24VDC power supply 4 Disable 5 6 7 8 9 ES3B For Emergency stop switch 10 ES3B 11 ES3A 12 ES3A 13 ES2B 14 ES2B 15 ES2A 16 ES2A 17 ES1B 18 ES1B 19 ES1A 20 ES1A GT16H CNB 42S Application Terminal block 2 Terminal No Signal name 1 SW COM For Ope...

Page 88: ...d OFF Connect the external cable with the Connector Conversion Box in the same procedure as connecting the external cable with Handy GOT Refer to the following 8 1 1 Installing and removing of external cable Wire size For power supply 0 75mm2 or more For grounding 2mm2 or more Solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 Applicable solderless terminal RAV1 25 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A Tightening torque 0...

Page 89: ...l Fundamentals 4 10 Station No Switching Device Setting POINT POINT POINT How to use the ID number recognition function GT16 Handy acquires the ID number by using RS 232 interface to connect with the Connector Conversion Box via MODBUS RTU connection When RS 232 interface is used by the multi channel function the ID number recognition function is not available Only when GT16 Handy connects with th...

Page 90: ...iver MODBUS RTU in addition to the Ethernet communication driver to be used to communicate with the connected equipment 3 Make the connected equipment settings of the RS 232 interface Select MODBUS RTU as the communication driver and set the followings in the connected equipment detailed setting 3 Reading the ID number ID number can be read to Handy GOT by connecting Handy GOT to the Connector Con...

Page 91: ...mber of the connector conversion box will be the PC No of the PLC to be monitored Setting the ID number 2 Switch the serial communication interface of the handy GOT For the communication using RS 232 open the environmental protection back cover on the main unit back side and connect the RS 422 485 RS 232 selection connector to the RS 232 side Selection of RS 232 connection and RS 422 485 connectio...

Page 92: ...Ethernet setting Set all PLCs which the GOT may be connected to via Ethernet Here an example when N W No is fixed to 1 is explained Station No switching device setting Tick the check box of Use Station No Switching to set the device specifying the station No of the connected PLC Here an example when the GOT internal device GD500 is set is explained ...

Page 93: ...atus observation function Operation trigger setting Set the GOT internal device GB40 always ON during the GOT operation as the conditional trigger of the status observation function 1 If Common Status Observation from the menu is selected the Status Observation dialog box is displayed 2 Set Ordinary to Observation Cycle in the Project tab and click Add 3 Set ON and GB40 to Trigger 1 in the Trigger...

Page 94: ...n No switching device GD500 to Device 3 To set the rotary switch value of the connector conversion box tick the check box of Indirect and click the button to display the Select CH No window 4 Click MODBUS in the Select CH No screen to open the device setting window of MODBUS 5 Input 3 00001 to Device Select Host for Network Click the OK button when settings are completed 3 00001 is a fixed registe...

Page 95: ... EMC DIRECTIVE 6 OPTION 7 INSTALLATION 8 COMMUNICATION CABLE 7 Tick the check box of Fixed and enter 256 In this example since N W No is fixed to 1 256 is entered For fixed values enter the value of 256 N W No Click the OK button when entering is completed 8 After checking that both Trigger and Action are set click the OK button ...

Page 96: ...f Switch Station No in the Basic tab Perform this operation in all screens where the station No is switched 7 Place objects on the screen Finally place objects on the screen Select Host to the network device of the objects When the station No switching device value is 0 the host is monitored The setting is completed with the above operations Transfer the project data to the GOT and check the opera...

Page 97: ... ON the power is supplied Turn off the power when attaching or detaching the Handy GOT 3 Mounting hole Allows to fix the Connector Conversion Box on the panel face directly or through a mounting bracket for M3 screw 4 Terminal block for power supply and operation switches Connects the operation switches and the 24V DC power supply of the Handy GOT 5 Terminal block for emergency stop switch grip sw...

Page 98: ... Conversion Box thread of M3 6 mm in depth is cut in each mounting hole Prepare four M3 mounting screws separately while considering the thickness of the panel face Tighten the mounting screw with the specified torque Make sure that interfering objects are not located within 50 mm from the rear face so that the connector of a PLC cable is not hindered To wire the terminal block keep a space of 25 ...

Page 99: ...n box Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range 2 Installing on the panel face Install the connector conversion box on the panel face mounting surface Drill a mounting slot of the following size on the panel face Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Tightening torque 0 49 to 0 68 N m Tightening torque 0 69 to 0 88 N m Mounting bracket accessory Mounting...

Page 100: ...e D Sub 37pin connector of the external cable is converted to the PLC connection connector module jack and the following terminal block Connector for Handy GOT M2 6 Metric screw thread Terminal block 2 D Sub 37pin female 1 19 20 37 External connection device communication connector Ethernet RJ 45 Terminal block 1 ...

Page 101: ...4 24VDC power supply 4 N C Not used 5 N C 6 34 SW6 For Operation switch 7 33 SW5 8 16 SW4 9 15 SW3 10 14 SW2 11 13 SW1 12 12 SW COM Terminal block 2 1 31 ES 3 For Emergency stop switch 2 32 ES 3 3 N C Not used 4 30 KSW 2 For Keylock switch 5 29 KSW 1 6 28 KSW C 7 27 DSW 2 For grip switch 8 26 DSW 2 9 25 DSW 1 10 24 DSW 1 11 23 ES 2 For Emergency stop switch 12 22 ES 2 13 21 ES 1 14 20 ES 1 Termina...

Page 102: ...6 30 6 OPTION 6 7 Connector Conversion Box ...

Page 103: ...to from the panel Always turn off the power ON OFF switch on the connector conversion box before connecting or disconnecting the GOT to it Connecting or disconnecting the GOT with the power being turned on may result in damage to the unit or malfunctions CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shoc...

Page 104: ...ding on the weight of the GOT approx 1 2kg main unit and the length of the connection cable Take the load into a consideration to attach a fitting on the wall 7 1 3 Placing on a desk or a floor When placing the Handy GOT on a desk or floor pay attention to the following Keep the GOT main unit horizontal to the desktop not to fall from and fix the connection cable to the desk etc Hook for hanging o...

Page 105: ... For the cable selection refer to the following 8 COMMUNICATION CABLE 20 to 64 2 Panel cutting dimensions for Connector Conversion Box The Connector Conversion Box can be installed on the panel face directly or with mounting bracket offered as an accessory For details on installing procedure and panel cutting dimensions refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box Handy GOT Control panel or...

Page 106: ...7 4 7 INSTALLATION 7 1 Installing Procedure ...

Page 107: ...n Box and a controller There are several types which can be selected according to a controller However this cable must be prepared by the user depending on the controller to be used Name Model name Length Remark External cable GT16H C30 42P 3m Connector conversion connection side 42 pins GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m PLC connection cable for connecting between PLCs and Connecter Conversion B...

Page 108: ...S 232 and RS 422 485 connections RS 422 485 connection is selected before shipping For switching between the RS 232 connection and the RS 422 connection make sure to turn off the Handy GOT power before disconnecting or connecting the cable connector for PLC communication in the environmental protection back cover Disconnecting or connecting the cable connector without turning off the Handy GOT pow...

Page 109: ...nsert the connector adjusting the triangle marks of the main unit side connector and cable side connector 3 After inserting the connector push the lock lever The connecters are locked after the lever is pushed into Removal procedure 1 Check that the 24VDC power to the external cable is OFF 2 Pull up the lock lever with inserting a flat blade screwdriver into the release hole of the lock lever 3 Th...

Page 110: ...8 4 8 COMMUNICATION CABLE 8 1 Overview of Communication Cable ...

Page 111: ...for the GOT Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction CAUTION The cables connected to t...

Page 112: ...se filter etc to reduce the level of the noise generated due to a source such as a high power motor drive circuit b Attach surge killers to the terminals on the No Fuse Breaker NFB electromagnetic contactors relays solenoid valves and generators to suppress noise interference 3 Releasing noise to the ground a Make sure to connect the ground cable to the ground b Use a short and thick cable to lowe...

Page 113: ...n circuit CPU memory communi cation For PC connection RS 422 485 IF SW1 LED SW2 LED SW3 LED SW4 LED SW5 LED SW6 LED GRIP SW LED Output interface SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW COM ES 1 ES 1 ES 2 ES 2 ES 3 ES 3 DSW 1 KSW 1 RS 232 IF Ethernet IF DC24V DC24G FG Power supply Display LED Operation switch Emergency stop switch Grip switch Keylock switch 2 position SW USB IF Device USB IF Host CF card IF Con...

Page 114: ...backlight off 8 2W or less 340mA 24VDC Inrush current 30A or less at max load 2ms Model name Terminal No 24VDC 24VDC FG Connector Conversion Box Terminal block 1 1 Terminal block 1 3 Terminal block 1 1 2 To the Handy GOT operation switch PLC Grounding 100 or less Grounding External power supply Handy GOT 24 COM X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 FG 24V 24V 1 PLC External power supply Handy GOT FG Grounding 100 or les...

Page 115: ... Keeping the GOT s ground cable and power line away from each other will help minimize noise interference Connecting the ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment to the panel to which the GOT is grounded When running a single ground cable from the panel that houses such piece of control equipment as a sequencer to the panel to which the GOT is grounded the ground cable may have to...

Page 116: ... wire around the ferrite core several times approx 3 times if a ferrite core is used If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 2 1 is not feasible follow Remedy 2 2 Remedy1 1 Remedy1 2 FG Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment Panel grounding Panel grounding Use the thickest cable possible Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment Use the thickest cable possible Co...

Page 117: ...o follow for surge killers 9 3 3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment 9 3 2 Outside the panel To pull the power line and communication cable out of the panel make two pullout holes away from each other and pull the cables through Putting both cables through the same pullout hole will increase noise interference Keep the power line and communication cable inside the duct at least 100 mm awa...

Page 118: ...happens keep the ground cable and communication cable away from the load If that is not possible an installation of a surge killer will help reduce noise interference Place the surge killer as close to the load as possible Remedy for AC inductive load Remedy for DC inductive load Output AC C R L Load Keep the ground cable and communication cable away from each other Place the surge killer near the...

Page 119: ...S 1 ES 2 ES 3 Switch for external direct wiring independent contact 3 Grip switch DSW 1 DSW 2 Switch for external direct wiring independent contact 4 Keylock switch 2 position SW KSW 1 KSW 2 Switch for external direct wiring independent contact 1 3 4 2 Grip switch display LED Operation switch display LED The following switches require the connection to a PLC or a controller through an external cab...

Page 120: ...ed with the power POWER LED turns off 1 Terminal block 2 Terminal block 1 2 3 4 5 8 11 12 13 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 14 9 10 6 7 ES3B ES2B ES2B ES1B Internal contact ES1B ES3B For setting emergency stop status when GT16 Handy is removed For avoiding emergency stop status when GT16 Handy is removed External cable GT16 Handy Connector conversion box SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 KSW C KSW 1 KSW...

Page 121: ...OFF or the Connector Conversion Box is not supplied with the power POWER LED turns off Terminal block 2 PLC Example of FX series COM ES3B ES2B ES2B ES1B ES1B ES3B External cable GT16 Handy Connector conversion box SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 KSW C KSW 1 KSW 2 DSW 1 DSW 1 DSW 2 DSW 2 ES 1 SW COM ES 2 ES 3 ES1A ES2A ES3A X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X010 X011 X020 To the external load Terminal block 1 ...

Page 122: ...tion switch is loaded into the PLC as the momentary switch of the a contact In the case of handling the input as the b contact or the alternate switch create the input in the sequence program Model name Terminal No SW COM SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 Connector Conversion Box Terminal block 2 1 Terminal block 2 2 Terminal block 2 3 Terminal block 2 4 Terminal block 2 5 Terminal block 2 6 Terminal block ...

Page 123: ...are The external input and output function output information read device 1 set in Read device controller GOT of System information in GOT Environment Setting from Common Settings is allocated to the LED control The following shows the relationship between each bit and the LED of the external input and output function output information The LED is lit when the bit value is 1 and not lit when the b...

Page 124: ...n output information 5 When the settings are completed click the OK button to close the System Information window Program example The sequence program example with the following conditions is described System information Set the read device to D101 using the drawing software Wiring Wire the operation switch of SW1 to X0 SW2 to X1 SW3 to X2 SW4 to X3 SW5 to X4 and SW6 to X5 Device allocation The LE...

Page 125: ... the user on the name sheet board Create the name sheet in the following dimensions 3 When the step of is completed copy the contents of the name sheet board to the OHP sheet in full size 100 with a copier When using another OHP sheet prepare the following sheet In addition the sheet must be copiable Material polyester film Thickness 0 1mm Mounting the name sheet 1 Insert the operation name sheet ...

Page 126: ...onnector conversion box the emergency switch goes off and the Handy GOT goes into the same state as when the switch is pressed Connector Conversion Box contains a parallel circuit to avoid emergency stop while the Handy GOT is being removed Connector Conversion Box requires wiring a parallel circuit Connection example 1 When setting the Connector Conversion Box to the emergency stop state while Ha...

Page 127: ...nal contact closes and the short circuit status occurs between ES Bs the status between ES As closes regardless of the status of the emergency stop switch and the external cable Pin layout POINT POINT POINT Precautions when using the emergency stop switch 1 When using the emergency stop switch of the Handy GOT use the emergency stop switch according to your risk assessment 2 When using the paralle...

Page 128: ...h contact Pin layout Model name Terminal No DSW 1 DSW 1 DSW 2 DSW 2 Connector Conversion Box Terminal block 2 11 Terminal block 2 12 Terminal block 2 13 Terminal block 2 14 Grip switch When released When half pressed When fully pressed OFF ON OFF Grip switch The grip switch is the 3 position system switch and makes the ON OFF state of Handy GOT as shown below Side surface of grip switch Used as in...

Page 129: ... grip switch is allocated to b6 7th bit from the lower of the device allocated to the external input and output function output information The LED is lit when the bit value is 1 and not lit when the bit value is 0 External input and output function output information read device 1 For example when D100 is set in the read device of system information the value in b6 of D101 is reflected to the LED...

Page 130: ...9 20 9 HANDLING OF POWER WIRING AND SWITCH 9 4 Switch Wiring ...

Page 131: ...OS methods 1 When installing the BootOS and standard monitor OS standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance Refer to the following for the installation which uses GT Designer3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Refer to the following for the installation which uses GOT 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Via USB interface or Ethernet interfac...

Page 132: ...n speed Setting the touch detection mode Changing security levels 11 3 4 Setting the utility call keys 11 3 5 Adjusting the touch panel 11 3 6 Setting the USB mouse keyboard 11 3 7 Setting the SoftGOT GOT link function 11 3 8 VNC server function setting 11 3 9 GOT maintenance Maintenance timing setting Setting the maintenance notification times for the backlight and display Setting the number of m...

Page 133: ...er backup 13 2 2 Setting the CPU No setting at backup to YES or NO 13 2 2 Memory data control Backup restoration 13 2 2 GOT data package acquisition Copying the OS special data and project data to a CF card or USB memory 13 3 3 CNC data I O function 13 3 Memory card format Formatting a CF card or USB memory 13 3 4 Memory information Displaying the available memory of the GOT 13 3 5 USB device stat...

Page 134: ...g information Converting operation log files in G1O format CSV TXT format Deleting copying moving operation log files changing operation log file names Deleting operation log folders creating a new operation log folder 15 2 4 Hard copy information Deleting copying hard copy files changing hard copy file names 15 2 5 Special data information Deleting or checking special data files Deleting special ...

Page 135: ... that can be set at the GOT utility are displayed Touching a menu item in the main menu will display the setting screen or following selection screen for the item 2 System message switch button This button switches the language used for the utility or system alarms When touching the Language button the Select Language screen is displayed 1 Touch the button of the language to be displayed 2 Touchin...

Page 136: ...anguages The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For the relation between the selectable languages and the fonts refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamental 2 5 Specifications of Applicable Characters 2 System language switching using the device The system language can be switched using the system language switching device set w...

Page 137: ... 5 Utility call key setting GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamental 4 9 GOT Display and Operation Setting GOT Environmental Setting GOT Setup POINT POINT POINT 1 Prohibited simultaneous 2 point presses Do not touch 2 points or more on the GOT screen simultaneously Touching 2 points or more simultaneously may activate a part other than the touched point 2 Pressing time of the utility...

Page 138: ...he Booting message which appears immediately after powering up is displayed If the S mode switch is pressed before the display of the Booting message the OS installation function starts Therefore press the S mode switch after the Booting message is displayed POINT POINT POINT When limiting the display and operation of the utility When limiting the display and operating users set a password to the ...

Page 139: ...the screen is composed of multiple layers the title including these layers is displayed 2 Close Return button When a middle screen of the layers is displayed if the Close return button in the right corner of screen is touched returns to the previous screen If this button is touched when directly displayed from monitor screen the screen is closed and returns to monitor screen 3 Scroll button For sc...

Page 140: ...to another setting screen Touch the button to move to another setting screen For the setting method of each setting item refer to the setting operation of each setting screen 2 OK button Cancel button Close Return button Reflect or cancel the changed settings a OK button Touch this button to reflect the changed settings and return to the previous screen Depending on the setting item the GOT restar...

Page 141: ...es by the position of numerical value touched At the time of numerical input displayed in the position which will not interrupt the inputting 3 Input numeric with keyboard 0 to 9 Key Input the numeric Enter Key Completes numeric input and closes the keyboard Cancel Key Cancels numeric input and closes the keyboard Key Moves the cursor to the right or left side Available only if any selectable item...

Page 142: ...10 12 10 UTILITY FUNCTION 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 143: ...t and Broadcast refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Item Description Reference Time setting Clock setting clock display GOT internal battery voltage status 11 1 Transparent mode Ch No 11 5 Clean Cleaning the display section 11 6 Video RGB Setting These functions are not available for GT16 Handy Multimedia setting Behavior of duplicate IPs Setting t...

Page 144: ...er3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Broadcast Adjust the time of controller clock data to the clock data of GOT It is same as set in the GOT setup in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Adjust Broadcast Adjust the GOT and controllers to the controller whose clock data is used as a base It is same as set in the GOT se...

Page 145: ...ist of PLC installed with clock function GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 2 Setting of clock setting and battery When selecting Broadcast or None in clock setting set the clock of the GOT once with connecting a battery to the GOT 3 Operation setting by GT Designer3 Carry out the setting of clock setting in GOT set up in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 To change a part of the se...

Page 146: ...is as follows Jan 1 2000 to Dec 31 2037 Key Description to Input numeric value in cursor position Move the cursor Move the cursor to the left by one character when Del Key is touched while inputting year month day time minutes seconds Carry out nothing when touched other than when inputting the above Close the keyboard after the input time is displayed in clock display The update of the clock disp...

Page 147: ...nction refer to the following 30 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 31 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Displaying the transparent mode Operation the transparent mode Function Description Setting range ChNo The channel No of a controller to which the FA transparent function is executed can be set 1 2 3 4 Default 1 1 Touching the transparent ChNo numerical part on the left the keyboard is displayed Input numerical valu...

Page 148: ...ed by touching the screen when clean with clothes Refer to the below for the cleaning procedure 18 3 Cleaning Method Display operation of Clean Even if touch points other than the upper left corner and upper right corner of the screen the GOT does not operates Main menu Clean Touch Clean GOT setup GOT main unit setup Touch GOT setup Touch GOT main unit setup 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 149: ...PLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING 13 DEBUG 14 SELF CHECK 15 DATA CONTROL 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Operation of Clean After cleaning the screen touch the screen following the instruction displayed After touching the screen the screen returns to the Main Menu The following screen is displayed ...

Page 150: ...k in which a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT exists The GOT goes into offline status and displays the following dialog box When changing the IP address of another device which has the same IP address as that of the GOT After changing the IP address of another device which has the same address as that of the GOT touch the Reboot GOT button to restart the GOT When changing the IP ...

Page 151: ...up GOT main unit setup Touch GOT setup Touch GOT main unit setup 10 3 Utility Display 1 If touch the setup item the setup contents is changed Maintain a network connection rec The GOT stays connected to the network when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards A system alarm occurs Do not maintain a network connection The GOT is disconnected from the ...

Page 152: ...lease change the setting of Behavior of duplicate IPs after carefully examining the necessity 2 Precautions for using a switching hub compatible with the spanning tree protocol For the switching hub port connected with the GOT configure the setting PortFast or others that makes the GOT be ready for communications forwarding state The setting is required to make sure that the delay right after the ...

Page 153: ...se for the GOT For releasing a registered license for the GOT also execute on the license management screen License management function Registers deletes the license of the VNC server function For the details of the VNC server function refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Displaying the License management Items Description Setting range VNC server function Re...

Page 154: ...c System Service center or representative 1 Touch the license number input area on the license management screen and then the keyboard appears on the bottom of the screen 2 Touch the Regist button to register the input license number If the button is touched without touching the Regist button the license number is not registered 3 After a license number is registered touch the button to close the ...

Page 155: ...Forced Screen Saver Disable Signal or disable the screen save time Automatic Screen Saver Disable Signal set with Utility GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 3 Screen save backlight When Screen save backlight is set to ON using the system information function Backlight OFF output signal can switch the backlight OFF from the controller When Screen save backlight is set to OFF th...

Page 156: ...LAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 2 Display Settings 11 2 2 Display operation of display setting GOT setup Display Main menu Touch an item to change settings Touch GOT setup Touch Display 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 157: ... Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamental 2 5 Specifications of Applicable Characters 2 System language switching using the device The system language can be switched using the system language switching device set with GT Designer3 For the setting method of the system language switching device refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamental 4 3 Language Swi...

Page 158: ...keyboard 2 If touch the OK button the GOT restarts and operates with the changed settings If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Main Menu 1 Setting item is changed if setting item is touched ON OFF 2 If touch the OK button the GOT restarts and operates with the changed settings If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the...

Page 159: ...ed Display operation of brightness contrast Operating the brightness contrast Function Description Brightness setting Brightness of display part can be adjusted by 8 levels GOT main unit setup Display Brightness contrast Main Menu Touch Display Touch Brightness contrast Touch GOT main unit setup Touch to adjust the brightness 10 3 Utility Display 1 Brightness can be adjusted by touching key of bri...

Page 160: ...e Utility call key screen change Utility call key setting screen can be displayed 11 3 5Utility call key setting Key sensitivity setting The touch panel sensitivity when touching the GOT screen can be set E g a setting can be changed when double touch is made when touching the GOT screen only once For preventing chattering 1 to 8 1 Touch panel calibration Touch panel reading error can be corrected...

Page 161: ... OS POINT POINT POINT Operation settings by GT Designer3 Select Common Settings GOT Environment Settings GOT Setup from GT Designer3 to make the settings of buzzer sound and buzzer sound at window move When change a part of the setting change the setting by the GOT display setting after downloading the project data GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 11 3 2 Display operation of...

Page 162: ...to the following for the USB mouse keyboard setting 11 3 7 USB mouse keyboard setting SoftGOT GOT link function setting Refer to the following for the SoftGOT GOT link function setting operation 11 3 8 SoftGOT GOT Link Function Setting 1 Setting items are changed if setting item is touched 2 If touch the OK button the GOT restarts and operates with the changed settings If touch the Cancel button t...

Page 163: ... level set by each object or screen switch To change the security level input the password of the security level which is set in GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT Restrictions on screen display The security level change screen cannot be displayed when project data do not exist in GOT Change the security level after downloading the project data to GOT Displaying the security level change Security leve...

Page 164: ...n the security level to the original level 1 By touching 0 to 9 A to F key the password of the changed security level is input 2 When correcting the input character touch Del key to delete the correcting character and input the password again 3 After inputting password touch the Enter key When the password matches the normal completion message is displayed When the password does not match an error...

Page 165: ...ners on the screen By keeping pressing the screen a setting to switch the screen to the utility is available This prevents a switching to the utility by an unintentional operation POINT POINT POINT Operation settings by GT Designer3 Select Common Settings GOT Environment Settings GOT Setup from GT Designer3 to make the settings of the utility call key When change a part of the setting after downlo...

Page 166: ...rlap the utility screen appears by switching the display position of the advanced alarm popup display For the advanced alarm popup display refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 3 When limiting the display and operation of the utility When limiting the display and operating users set a password to the GOT using the GT Designer3 If a user tries to display the ma...

Page 167: ... can be corrected Normally the adjustment is not required however the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs correct the position with this function Touch panel calibration setting display operation Run Stop Run Stop Before adjustment After adjustment The Run ...

Page 168: ...to make the setting 1 Touch the center of the displayed on the upper left precisely 2 Touch the point displayed on the upper right 3 Touch the point displayed on the lower left 4 Touch the point displayed on the lower right 5 Touching the button displayed on the upper right returns to the previous screen When the precise touch could not be made touch the Readjustment button to make the setting fro...

Page 169: ... 3 7 USB mouse keyboard setting USB mouse keyboard function To install and use the USB mouse keyboard on the GOT set the USB mouse keyboard USB mouse keyboard setting display operation USB mouse keyboard setting operation 1 To use the USB mouse touch the setting item of Use USB mouse The setting content is changed by touching YES NO Continued to next page Operation USB mouse keyboard Touch USB mou...

Page 170: ...d type The setting content is changed by touching YES NO 4 To use the USB keyboard touch the setting item of USB keyboard type The setting content is changed by touching Japanese 106 keyboard English 101 keyboard 5 If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Operation screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen retu...

Page 171: ...status whether or not the GOT obtains the exclusive authorization is displayed Obtaining or releasing the exclusive authorization can be executed by the GOT Obtain Release At GOT startup Release Authorization obtained time The time length from the last operation of GT SoftGOT1000 after obtaining the authorization until the GOT automatically obtains the authorization can be set 0 to 3600 seconds At...

Page 172: ...utton to display the dialog box 2 Touch the OK button to release the exclusive authorization 3 Touch the Cancel button to stop releasing the exclusive authorization 1 Touch the authorization obtained time display area to display a keyboard Enter the authorization obtained time with the keyboard When setting to 0 second the authorization is not automatically obtained by the GOT 2 If touch the OK bu...

Page 173: ...t longer than the authorization obtained time 4 Operation status popup notification 1 Touch the operating priority guaranteed time display area to display a keyboard Enter the operating priority guaranteed time with the keyboard 2 If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Operation screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and...

Page 174: ... cancel signal GS1792 b8 When the Authorization guarantee time cancel signal GS1792 b8 turns on the authorization guarantee time setting is disabled Displaying the VNC server function setting Function Description Setting range Operating priority guaranteed time The time that the authorized equipment holds the authorization after you operate the authorized equipment can be set The unauthorized equi...

Page 175: ...OS VNC server function setting operation 1 Operating priority guaranteed time 1 Touch the input field for Operating priority guaranteed time to display a keyboard Input the authorization guarantee time with the keyboard 2 Touch the OK button to confirm the new setting and the screen returns to the Operation screen Touch the Cancel button to cancel the new setting and the screen returns to the Oper...

Page 176: ...y using system alarm the message that notifies that the maintenance time is near or it is already maintenance time is displayed For the display of the system alarm refer to the following 19 TROUBLESHOOTING For the display of the system alarm refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Item Description Setting range Unit Maintenance points Reference Backlight main...

Page 177: ...ddition time refer to the following 11 4 2 Addition times reset Operating the maintenance timing setting 1 Touch the select button of each setting item todisplay the keyboard Enter the value to be set 2 If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the GOT maintenance screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to...

Page 178: ...time setting Addition times reset function Resets the value which is additioned by the 11 4 1 Function of the maintenance timing setting to 0 Display operation of Addition times reset Item Description Backlight power on addition time reset Function to reset the power on addition times to 0 Display power on addition time reset Function to reset the power on addition times to 0 Touch key pushing add...

Page 179: ...ion of Addition times reset POINT POINT POINT Addition times resetting timing It is convenient to reset addition times when replace backlight display section touch panel or built in flash memory 1 If touch Reset button of each item the addition time or the addition count becomes 0 2 If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the GOT maintenance screen If to...

Page 180: ...time function GOT start time is the function to display the following date and time Start time of GOT Current time of GOT Operating hours of GOT Display operation of GOT start time GOT start time Main menu GOT maintenance GOT setup Touch GOT start time Touch GOT setup Touch GOT maintenance 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 181: ...ime When changing the clock of the GOT Operating hours does not match with the difference between Current Time and Start Time Operating hours is not the time calculated from Current Time and Start Time The time displayed at Operating hours is a reference for the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or resetrestarted OS installation communication setting change Item Description Start Time Displ...

Page 182: ...information is the function to display the following information Communication driver installed in the GOT MAC address Capacity of the CF card mounted on A drive Display operation of GOT information GOT information Main menu GOT maintenance GOT setup Touch GOT information Touch GOT setup Touch GOT maintenance 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 183: ...N SETTINGS 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING 13 DEBUG 14 SELF CHECK 15 DATA CONTROL 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Display of GOT information Item Description Communication driver Displays the communication driver written to the GOT MAC address Displays the MAC address CFCard Displays the capacity of the CF card mounted on A drive ...

Page 184: ...11 42 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 4 Maintenance Function ...

Page 185: ...g 12 1 1 Communication setting functions 12 1 2 Communication setting display operation Function Description Reference Communication setting The setting contents of the communication interface can be checked or changed 12 1 Ethernet setting The contents of the Ethernet setting can be checked and the host can be changed 12 15 Function Description Channel Driver assign Change the assignment of chann...

Page 186: ...signer3 the assignment of communication drivers to channels can be changed When change a communication driver the alternative communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance 2 Standard interface display BOX Display the communication interface included as standard in GT16 Handy There are the following 4 types For GT16 Handy extend I F 1 and I F 2 are not available RS 232 For communicatin...

Page 187: ...sign Ethernet I F The communication settings for the Ethernet connection can be made Ethernet I F Assignment can assign up to four channels per interface 12 1 4 Assign Ethernet I F operation POINT POINT POINT Precautions for communications between GOT and controller 1 Installing communication driver and downloading Communication Setting The followings below are required for the communication inter...

Page 188: ... MELDAS C6 is used POINT POINT POINT Before the operation The GOT automatically restarts after executing this setting If project data has been downloaded the GOT starts monitoring of the controller after restarting Execute this setting after carefully confirming the safety 1 Install communication driver A QnA L QCPU L QJ71C24 to GOT Download of Communication Setting from GT Designer3 is not requir...

Page 189: ... L QCPU L QJ71C24 installed in the GOT is displayed touch it 4 The screen returns to the Channel Driver assign screen If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Communication Setting screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Communication Setting screen 5 Confirm that the selected communication dri...

Page 190: ... supply setting operation GT16 Handy cannot provide 5VDC power to the controllers from the RS 232 interface regardless of the setting of the 5V power provision 1 Touch channel number specification menu BOX to be set 2 The cursor for the channel number specification menu BOX is displayed Simultaneously the keyboard for a numerical input is displayed 3 Input the channel number from the keyboard and ...

Page 191: ...he Assign Ethernet I F button in Communication Setting 2 After the screen shown left is displayed touch the channel number specification menu BOX when changing the channel number 12 1 4 Channel number setting operation 3 For changing the parameter settings touch the driver display BOX 12 2Communication Detail Setting 4 If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen return...

Page 192: ...tail setting screen of Channel No 1 is displayed Function Description Communication parameters setting Set various communication parameters of communication devices The settable parameters differ according to the communication device Keyword setting For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be set Key word deleting For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program ...

Page 193: ... to the same interface are also changed POINT POINT POINT Communication parameter setting by GT Designer3 Select Common Settings Communication Settings from GT Designer3 to enter the communication parameters for each communication driver When change the communication parameters after downloading project data change the setting at communication detail setting of GOT 17 DRAWING SOFTWARE SETTINGS CON...

Page 194: ...etting The contents of communication detail setting varies according to driver type This section explains setting items different from the communication detail setting of the GT Designer3 For setting items other than described in this section refer to the following 17 DRAWING SOFTWARE SETTINGS CONTROLLER SETTING AND COMMON SETTINGS For MELSEC FX ...

Page 195: ... a FX PLC 1 that is not compatible with the customer keyword the keyboard for the keyword input of is displayed Select Keyword or Keyword and Customer keyword When the Enter key is touched the selection is completed and the keyboard for the keyword input is displayed 1 For details on FX PLC compatible with customer keyword refer to the following FX series PLCs Manual POINT POINT POINT The customer...

Page 196: ...to the following FX series PLCs Manual 2 Registration options Options can be selected among Read Write Protect Write Protect or All Protect For access restrictions of each setting refer to the manual of the PLC to be used 3 When Keyword and Customer Keyword is selected on the selection screen for registration and the keyword input is completed the Customer Keyword registration screen is the displa...

Page 197: ...n level The applicability of monitoring for each protection level is as follows 1 When the T C set values are specified indirectly changing devices is available 3 Difference between All Protect and All operation prohibition When All Protect is selected both device display and input by the programming tool or GOT are prohibited When All operation prohibition is selected device display and input are...

Page 198: ...When the correct keyword is input and the Enter key is touched the protection is cancelled 4 Protect A keyword with cancelled protection is reactivated for protection 1 Touching the Protect key activates keyword protection Target PLC Settings FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword to be deleted FX PLC not compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword to be deleted only into keyword 2nd k...

Page 199: ...LLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 12 3 Ethernet Setting 12 3 1 Ethernet setting functions The contents of the Ethernet set in GT Designer3 can be checked The setting of the host station can be changed For ethernet setting refer to the following GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 12 3 2 Ethernet setting display operation Touch Ethernet setting Main menu Touch Comm setting...

Page 200: ...tting screen with the Restore default settings button The changed settings remain until they are canceled with the Restore default settings button The changed settings are not canceled even if writing the project data or OS to the GOT When the project data is written to the GOT without canceling the changed settings those changed settings are reflected to the Ethernet setting of the written projec...

Page 201: ...OMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING 13 DEBUG 14 SELF CHECK 15 DATA CONTROL 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Change of host 1 Touch the device to be set as the host 2 If touch the OK button the GOT restarts and operates with the changed settings If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Communication Setting screen ...

Page 202: ...12 18 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 12 3 Ethernet Setting ...

Page 203: ...otion program SV43 I O 13 9 Item Description System monitor The device of PLC CPU and buffer memory of intelligent function module can be monitored or tested Ladder monitor The program of PLC CPU can be monitored in ladder format Network monitor The network status of the MELSECNET H MELSECNET II and CC Link IE Controller Network can be monitored Intelligent unit monitor Buffer memory in the intell...

Page 204: ... 1 Monitor Screens 13 1 2 Display operation of monitor screens Main menu Debug Monitor screens Debug is displayed For System monitor Monitor screens Touch the debug to be operated Touch Touch Debug 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 205: ...an be deleted by selecting Project information in OS project information of Data control 15 3 2 Operation of project information Function Description Setting range Data save location Select the ladder data storage location of the Q L QnA ladder monitor C Flash Memory A Built in CF Card Not store Default C Flash Memory Automatic program read Whether to automatically read sequence program when the l...

Page 206: ...he changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Debug Setting screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Debug Setting screen Debug Q L QnA ladder monitor Touch Debug Touch Q L QnA ladder monitor Main menu Select the ladder data storage location of the Q L QnA ladder monitor Debug setting Touch Debug setting 10 3 Utility Displa...

Page 207: ...settings including parameters and passwords for controllers can be selected A Standard CF Card E USB drive Default A Standard CF Card Drive for backup data The drive for storing backup data can be selected A Standard CF Card E USB drive Default A Standard CF Card Trigger backup setting The GOT automatically backs up data when triggers Rise Time specified for each backup setting are met None Rise T...

Page 208: ...n returns to the Debug Setting screen 1 Touch the setting item and then a keyboard appears Input values with the keyboard Setting range 0 to 50 Default 10 When 0 is specified the GOT does not check the number of backup data to be stored 2 If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Debug Setting screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are ...

Page 209: ...conditions of the trigger specified for each backup setting Rise Time are met the GOT automatically backs up data How to use the trigger backup refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 Display operation of trigger backup setting Touch Debug Main menu Trigger backup setting Touch Touch Debug Debug setting Backup restore setting Debug setting Backup...

Page 210: ...Detail and the screen is switched to the trigger time setting screen In the screen specify the days and time that the GOT executes the backup None Rise Time None The GOT does not execute the trigger backup Rise The GOT backs up data when the trigger device turns on Time The GOT backs up data at the specified time The GOT backs up data regardless that the backup data are changed or not When the bac...

Page 211: ...ject data stored in GOT main unit to CF card or USB memory are possible 13 11 CNC data I O function This function is not available for GT16 Handy Memory card format Formatting CF card or USB memory is possible 13 14 Memory information Displaying the flash memory empty area size available for the user of each drive and Boot drive empty area size is possible Confirming memory empty space is enabled ...

Page 212: ...erase backup data with the backup restoration GOT data package acquisition is also possible Refer to the following manuals for details of backup restoration GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 Backup restoration Touch Debug Touch Memory data control Touch Debug Backup restoration Main menu Memory data control Touch an item to change settings 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 213: ... in the GOT main unit to the CF card or USB memory OS Boot OS standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS option OS Special data Project data The copied data can be utilized for backup or creating the same GOT system by installing the data For installation function of the GOT refer to the following 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card or USB Memory Displ...

Page 214: ...n unit to the CF card or USB memory This item explains using the A drive 1 2 No Item Description 1 Select Drive Displays the drive where OS and data can be copied When the memory card is not installed A Built in CF card is not displayed E USB drive is displayed even if the USB memory is not installed 2 Copy Touching the button starts copying 1 Touching the drive name below Select Drive inverts the...

Page 215: ... the same the project data cannot be copied If the drives are the same cancel the setup b When project data are copied to the GOT If OS or project data is copied to the GOT using the CF card or USB memory created with GOT data package acquisition the utility setting is also copied Check each utility setting after copying to the GOT and change the setting according to need c CF card or USB memory t...

Page 216: ...ard format Function of the memory card format Format the CF card or USB memory Display operation of memory card format Memory card format Touch Debug Touch Memory data control Touch Debug Memory card format Main menu Memory data control 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 217: ...moving method of CF card or USB memory 6 1 2Installing and removing procedures of the CF card 6 3 2Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 2 Touch and select the drive to format by drive selection 3 If touch Format button the password input screen is displayed 4 Type and touch the Enter key The dialog box shown on the left will appear The password is fixed to 1111 Confirm the contents...

Page 218: ...play example Debug Touch Memory information Touch Debug Memory information Main menu Check memory information Memory data control Memory data control Touch 10 3 Utility Display 1 2 No Item Description 1 Flash memory empty area size Indicates the memory space of each drive available for the user to store files or folders The A Standard CF Card is not displayed when CF card is not installed If USB m...

Page 219: ...OTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 3 6 USB device status display Function of USB device status display This function displays a list of the USB device connection status in the GOT Also this screen is used to remove the USB device from GOT Display operation of USB device status display Debug Touch USB device status display Touch Memory data control USB device status display Main menu Debug Memory data...

Page 220: ... installed to GOT the screen shown left is displayed 2 USB mass storage is displayed in Device and Stop button is displayed in Attach 3 When the Stop button is touched the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button to prepare the USB devices removal Touch the Cancel button to cancel the preparation of USB devices removal 4 When the preparation of removal is ready the dialog box shown l...

Page 221: ...RAM control Function of SRAM control The SRAM user area usage can be confirmed data in the SRAM user area can be backed up or restored and the SRAM user area is initialized For the available functions in the SRAM user area refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Display operation of SRAM control Debug Touch SRAM control Touch Memory data control USB device statu...

Page 222: ...f the items currently selected 8 SRAM Free space Displays the current free space size or total space size of the SRAM user area 9 Free space Displays the current free space size or total space size of the drive selected for Select drive 10 Initialize all Initializes all areas of the SRAM user area 11 Initialize selected area Select each area of the SRAM user area to initialize multiple areas of th...

Page 223: ...lected areas of the SRAM user area select the check box of the area to be initialized and then touch the Initialize selected area button Example Dialog box when touching the Initialize all button 2 The dialog box shown left appears Check the description of the dialog box To initialize the SRAM user area touch the OK button To cancel the initialization touch the Cancel button 3 When touching the OK...

Page 224: ...description of the dialog box To restore all data in the SRAM user area touch the OK button To cancel the restoration touch the Cancel button 3 When touching the button in the dialog box shown left appears for recheck To start the restoration touch the OK button To cancel the restoration touch the Cancel button 4 The completion dialog box appears when the restoration is completed To close the dial...

Page 225: ... drive where the data is stored and then touch the Backup all area button 2 The dialog box shown left appears Check the description of the dialog box To back up all data in the SRAM user area touch the OK button To cancel the backup touch the Cancel button 3 When touching the OK button in the dialog box shown left appears for recheck To start the backup touch the OK button To cancel the backup tou...

Page 226: ...13 24 13 DEBUG 13 3 Memory Data Control ...

Page 227: ...up information System status Communication setting contents Operation history Screen switching history Clock change history System alarm history CPU error history 14 19 Item Description Reference System alarm Displays error code and error message when error occurs 14 2 Memory check Carries out write read check of the CF card or USB memory and built in flash memory Password 14 4 Drawing Check Carri...

Page 228: ... alarms can be reset on the System alarm display screen For details of system alarm refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Display operation of system alarm Self check Diagnostic functions Touch Self check Touch Diagnostic functions Main menu Touch System alarm System alarm display Touching Reset resets the system alarm display in the GOT error 10 3 U...

Page 229: ...OT error If not eliminated the system alarm display in the GOT error will not be reset even after the reset operation 2 Processings with reset operation The following data in the system information are also reset GOT error code Write device GOT error detection signal System Signal 2 1 b13 1 Eliminate each cause of the system alarm being occurred Error causes can be identified by the error code err...

Page 230: ...memory check Checks whether the memory CF card of the A drive can be read written normally C drive memory check Checks whether the memory Built in flash memory of the C drive can be read written normally E drive memory check Checks whether the memory USB drive of the E drive can be read written normally Self check Diagnostic functions Main menu Touch Self check Touch Diagnostic functions Touch Mem...

Page 231: ...he CF card or USB memory or built in flash memory C drive For details of built in flash memory contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service The following example explains about Memory Check using built in flash memory C drive For the Built in CF card A drive memory check install the CF card before carrying out the same key operations as built in flash memory For the USB drive E drive memo...

Page 232: ...e cancel dialog box is displayed If touch OK returns to the Memory check screen 2 When error is found in memory When error is found by memory check the dialog box indicating the area in which the error occurred is displayed In case of error contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service If touch OK returns to the Memory check screen ...

Page 233: ...f drawing check POINT POINT POINT Notes on drawing check Missing bits is occurred in the following cases When missing bits occurs contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service 1 There are parts drawn in different color with the filled color 2 There are parts of basic figure and drawing patterns which are not drawn according to the layout and procedures described in 14 1 3 Display operation...

Page 234: ... the screen the entire screen color changes in the following order blue black red purple green light blue yellow white Check missing bit and color visually If touch the upper right part of the screen at the final color white screen the following b Basic figure check screen is displayed b Basic figure check Check whether there is no shape transformation of basic figure or display losses The basic f...

Page 235: ...D STANDARD MONITOR OS c Move check among screens Pattern 1 Shape transformation color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal Pattern 2 Shape transformation color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is norm...

Page 236: ...displayed visually in order it is normal Pattern 4 Shape Check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal If touch the upper right part of the screen returns to Display check screen To Pattern 4 To Display check The main screen image after the screen information read and write is executed ...

Page 237: ...operation of Font check POINT POINT POINT Notes on Font Check Judged as normal if the following characters are correctly displayed UNICODE If the characters above are not displayed correctly the fonts may not be installed Install the standard monitor OS again Alphabetic characters etc 0x0000 to 0x04F9 From basic Latin to Kirill Hangul characters 0xAC00 to 0xD7A3 Hangul Hangul auxiliary Kanji 0x4E0...

Page 238: ...he screen 1 Before execute font check Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during Font check Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the Display check screen The installed font data is displayed by touching the upper right part of the screen POINT POINT POINT Option fonts To display optional fonts the option font installation is required...

Page 239: ...ots 16 dots Display operation of Touch panel check POINT POINT POINT Notes on Touch panel check Notes on Touch panel check If the touched part is not filled with yellow color there are the following two possible causes 1 Display part failure 2 Touch panel failure In that case contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service Touch Diagnostic functions Touch panel check Starts Touch panel check...

Page 240: ... the upper left part of the screen Only the upper left part of the screen cannot be filled with yellow If returnes to the self check by touching the upper left part judge that the upper left area operates normally 1 Touch a part of the screen The touched part becomes a yellow filled display 2 If touch the upper left part returns to the self check Black filled screen Yellow color Upper left touch p...

Page 241: ... Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 Communication drivers inapplicable to I O check When the following communication drivers are used the I O check cannot be executed Display operation of I O Check Connection type Communication driver Connection to MITSUBISHI PLC Ethernet connection Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 Connection to FUJI FA PLC FUJI PXR PXG PXH Connection to YASKAWA PLC YASKAWA GL CP9...

Page 242: ...layed If touch OK button after confirming the result returns to I O check If the dialog box mentioned left is displayed after selecting connecting target confirmation or during CPU communication check confirm the following No misconnection with CPU 20 to 64 No missettings of parameter 12 2 Communication Detail Setting No hardware error 19 TROUBLESHOOTING If touch OK button in the dialog box After ...

Page 243: ...s check the following Check if the pins of the connector for self loopback check are incorrectly shorted Check if the channel number for the RS 232 interface is set to 0 None in the communication setting of the GOT utility 12 1 3 Communication setting contents Check if the hardware has no problems 19 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 During check the dialog box shown left is displayed 4 When the all checks ended ...

Page 244: ... the select button of IP address of the other terminal a keyboard is displayed Enter the IP address of the other terminal with the keyboard Default 192 168 3 18 2 If touch the Ping transmission button a ping is sent to the IP address entered in IP address of the other station The result is displayed in the dialog box The timeout time is about 5sec Ethernet status check Self check Diagnostic functi...

Page 245: ...h self check Item Description Start up information Information at power on Information at system start up Maintenance time notification information System status 1 Installed OS Installation history System status 2 Communication driver GOT system configuration information Communication setting contents Displays the controller status Operation history Displays the operation history and execution tim...

Page 246: ... screen 1 The display switches A drive E drive Do not export A drive as touching Export the system status log When selecting A drive install the CF card When selecting the E drive install the USB memory If Batch self check is started without installing the CF card or USB memory the system status log will not be saved The system status log is for manufacturer investigation only Customers cannot vie...

Page 247: ... CHECK 15 DATA CONTROL 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 1 Display example of details screen Touch the items to display the following screens Touch the button to return to the View self check results menu Touch the button in the left bottom of the screen to display the previous screen Touch the button in the right bottom of the screen to display the next screen ...

Page 248: ...14 22 14 SELF CHECK 14 2 Batch Self Check ...

Page 249: ...n Utility 2 When using the project data stored in the Standard CF Card A drive with the GOT hold the CF card installed to the GOT For the USB memory store the project data to the Standard CF Card A drive or Built in flash memory C drive Read Upload Write Write Install Download PC GT Designer3 GOT main unit A drive Standard CF card CF card when installed in GOT Inserting Removing CF card when insta...

Page 250: ...Advanced recipe file Recipe file Logging Logging file Operation log Operation log file Image file Hard copy function Copy files on Windows Resource data Read PC GT Designer3 GOT main unit C drive Built in flash memory A drive Standard CF card CF card when installed in GOT CF card when installed in PC Inserting Removing Copy Copy Install Download Write Upload Read Alarm Hard copy Alarm Hard copy US...

Page 251: ...d Moreover when the different versions will coexist among all OSs standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS by installing OS the installation disapproving dialog will be displayed and the installation process is canceled 3 When download project data GOT automatically compares the version between the project data to be downloaded and the installed OS When the versions are different the...

Page 252: ... 5 A serial number is automatically added to file names Item Display screen Storage destination Drive name folder name BootOS OS information screen A drive C drive E drive G1BOOT 2 Standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS system screen data A drive C drive E drive 3 G1SYS 2 Standard monitor OS system screen management information file Standard monitor OS monitor function 6 8 dot font ASCII characte...

Page 253: ...tails of Advanced Alarm refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions The display operation of alarm information Function Description Reference Information display of files and folders Displays name data size creation date and time of file or folder 15 6 15 28 G1A CSV conversion Converts the G1A file of advanced alarm log file to CSV file 15 8 G1A TXT conversio...

Page 254: ...file or folder In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR 4 Name Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Copy button etc 15 2 1 Alarm information operation 4 Copy operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 5 Path name Displays the path nam...

Page 255: ...f the touched drive is displayed 2 If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed 3 If touch a folder of the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed 4 If touch button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch button the screen scrolls up down by one screen 5 If touch a file name the touched file name is selected 6 Refer to...

Page 256: ... according to the file type to convert to CVS file Button TXT file Button Example Dialog box when button is touched 3 Touch OK button When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box showed at left appears without starting the conversion If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels the conversion 4 The message of completion is displa...

Page 257: ...ROL 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 3 Deletion operation Deletes selected files 1 Touch and select the file to delete 2 If touch Del button the dialog box mentioned left is displayed If touch OK button the file is deleted If touch Cancel button the deletion is canceled 3 When the deletion is completed the completion dialog box is displayed If touch OK button the dialog box...

Page 258: ...f copy destination At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders 4 If touch Exec button the following dialog box shown left is displayed 5 Touch OK button If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button c...

Page 259: ...h display When set in accumulation mode displayed it in tally graph b Tally graph display Refer to the following for details related to setting of the extended alarm watch GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Example Historical graph 1 Touch and select the G1A file to display in a graph 2 If touch Graph button displays the historical graph or tally graph according to the setting of...

Page 260: ...er up to 24 half size characters The 13th of full size character and after the 25th and after for half size character are not displayed The graph displays the alarm within up to 26 lines in one screen b Tally graph display Displays the generated frequency of each alarm by the sideways bar chart By the name of each alarm the contents set for the message of the general alarms by GT Designer3 is disp...

Page 261: ...pe Advanced recipe setting of GT Designer3 is required Function Description Reference Advanced Recipe Information screen Displaying file folder data The file folder name data size and creating date time are displayed 15 15 15 17 G1P CSV conversion G1P file of advanced recipe file is converted to CSV file 15 18 G1P TXT conversion G1P file of advanced recipe file is converted to Unicode text file 15...

Page 262: ...Control Operation of advanced recipe information display Touch Advanced Recipe information Data control Advanced Recipe information Operate advanced recipe file Data control Touch Data control Main menu Touch Data control 10 3 Utility Display ...

Page 263: ... displayed name is file or folder In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR 4 Name Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Rename button etc 15 2 2 Advanced recipe information operation 7 Rename operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation ...

Page 264: ... of record can be changed with GT Designer3 V Record can be loaded saved Record whose value is selected VP Record only for loading Record whose value is selected and cannot be changed Blanc Record only for saving Record whose value is deleted or not selected P Record unusable reserved area Record whose value is not selected and cannot be changed 3 Record Comment Record Comment is displayed 4 File ...

Page 265: ...touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed 3 If touch a folder of the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed 4 If touch button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch button the screen scrolls up down by one screen 5 If touch a file name the touched file name is selected 6 For operation of operating switches refer to t...

Page 266: ...t folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive 4 If touch the Exec button the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen Example Dialog box if the button is touched 5 When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the conv...

Page 267: ...h the CSV TXT G1P button to display Please select destination at the lower left corner of the screen 3 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive 4 Touch the Excute button to display the dialog box shown left Touch the OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 When the file whose name is the same exists in the destin...

Page 268: ...n the file folder is deleted While executing Processing message appears on the screen If touch Cancel button the deletion is canceled 3 When the deletion is completed the completion dialog box is displayed If touch OK button the dialog box is closed 4 When it cannot be deleted the dialog box showed at left appears Only when deleting folder is executed Verify that there is no file in the folder and...

Page 269: ...ng a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders 4 If touch Exec button the following dialog box shown left is displayed Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is...

Page 270: ...ve 4 If touch Exec button the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 When any file with the same name exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the movement Touching the OK button overwrites the file If touch the Cancel button cancels moving 6 When moving is completed completion dia...

Page 271: ... is changed 1 Touch and select the file to change the name 2 If touch the Rename button displays the screen shown left then input the file name to be renamed By touching the following button input text type is changed English capital Numeric Symbol 3 If touch the Enter button displays the dialog box shown left 4 If touch the OK button starts renaming file While executing Processing message appears...

Page 272: ...own left appears then input the file name to be created By touching the following button input text type is changed English capital Numeric Symbol 3 If touch the Enter button displays the dialog box shown left 4 If touch the OK button starts creating folder 5 When creating folder is completed completion dialog box is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog box A Z 0 9 ...

Page 273: ...G1P file is created When advanced recipe is only executed on Utility advanced recipe file should be created with this function in advance 1 Touch the Create G1P button 2 The screen to select the advanced recipe setting is displayed Select the advanced recipe setting to be used for new file After selecting touch the Next button 3 As the input key window is displayed input the file name for new file...

Page 274: ...on 5 When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the creation Touching the OK button overwrites the file If touch the Cancel button cancels creating 6 When creating is completed completion dialog box is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog box ...

Page 275: ... operation Selected record value is loaded in the device of controller 1 Select the recipe file and touch the Execute button 2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment to which you want to load the device value 3 If touch the button the dialog box shown left is displayed 4 If touch the OK button starts loading record 5 When loading is completed completion di...

Page 276: ...ed For changing the record comment of saving destination input the record comment By touching the following button input text type is changed English capital English minuscule Numeric Symbol Other than alphanumeric and symbol can not be inputted If record comment is not changed it is not need to input 4 If touch the Enter button the dialog box shown left is displayed 5 If touch the OK button start...

Page 277: ... loading saving with advanced recipe verifies weather its contents are reflected 1 Select the recipe file and touch the Execute button 2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment for matching the device value 3 If touch the button dialog box shown left is displayed 4 If touch the OK button starts matching record 5 When matching is completed completion dialog ...

Page 278: ...button 2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment to be deleted If the data of which attribution contains P can not be deleted 3 If touch the button the dialog box shown left is displayed 4 If touch the OK button starts deleting device value The Processing message is displayed on the screen 5 When deleting is completed completion dialog box is displayed If t...

Page 279: ... character b Character strings that cannot be set to folder file The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name Even small characters of those cannot be used In addition the folder file name showed below cannot be used The folder name which begins with G1 Folder name and file name which begin with period Folder name and file name which finish with period Folder name...

Page 280: ...r the processing for other file has completed Therefore it may take some time to finish the process of advanced recipe folder file The Processing message is displayed on the screen POINT POINT POINT Estimation of processing time The process may take time depending on the setting of advanced recipe file to be operated The more number of blocks increases the longer it takes to process advanced recip...

Page 281: ...he following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Display operation of logging information Function Description Reference Displaying file folder data The file folder name data size and creating date time are displayed 15 34 15 35 G1L CSV conversion G1L file of logging file is converted to CSV file 15 36 G1L TXT conversion G1L file of logging file is converted to Unicode text...

Page 282: ...older name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Rename button etc 15 2 3 Logging information operation 6 Rename operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 5 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 6 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 7 Creating ...

Page 283: ...e is displayed 2 If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed 3 If touch a folder of the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed 4 If touch button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch button the screen scrolls up down by one screen 5 If touch a file name the touched file name is selected 6 For operation of operating...

Page 284: ... Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive 4 If touch the Exec button the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen Example Dialog box if the button is touched 5 When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the conversion I...

Page 285: ...he file folder to delete 2 If touch Del button the dialog box mentioned left is displayed If touch OK button the file folder is deleted While executing Processing message appears on the screen If touch Cancel button the deletion is canceled 3 When the deletion is completed the completion dialog box is displayed If touch OK button the dialog box is closed 4 When it cannot be deleted the dialog box ...

Page 286: ...lder where the file exists Select other folders 4 If touch Exec button the following dialog box shown left is displayed Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels to c...

Page 287: ...e button 3 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for moving directly below the drive 4 If touch the Exec button the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 When only file with the same name exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the movement Touching the OK but...

Page 288: ...en input the file name to be renamed By touching the following button input text type is changed English capital Numeric Symbol 3 If touch the Enter button displays the dialog box shown left 4 If touch the OK button starts renaming file While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 When renaming is completed completion dialog box is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog b...

Page 289: ...e operation An operation log folder is created 1 Touch the Create Folder button 2 The input key window shown left appears then input the file name to be created By touching the following button input text type is changed English capital Numeric Symbol 3 If touch the Enter button displays the dialog box shown left 4 If touch the OK button starts creating folder 5 When creating folder is completed c...

Page 290: ...ich the file exists cannot be deleted Delete the folder after having deleted the files In addition on the logging information screen the files other than logging files are not displayed on GOT When the folder in which there is no file displayed on the screen cannot be deleted confirm whether there is other file in CF card or USB memory by using personal computer etc 2 Precautions for operation a P...

Page 291: ...tion Function Description Reference Displaying file folder data The file folder name data size and creating date time are displayed 15 46 G1O CSV conversion G1O file of operation log file is converted to CSV file 15 47 G1O TXT conversion G1O file of operation log file is converted to Unicode text file 15 47 Del File or folder is deleted 15 48 Copy File is copied 15 49 Move File is moved 15 50 Rena...

Page 292: ...g dialog box is set in GT Designer3 the default display drive for displaying the operation log information screen is the drive set in GT Designer3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 22 OPERATION LOG FUNCTION In the following cases the default display drive is A drive Save to is not specified in GT Designer3 The drive set as Save to in GT Designer3 is not found ...

Page 293: ... is file or folder In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR 4 Name Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Rename button etc 15 2 4 Operation log information operation 6 Rename operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 5 Path name Displ...

Page 294: ...ion of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed 4 If touch button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch button the screen scrolls up down by one screen 5 If touch a file name the touched file name is selected 6 For operation of operating switches refer to the following G1O CSV G1O TXT This section 2 Delete This section 3 Copy This section 4 Move This section 5 ...

Page 295: ...ng button in accordance with destination file type CSV file button Unicode text file button 3 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive 4 If touch the Exec button the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen Example Dialog box if the button is touched 5 When the file whose...

Page 296: ... the file folder is deleted While executing Processing message appears on the screen If touch Cancel button the deletion is canceled 3 When the deletion is completed the completion dialog box is displayed If touch OK button the dialog box is closed 4 When it cannot be deleted the dialog box showed at left appears Only when deleting folder is executed Verify that there is no file in the folder and ...

Page 297: ...lder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders 4 If touch Exec button the following dialog box shown left is displayed Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displa...

Page 298: ...touch the Exec button the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 When only file with the same name exists in the destination folder the dialog shown left appears without starting the movement Touching the OK button overwrites the file If touch the Cancel button cancels moving 6 When moving is completed completion dialog box...

Page 299: ...ed 1 Touch and select the file to change the name 2 If touch the Rename button displays thescreen shown left then input the file name to be renamed By touching the following button input text type is changed English capital Numeric Symbol 3 If touch the Enter button displays the dialog box shown left 4 If touch the OK button starts renaming file While executing Processing message appears on the sc...

Page 300: ...eft appears then input the file name to be created By touching the following button input text type is changed English capital Numeric Symbol 3 If touch the Enter button displays the dialog box shown left 4 If touch the OK button starts creating folder 5 When creating folder is completed completion dialog box is displayed If touch the button closes the dialog box A Z 0 9 ...

Page 301: ... the list 2 Touching the button displays the list In the list the following contents can be checked Display items Date Time Screen No Operation type Value after change For operation of operating switches refer to the following Date ascending descending a Display order switching operation Search b Search operation 3 To display the details of an operation log touch the row for that operation log to ...

Page 302: ... they are collected In case that the displayed operation logs are not lined up in time order due to the time change of GOT clock the displayed logs may not be lined up in order of the log dates even though the operation logs are switched b Search operation 1 Touch Date ascending Date descending in the list to switch the display order of operation logs Date ascending and Date descending are switche...

Page 303: ...NITOR OS 3 Touching the Enter button displays the dialog box on the left Touch the OK button When processing is being executed the Processing message is displayed on the screen 4 The results found are displayed and the dialog box on the left is displayed To continue a search touch the OK button To stop a search touch the Cancel button 5 When searching is completed a completion message is displayed...

Page 304: ... files is displayed in a list 2 In the list the following contents can be checked Display items Date Time Screen No Operation type Value after change For operation of operating switches refer to the following Date ascending descending a Display order switching operation Search b Search operation 3 For the method for displaying the detail of each operation log refer to the following 8 List display ...

Page 305: ...annot be used The folder name which begins with G1 Folder name and file name which begin with period Folder name and file name which finish with period Folder name and file name which have only one period or two periods c For deleting the folder The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted Delete the folder after having deleted the files In addition on the operation log information screen...

Page 306: ...sign Manual Functions The display operation of hardcopy information Function Description Reference Information display of files and folders Displays the kind name data size creation date and time of the file or folder 15 59 15 60 Delete Deletes the file 15 61 Copy Copies the file 15 62 Rename Renames the file 15 63 Data control Main menu Data control Touch Data control Touch Data control Hard copy...

Page 307: ...he check box is selected up to 512 files can be selected 3 Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR 4 Name Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Copy button etc 15 2 5 The operation of hardcopy information 3 C...

Page 308: ...lder is displayed 3 If touch a name of the folder of the information in the folder of one higher hierarchy is displayed 4 If touch button of the scrollbar scrolls up down line by one line If touch button the screen scrolls up down by one screen 5 If touch a file name the touched file name is selected 6 For the operations of the delete copy and rename refer to the following Delete This section 2 Co...

Page 309: ... CONTROL 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 2 Delete operation Deletes the selected file 1 Touch and select the file to delete 2 If touch Del button the screen mentioned left is displayed If touch OK button deletes the file If touch Cancel button cancel the deletion 3 When the deletion is completed the completion dialog box is displayed 4 If touch OK button the dialog box is ...

Page 310: ...o the folder of copy destination The copied file cannot be copied to its own folder Select the different folder 4 If touch Exec button the dialog box shown left is displayed 5 Touch OK button If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the screen shown left is displayed without starting to copy 6 If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels to co...

Page 311: ... and select the file to change the name 2 Touch the Rename button and then the screen shown left is displayed Input the file name to be changed Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons Alphabet capital Numeric Symbol 3 Touch the Enter button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed 4 Touch the OK button and then renaming the file is started 5 When renam...

Page 312: ...ownloading special data are not available Special data information display operation Function Description Reference Information display of files and folders Displays the name data size creation date and time of file or folder 15 66 Delete Deletes a file or holder 15 66 Property Displays the property of special data 15 67 Data check Copies a file 15 67 Download Downloads the special data written in...

Page 313: ...hether the displayed name is file or folder In the case of file displays the extension in the case of folder displays DIR 3 Name Displays the name of special data in the selected drive When the name exceeds 18 characters the 19th and later characters are not displayed The special data being monitored on the GOT is preceded by 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently di...

Page 314: ... and download Delete This section 2 Property This section 3 Data check This section 4 Download This section 5 3 Touching the button closes the screen 1 Touch and select the file to delete 2 If touch the Delete button the screen mentioned left is displayed Check if the deletion target file is specified correctly Touching the OK button deletes the file Touching the Cancel button cancels the deletion...

Page 315: ...lay the following information is displayed 2 If touch the button the screen scrolls up down line by one line 3 If touch the button screen scrolls up down by one screen 4 If touch the the property display is closed and returned to the previous screen 1 Select a data check target file and touch the Data check button The data check is executed and the result is displayed by the dialog box shown left ...

Page 316: ...he project data from GT Designer3 to CF card select C Built in flash memory for Project Data in Boot Drive 1 Install a CF card or USB memory on the GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card or USB memory 6 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card 6 3 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 2 Touch A Standard CF Card in Select drive 3 If touch t...

Page 317: ...LATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 4 If there is a project data of the same name in the C drive the screen shown left is displayed If touch the OK button the project data is downloaded and the project data in the C drive is overwritten Downloading is canceled when the Cancel button is touched 5 When the downloading is completed the dialog box mentioned left is displayed Touching the O...

Page 318: ...bles adding editing deleting importing and exporting the operator information 15 70 15 73 Add operation Adds operator information to the GOT 15 74 Edit operation Edits the operator information stored in the GOT 15 76 Delete operation Deletes the operator information stored in the GOT 15 77 Undo Restores the current operator information to the previous saved one 15 78 Import operation Imports the o...

Page 319: ...information management screen a b c d e f No Item Description a Operator Name Displays operator names b ID Displays operator IDs c Level Displays security levels for operators d Update Displays the last updated dates of the operator information e Operation keys Execution keys for each function f Drive in use Displays and sets the storage location for imported and exported operator information Touc...

Page 320: ...ed or input an operator name to be added Up to 16 alphanumeric characters b Operator ID The operator ID to be edited is displayed or input an operator name to be added Setting range 1 to 32766 Maximum number of registrations 255 c Level The operator security level to be edited is displayed or input an operator security level to be added 0 to 15 d Password Input a password Up to 16 alphanumeric cha...

Page 321: ...er types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons Alphabet capital Alphabet small letter Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 3 When the administrator password is correctly input the Operator information management screen in displayed For operating operation switches refer to the following Add This section 4 a Edit This section 4 b Delete This section 4 c U...

Page 322: ...n operator name Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons Alphabet capital Alphabet small letter Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key b Touch the OperatorID and then the Operator ID input dialog box is displayed Input an operator ID When the input is completed touch the Enter key c Touch the level and then the Operator level input dialog box ...

Page 323: ... and then input a password When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the password input is completed the New password input confirmation dialog box is displayed Input the same password e For enabling the setting of Make a permanent password touch the check box for Make a permanent password and then the setting is switched Disabled Enabled 3 Touch the OK button after all items are input ...

Page 324: ...ation edit screen is displayed and then touch an item to be edited a Level b Password c Make a permanent password d Use ext auth ID e Ext auth ID For how to edit operator information refer to the following This section 4 4 Touch the OK button after all items are input and then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the input operator information is added Touch the Cancel button or the button a...

Page 325: ...on Delete the operator information stored in the GOT 1 Select the operator information to be deleted with touching the operator information 2 Touch the Delete button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed 3 Touch the OK button and then the selected operator information is deleted Touch the Cancel button and then the delete operation is canceled 4 When the delete operation is completed a c...

Page 326: ...OK button 3 The Admin password authentication screen is displayed and then input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons Alphabet capital Alphabet small letter Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 4 When the administrator password is correctly input the current operator information is restored to the previous save...

Page 327: ...to a CF card to the GOT 1 Touch the Import button 2 The dialog box shown left is displayed Touch button and then the Admin password authentication screen is displayed Input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons Alphabet capital Alphabet small letter Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 3 When the administrator p...

Page 328: ...box shown left is displayed Touch OK button and then the Admin password authentication screen is displayed Input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons Alphabet capital Alphabet small letter Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 5 When the administrator password is correctly input the dialog box shown left is disp...

Page 329: ...STANDARD MONITOR OS Password change 1 Password change function The passwords to be used for the operator authentication can be changed For the password change log into the GOT in advance with the operator name corresponding to the password to be changed 2 Display operation of password change Touch Data control Touch Data control Touch Operator Information Data control Data control Password change ...

Page 330: ...d change dialog box is displayed 3 Input the current password on the Password change dialog box Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons Alphabet capital Alphabet small letter Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 4 Input a new password 5 After inputting a new password input the new password again 6 When the new password is correctly input th...

Page 331: ...me the GOT is operated until when you automatically log out of the GOT can be set 1 to 60 minutes 0 is invalid 15 84 Auth method The authentication method can be switched Operator name password 15 84 Password expiration date Set the item for regularly changing the password to be used for the operator authentication 1 to 1000 days 0 is invalid When the password is out of date after setting the pass...

Page 332: ...or password is correctly input the Function setting screen in displayed Touch an item to be set a Automatic logout time b Auth method c Password expiration date d Initial position input 1 e Valid byte count input 1 1 The external authentication cannot be used for GT16 Handy a Touch Automatic logout time and then the Automatic logout time edit dialog box is displayed Input the time When the input i...

Page 333: ...N OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS c Touch Password expiration date and then the Password expiration date edit dialog box is displayed Input the expiration date When the input is completed touch the Enter key 4 Touch the OK button after all items are input and then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the input setting is saved Touch the Cancel button or the button and then the dialo...

Page 334: ...ard installing and uploading OS files are not available Display operation of OS information Function Description Reference Information display of files and folders Displays the kind name data size creation date and time of the file or folder 15 87 15 88 Install All OS files written in the A drive Standard CF card and E drive USB drive can be installed in the C drive Built in flash memory 15 89 Upl...

Page 335: ...2 Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is for file or folder In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR 3 Name The file name or folder name which is stored in the selected drive or folder is displayed When the file name or folder name exceeds 20 characters the exceeding characters the 21th character or after are not displayed 4 Path name The path name of the current...

Page 336: ...uch a folder name of the information of the folder in one higher hierarchy is displayed 4 If touch button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch button the screen scrolls up down by one screen 5 If touch a file name the touched file name is selected and inverted 6 Refer to the following for operation of installation upload property data check Installation This section 2 U...

Page 337: ...d CF card or E drive USB drive can be installed in GOT This item explains using the A drive 1 Install the CF card to which the BootOS or OS to install is written to the GOT 2 Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card 6 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card 6 3 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 3 Touch A Built in CF Card for drive selection...

Page 338: ...BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS This item explains using the A drive 1 Install the CF card used as the uploading destination to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card 6 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card 6 3 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 2 Touch A Built in CF Card of Select drive 3 Touching Upload starts the uploading 4 When t...

Page 339: ...or each file selected by 2 If touch button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch button the screen scrolls up down by one screen 3 Touching button returns the screen to the previous screen display Item Description Name Displays the file name Size Displays the file size Type Displays the following items according to the file type Boot BootOS Basic Standard monitor OS Exte...

Page 340: ...15 93 15 94 Delete Deletes project data 15 94 Copy Copies project data can copy between the A drive E drive or in each drive 15 95 Property display Displays the project data creation date author name and the version of GT Designer3 15 96 Data check Data check of the file can be executed 15 97 Download Downloads the project data written in the A drive Standard CF card E drive USB drive to C drive B...

Page 341: ...is not installed E USB drive is not displayed 2 Name The project data Project Folder in the selected drive is displayed When the name exceeds 18 characters the 19th and later characters are not displayed The project data being monitored on the GOT is preceded by 3 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 4 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 5 ...

Page 342: ...roperty data check download upload Delete This section 2 Copy This section 3 Property This section 4 Data check This section 5 Download setup This section 6 Upload setup cancel This section 7 4 Touching button closes the screen 1 Touch and select the file to delete 2 Screen mentioned left is displayed if Delete button is touched Confirm the deletion targeted file is specified correctly If touch OK...

Page 343: ...estination Set the same character with System Setting of System Environment of GT Designer3 for the folder name GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Install the CF card mentioned above to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card 6 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card 6 3 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 3 Open P...

Page 344: ...l button cancels to copy 8 When copying completes the dialog box of completion is displayed If touch OK button closes the dialog box 1 If touch Property button after selecting the project data to display the property the property is displayed as shown left In property display the following information is displayed 2 If touch button the screen scrolls up down line by one line 3 If touch button the ...

Page 345: ...nitors using the data in the C drive This item explains using the A drive POINT POINT POINT Before download operation 1 Setup cancel When the project data in the A drive is set up the project data cannot be downloaded to the C drive Execute setup cancel 7 b Setup cancel operation before downloading the project data 2 Project data to be stored in a CF card When storing the project data from GT Desi...

Page 346: ... touch the Download button the dialog box mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button executes downloading 5 If any project data with the same name exists in the C drive the screen shown left is displayed without starting downloading In this case the project data of the C drive is overwritten with the project data of the A drive when downloaded Touching the Cancel button cancels the downloa...

Page 347: ... drive POINT POINT POINT Before setup operation When storing project data from GT Designer3 to CF card select A Standard CF Card or E USB drive for Project Data in Boot Drive 1 Install the CF card or USB memory in GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card or USB memory 6 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card 6 3 2 Installing and removing procedures of the ...

Page 348: ...t data of the A drive or E drive is set up Execute setup cancel 7 b Setup cancel operation before uploading the project data 1 Touch A Standard CF Card in Select drive 2 If touch the Upload button the screen mentioned left is displayed 3 Touching the OK button executes uploading 4 If any project data with the same name exists in the A drive the screen shown left is displayed without starting uploa...

Page 349: ...DARD MONITOR OS b Setup cancel operation By setup cancel setup is canceled This item explains using the A drive 1 Touch A Standard CF Card in Select drive 2 If touch the Upload button the screen mentioned left is displayed 3 If touch the OK button setup cancel is executed 4 When the setup cancel is completed the dialog box mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button restarts the GOT After r...

Page 350: ...15 102 15 DATA CONTROL 15 3 OS Project Information ...

Page 351: ...ng GOT 1 When execute installation with USB memory standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance For the writing of OS in GT Designer3 refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals POINT POINT POINT CoreOS In 16 1 to 16 4 of this chapter only BootOS and standard monitor OS are described For CoreOS refer to the following 16 5 CoreOS BootOS or standard mo...

Page 352: ...T CF card that stores data with the OS boot drive set to the A drive A G1BOOT Standard monitor OS Required for the GOT operation as the monitoring function of GOT installation and deletion of the OS file or project data touch key control or display function of the screen and guidance Required for display and operation of the user created screen and utility screen Not installed in GOT at factory sh...

Page 353: ... Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Uploading from other GOT BootOS or standard monitor OS has been installed 15 DATA CONTROL 3 Using CF card that stores data with OS boot drive set to A drive GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals POINT POINT POINT Precautions on writing BootOS standard monitor OS in CF card or USB memory When writing BootOS standard monitor O...

Page 354: ... at factory shipment All OS and project data are erased 2 Copying project data using CF card or USB memory After installing BootOS standard monitor OS and other OS download the project data At this time match the version of the standard monitor OS in the GOT with the version of the standard monitor OS with which the project data was created 3 When OS and project data are in the CF card or USB memo...

Page 355: ...d monitor OS is installed in the built in flash memory The CF card access LED is lit during the install execution Do not pull out the CF card or power off the GOT while the CF card access LED is lit 5 The GOT restarts automatically after the installation is completed When the standard monitor OS is already installed the GOT restarts by touching the OK button 6 After confirming normal restart switc...

Page 356: ...cess LED is not lit and remove the USB memory from the USB interface of the GOT For removing methods of the USB memory refer to the following 13 3 6 USB device status display POINT POINT POINT 1 Drives to be used When installing OS at power on use the A or E drive 2 S MODE switch pressing installation function When the CF card or USB memory that stores data with the OS boot drive set to the A driv...

Page 357: ... monitor OS after purchasing GOT Install standard monitor OS by the following two methods 1 GT Designer3 2 Installing when starting the GOT Operation procedure 1 When installing with CF card 1 Power OFF the GOT After CF card access LED is off install the CF card in which BootOS standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the CF card interface of GOT 2 Switch ON the CF card access switch of GO...

Page 358: ...screen Utility on the GOT and install BootOS standard monitor OS from the USB drive to GOT 3 The USB memory access LED is lit during install execution Do not pull out the CF card or power OFF the GOT while the USB memory access LED is lit 4 GOT restarts automatically after installation is completed 5 After confirming normal restart confirm that the USB memory access LED is not lit Display the USB ...

Page 359: ...e installed is old execute the following operations to prevent it from being rewritten When installing from GT Designer3 a message is displayed on the personal computer screen Follow the instructions in that message a When only BootOS is stored in the CF card or USB memory The message indicating disabled installation is displayed Touch the OK button to cancel installation After canceling installat...

Page 360: ...of BootOS or standard monitor OS installed in GOT at OS information of the utility Refer to the following for details 15 3 OS Project Information Check the version of BootOS installed in GOT at product shipment on the rating plate on GOT rear face When the installation process is discontinued When the installation process is normally executed Standard monitor OS 1 Communication driver 2 Optional f...

Page 361: ...he followings to cancel the installation on the way The GOT may not operate Powering the GOT off Pressing the GOT reset button If the GOT does not operate please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative If the GOT does not recover even when installing the CoreOS the error may be caused by a hardware failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System ...

Page 362: ...of GT Designer3 operation refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 After confirming that the GOT is powered off install the CF card in the GOT After installing switch the CF card access switch on 3 Powering the GOT on displays the following screen To cancel the installation power the GOT off and remove the CF card ...

Page 363: ...allation is completed the dialog as shown below is displayed The POWER LED of the GOT blinks green orange at the installation completion Confirm that the message is displayed and power the GOT off 6 Remove the CF card after powering the GOT off 7 Powering the GOT on again displays the screen as shown below The GOT goes to the status of factory shipment Install OS Standard monitor OS communication ...

Page 364: ...igner3 to the CF card again The message is displayedon the GOT GOT error Contact your local sales office The GOT main unit is broken Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative CF card error Installation will be cancelled Check whether the CF card can be used The CF card is defective 1 Format the CF card and re execute 2 Replace the CF card GOT type and OS...

Page 365: ...ator refer to the following Help of MELSOFT Navigator 1 The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green Set items which are displayed in green cells from the MELSOFT Navigator When changing in GT Designer3 refer to the following 3 2 When setting the communication interface for the connection with the iQ Works untargeted equipment set...

Page 366: ... the GOT Setting 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting dialog box appears Select the channel No to be used from the list menu 3 Refer to the following explanations for the setting POINT POINT POINT Channel No 2 to No 4 Use the channel No 2 to No 4 when using the Multi channel function For details of the Multi channel function refer to the following 30 MULTI CHAN...

Page 367: ...the settings refer to the following Setting the communication interface section in each chapter Item Description Use CH Select this item when setting the channel No 2 to No 4 Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT Type Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT For the settings refer to the following 2 Setting Controller Type I F Select th...

Page 368: ...HCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU MELSEC QnU DC Q17nD M NC DR 1 Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU Q12DCCPU V Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS Q26DHCCPU LS Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU S1 Q173DCPU S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU S1 CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CRnQ 700 Q172DRCPU CR750 Q Q172D...

Page 369: ...S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU A2SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 Type Model name Type Model name MELSEC A A0J2HCPU DC24 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF A2CJCPU S3 A1FXCPU A273UCPU A273UHCPU MELSEC A A273UHCPU S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU S3 A171SCPU A171SCPU S3 A171SCPU S3N A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU S1 MELSEC ...

Page 370: ...Q XSEL JX XSEL KX XSEL KTX XSEL PX XSEL QX SSEL ASEL PSEL IAI ROBO CYLINDER PCON C PCON CG PCON CF PCON CY PCON SE PCON PL PCON CA PCON PO ACON C ACON CG ACON CY ACON SE ACON PL ACON PO SCON C SCON CA ERC2 Type Model name Type Model name AZBIL SDC DMC Series DMC10 DMC50 SDC15 SDC25 SDC26 SDC35 SDC36 SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31 SDC40A SDC40B SDC40G SDC45 SDC46 CMS CMF015 CMF050 CML MQV MPC MVF PBC201 V...

Page 371: ... PC3JG P CPU PC3JG CPU PC3J CPU PC3JL CPU PC2JC CPU PC2J16P CPU PC2J16PR CPU PC2J CPU PC2JS CPU PC2JR CPU Type Model name SHARP JW JW 21CU JW 31CUH JW 50CUH JW 22CU JW 32CUH JW 33CUH JW 70CUH JW 100CUH JW 100CU Z 512J Shinko Technos Controller Series ACS 13A C5 JCS 33A C5 JCR 33A C5 JCD 33A C5 JCM 33A C5 JIR 301 M C5 PCD 33A M C5 PC935 M C5 PC955 M C5 PC935 M C PC955 M C Shinko Technos Controller ...

Page 372: ...I S10mini S10V LQP510 LQP520 LQP800 LQP000 LQP010 LQP011 LQP120 FUJI MICREX F Series F55 F70 F120S F140S F15 S FUJI PXR PXG PXH PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 PXR9 Type Model name Type Model name FUJI PXR PXG PXH PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 PXH9 FUJI MICREX SX SPH SPH200 SPH300 SPH3000 SPH2000 YASKAWA GL PROGIC8 PROGIC 8 GL120 GL130 GL60S GL60H GL70H YASKAWA CP9200SH MP900 Series MP920 MP930 MP940 CP 9200SH YASKAWA CP9200 H C...

Page 373: ...OGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Series UT320 UT321 UT350 UT351 UT420 UT450 UT520 UT550 UT551 UT750 UP350 UP351 UP550 UP750 UM330 UM331 UM350 UM351 US1000 UT130 UT150 UT152 UT155 UP150 UT2400 UT2800 UT32A Type Model name YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Series UT35A UT52A UT55A UP35A UP55A UM33A RKC SR Mini HG H PCP J H PCP A H PCP B Z TIO Z DIO Z CT CB100 CB400 CB500 CB700 CB900 FB100 FB...

Page 374: ... 1756 L72S 1794 L33 1794 L34 GE Series 90 IC693CPU311 IC693CPU313 IC693CPU323 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 IC693CPU363 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 Type Model name GE Series 90 IC697CPU731 IC697CPX772 IC697CPX782 IC697CPX928 IC697CPX935 IC697CPU780 IC697CGR772 IC697CGR935 IC697CPU788 IC697CPU789 IC697CPM790 IC200UAA003 IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 IC200UAA007 IC200UAR028 IC200UDD110 IC200...

Page 375: ...3M Schneider Electric TSX P57 253M TSX P57 303M TSX P57 353M TSX P57 453M 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 534 14U 140 CPU 651 50 140 CPU 651 60 140 CPU 671 60 140 CPU 113 02 140 CPU 113 03 140 CPU 434 12A 140 CPU 534 14A Microcomputer connection Microcomputer Ethernet interface RS 232 interface RS 422 485 interface RS 422 485 interface and RS 232 interface cannot be used at the same time Sw...

Page 376: ...ed Setting 1 Select Common I F Communication Setting from the menu 2 The I F Communication Setting dialog box appears Make the settings with reference to the following explanation POINT POINT POINT When using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator When setting Controller Setting in GT Designer3 using the parameter function of MELSOFT Navigator all of I F Communication Setting are g...

Page 377: ...H No according to the intended purpose The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used 0 Not used 1 to 4 Used for connecting a controller of channel No 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment Channel setting 8 GOT extended computer 9 Used for connecting Host PC Used for gateway function and Ethernet download Multi Used for Ethernet multiple connection I F The communication type of...

Page 378: ... Designer3 displays the device that cannot be converted no corresponding device type or excessive setting ranges as In this case set the device again b When the changed Manufacturer or Controller Type does not correspond to the network The network will be set to the host station c When the Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed to None The GT Designer3 displays the device of the changed channe...

Page 379: ...ing manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual 17 3 1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT 1 Select Communication Write to GOT from the menu 2 The Communication configuration dialog box appears Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer Click the OK button when the settings are completed 3 The GOT Write tab appears on the Communicate with GOT dialog box ...

Page 380: ... using GT Designer3 For reading from the GOT refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual 1 Select Communication Read from GOT from the menu 2 The Communication configuration dialog box appears Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer Click the OK button when the settings are completed 3 The GOT Read tab appears on the Communicate with GOT...

Page 381: ... screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injur...

Page 382: ...isual check No foreign matter sticking Remove clean No Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action 1 Surrounding environment Ambient temperature Make measurement with thermometer or hygrometer Measure corrosive gas Display section 0 to 50 For use in control panel temperature inside control panel is ambient temperature Other portions 0 to 55 Ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH Atmosphere No corrosi...

Page 383: ...tergent For the display operation of the Clean screen refer to the following 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS POINT POINT POINT Precautions for cleaning Do not use chemicals such as thinner organic solvents and strong acids since they may cause the protective sheet to be deformed or the dissolvable paint on the surface to peel off In addition do not use spray solvents since...

Page 384: ...er to the following for details of the battery status display by the utility screen 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP By using system alarm the message that notifies the battery voltage has decreased can be displayed at the battery voltage low on the screen of the GOT 11 2 1 Display setting functions Refer to the following for details of the system alarm display GT Designer3 Version1 Sc...

Page 385: ...ition The Write Device is D20 and all data is used the button is clicked on the setting screen of drawing software for the system information assignment D36 b12 Battery voltage low System Signal 2 2 Turned on upon a battery voltage drop Used as shown below in the sequence program For details of system information refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals M32 Ou...

Page 386: ...sed of separately from other wastes 2 Exportation precautions The new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC requires the following when marketing or exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states To print the symbol on batteries devices or their packaging To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products a Labelling To market or export batteries and or devices with bui...

Page 387: ... FA Center 1 Life of backlight The usable duration of backlight can be extended by setting to Screen saving backlight off in the utility of GOT GOT set up Refer to the following for details 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 2 Time for replacement of backlight Time for the replacement of backlight can be set in the GOT Utility notifying the maintenance timing For details refer to the fol...

Page 388: ...put to external devices such as lamp or buzzer The following provides an example of outputting the backlight shutoff detection signal from a FX Series PLC to an external device using system information Condition The Written Device is D20 and all data is used the button is clicked on the setting screen of drawing software for the system information assignment D36 b14 Backlight shutoff detection Sys...

Page 389: ...tatus for a while 2 When the wiring status needs to be improved GOT installation status check sheet When the noise caused by the GOT wiring status is considered to have caused the malfunction etc based on the check result of 1 above take corrective action for wiring using GOT installation status check sheet When the GOT is restored see the status for a while 3 When corrective action other than 1 a...

Page 390: ...k the setting of the read device When no problem is found in the setting proceed to 1 d Blinks in green orange The backlight has run out Replace the backlight If the GOT is not restored proceed to 1 d Not lit The power is not supplied Check if the power is supplied If the GOT is not restored proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation When the power is supplied the GOT hardware may be faulty d Scr...

Page 391: ... alarm display function can be used take the action for the error code system alarm displayed If the action cannot be taken proceed to 2 b Disabled The system alarm display function cannot be used Proceed to 2 c b Executing of I O check from the GOT utility Communication error Display details Example A message indicating the cause may be a connection error was displayed Proceed to 2 c No error The...

Page 392: ... the GOT ON OFF 1 Restored Not restored Proceed to c c Reset or power ON OFF the PLC CPU Restored Not restored Proceed to d d Power the GOT and PLC CPU ON OFF simultaneously Restored Not restored Proceed to e e Connect the cable again Restored Not restored Proceed to f The cable connection may be faulty Securely connect the cable If an error occurs again proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation...

Page 393: ... cables mixed Wiring the power line and communication cable in the panel without mixing them in the duct can reduce the influence of noise Effective Ineffective Current status The power line and communication cable are installed together Installed together Not installed together Measure for the cables installed together Fig A Leading the power line and communication cable outside the panel at sepa...

Page 394: ...uch as MCCB electromagnetic contactor relay solenoid valve or induction motor When a surge suppressor is used fill out the entry area below with the surge suppressor model name and the name of the equipment for which the surge suppressor is used Used Not used Measure for the equipment without a surge suppressor used Attaching the surge suppressor on the cable close to the load can reduce the influ...

Page 395: ...A Independent grounding can reduce the influence of noise If independent grounding is not allowed be sure to perform shared grounding as shown in Fig B Effective Ineffective Fig B GOT FG LG Connection cable Connector conversion box Panel grounding Panel grounding FG FG CN1B CN1A CN3 CN2 LG a PLC Servo GOT FG LG Connection cable Panel grounding Grounding for power system Grounding for power system ...

Page 396: ... in Fig C is difficult perform wiring as shown in Fig D Effective Ineffective Fig D FG Connection cable GOT Ground cable led from the panel having the control equipment Connector conversion box FG Ground cable led from the panel having the control equipment GOT Ground to the panel Use a short and thick wire as possible Connection cable Connector conversion box FG Ground cable led from the panel ha...

Page 397: ...sed Not used Measure for the equipment for which the power from the same system is used Connecting an isolation transformer as well as separating the wiring of the GOT power from that of the power of the I O equipment and power equipment reduces the influence of noise Effective Ineffective Main power PLC power AC200V I O power Main circuit power I O equipment Power equipment PLC GOT Main power PLC...

Page 398: ... the PLC a Power supply module b CPU module c Serial communication module computer link module Used Not used d Network module Used Not used e Interrupt module Used Not used f Positioning module Used Not used g Number of extension stages stages h If any other module etc is used please describe it Entry area for recurrence when the malfunction occurred after the action is taken 3 Describe the operat...

Page 399: ...register refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 19 2 1 Error contents display This section describes the example for displaying error code and error message on GOT Popup displaying the error code and error message Advanced alarm popup display System alarm If an error occurs the error code and error message can be popup displayed on the front of the mo...

Page 400: ...n alarmed drive cannot be confirmed in the system alarm regarding file access however it can be specified by confirming the file access error signal b7 to 10 of system signal 2 2 Error source Error code Description Channel No storage destination 1 Reference Controller 0 to 99 Value of D9008 Error code of CPU for ACPU GS263 User s manual of the ACPU connected with GOT 100 to 299 Error code of the f...

Page 401: ...bserved by the alarm history display function has exceeded the maximum points Delete the restored history to decrease the number of alarm histories 312 No of sampling has exceeded upper limit Delete collected data The collection frequency exceeded the upper limit when Store Memory and Accumulate Average were set in the scatter graph Approve Clear trigger setup in the scatter graph Set the Operatio...

Page 402: ... is being displayed input Change the device data to be displayed to the BCD value Correct the input value to the 4 digits integer 351 Recipe file error Confirm content of recipe file The contents of the recipe file are not normal Confirm the contents of the recipe files in the CF card or USB memory Reboot the GOT after deleting the recipe file in the CF card or USB memory format 352 Recipe file ma...

Page 403: ...2 Invalid device value in time action setting When controllers are controlled with the GOT s time action function the set No is our of range or the set device values regarding the operation settings are out of range or invalid Set valid values 370 Upper and lower limit value error Confirm value setting The setting of lower upper limit value is Upper limit Lower limit Correct the setting so as to b...

Page 404: ...Cannot read write device protected by keyword Remove keyword The key word is set in PLC CPU Cancel the key word 420 E71 specification is ASCII ASCII code is selected in Ethernet operations of the PLC side setting Select Binary code 421 E71 is set as read only Clear setting The Ethernet module on the PLC side is set in read only Set the Ethernet module on the PLC side to write enabled 422 Not commu...

Page 405: ...PU to know if the path has been switched Check the cable connection status and the PLC CPU status This error may occur when the load of the PLC CPU becomes heavier when accessing other stations In such a case transfer the data of the other stations to the host station PLC CPU and monitor them at the host Perform one of the following operations if the PLC scanning time is long COM instruction Exten...

Page 406: ... Warning Backlight needs replacement The dedicated GS is notifying that the backlight power on addition time has reached the set time or more The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the backlight The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time ...

Page 407: ...voltage low etc Confirm the battery status 530 Improper monitor device Confirm monitor channel The channel of the specified monitor target does not exist or the channel is not the monitor target Confirm the monitor target channel of the screen data 535 Cannot open image file Confirm whether any file exists in the CF card or USB memory 536 Image file error or invalid file format Confirm whether ima...

Page 408: ...oading recipe is about to be executed to the record of which recipe device value is not set Specify the record of which recipe device value is set 591 Advanced Recipe error Check recipe data The advanced recipe setting is not correct Confirm the advanced recipe setting of the project data and download it to the GOT again 595 Logging file error Logging file error When collecting data again delete l...

Page 409: ...020 on the applicable network manual 801 Abnormal baton passing status Refer to explanations of SB0047 on the applicable network manual 802 Abnormal cyclic transmission status Refer to explanations of SB0049 on the applicable network manual 803 Transient error Refer to explanations of SB00EE on the applicable network manual 804 The cable on the IN side is disconnected or is not connected Refer to ...

Page 410: ...19 22 19 TROUBLESHOOTING 19 2 Error Message and System Alarm ...

Page 411: ...imensions App 1 17 DRAWING SOFTWARE SETTINGS 18 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 19 TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions External dimensions of Handy GOT Unit mm inch 201 7 92 21 0 83 50 1 97 47 1 86 230 9 06 ...

Page 412: ...bout140 5 52 11 0 44 Handy GOT side Connector conversion box side Label GT16H C 42P Unit mm inch Handy GOT side About140 5 52 L Connector conversion box side M2 6 45 1 78 16 0 63 71 2 8 9 4 GT16H C 37PE Unit mm inch 55 2 17 56 2 21 ON ID No ES1A ES2A ES2B ES3A ES3B FG ES1B U RS 232 10BASE T 100BASE TX RS 422 L OFF ES1A ES2A ES2B ES3A ES3B INPUT 24VDC ES1B SW COM SW6 SW4 KSW1 DSW1 DSW2 SW2 SW1 SW5 ...

Page 413: ...ES Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 3 17 DRAWING SOFTWARE SETTINGS 18 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 19 TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES GT16H CNB 37S 37 5 1 47 82 3 22 113 4 44 Terminal block cover opened Unit mm inch ...

Page 414: ...ing the backlight to ON or OFF during screen saving Setting the battery alarm display to ON or OFF Setting the detect level detect time of human sensor Adjusting brightness and contrast Operation Setting the buzzer volume and window move buzzer Setting the key sensitivity and key reaction speed Setting the touch detection mode Changing security levels Setting the utility call keys Adjusting the to...

Page 415: ...ettings Trigger backup setting Setting the CPU No setting at backup to YES or NO Memory data control Backup restoration GOT data package acquisition Copying the OS special data and project data to a CF card or USB memory CNC data I O Memory card format Formatting a CF card or USB memory Memory information Displaying the available memory of the GOT USB device status display USB device status displa...

Page 416: ...tion log information Converting operation log files in G1O format CSV TXT format Deleting copying moving operation log files changing operation log file names Deleting operation log folders creating a new operation log folder Hard copy information Deleting copying hard copy files changing hard copy file names Special data information Deleting or checking special data files Deleting special data fo...

Page 417: ...es is classified as shown in the table below Appendix 3 2 Transportation guidelines Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to another location make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG Code and other local transportation regulations For details please consult y...

Page 418: ...App 8 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions ...

Page 419: ...roller KP AL3000 AH3000 SE3000 JU KE LE5000 compatible TOSHIBA PLC Unified Controller nv Series compatible YAMATAKE temperature controller DMC50 compatible RKC temperature controller RB500 RB700 PF HA RMC MA AG THV compatible Microcomputer connection Ethernet formats 8 and 9 QnA compatible 3E frame compatible Apr 2011 JY997D41201 JY997D41202 C Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1 28E Compatible w...

Page 420: ...QnUDVCPU compatible MELSEC L models L26CPU L02SCPU LJ71E71 100 compatible FA transparent function FXCPU compatible FA transparent function Setting Monitoring tool for C Controller module compatible IAI robot controller SCON CA PCON CA compatible ALLEN BRADLEY PLC expanded station number setting compatible SIEMENS PLC S7 1200 OP communication compatible May 2013 JY997D41201 JY997D41202 M Compatible...

Page 421: ...2 U Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 126G C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series is supported MELSEC iQ F Series is supported FA Transparent Function MELSEC iQ R Series MX Component MX Sheet are supported C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series CW Configurator is supported Servo amplifier connection MELSERVO J4 A RJ compatible Apr 2015 JY997D41201 JY997D41202 V Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 ...

Page 422: ...REVISIONS 4 ...

Page 423: ... in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product c Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged in the following cases Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range 1 1 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technic...

Page 424: ...egistered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd in the United States and other countries Other company and product names herein a...

Page 425: ......

Page 426: ......

Page 427: ......

Page 428: ......

Page 429: ...ystem where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or m...

Page 430: ...tion cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network the available IP addr...

Page 431: ...fied connectors while the power is turned OFF Imperfect connection may cause malfunction or failure When inserting a CF card into the GOT push it into the CF card interface of GOT until the CF card eject button will pop out Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact When inserting removing a CF card into from the GOT turn the CF card access switch off in advance Failure to do so ...

Page 432: ...tal pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in ...

Page 433: ...rews or unit CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure Do not drop or apply strong impact to the unit Doing so may damage the unit Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit Doing so may damage the b...

Page 434: ...y be activated This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations For details on models subject to restrictions refer to the User s Manual for the GOT you are using Before transporting the GOT turn the GOT power on and check that the battery voltage status is normal on ...

Page 435: ...Power Supply Specifications 3 4 3 4 Battery specifications 3 5 4 PARTS NAME 4 1 Front Panel 4 1 4 1 1 Name and specifications 4 1 4 2 Back Panel 4 2 4 2 1 Name and specifications 4 2 4 2 2 Opening and closing of environmental protection back cover 4 3 4 2 3 Changing the grip angle 4 3 4 3 Top Face Interface 4 4 4 3 1 Names and specifications 4 4 INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graph...

Page 436: ...edure 6 5 6 5 Protective Sheet 6 6 6 5 1 Applicable protective sheet 6 6 6 5 2 Installing procedure 6 6 6 6 Emergency Stop Switch Guard Cover 6 7 6 6 1 Applicable emergency stop SW guard cover 6 7 6 6 2 Installing procedure 6 7 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 6 8 6 7 1 Applicable Connector Conversion Box 6 8 6 7 2 Connector Conversion Box GT16H CNB 42S 6 8 6 7 3 Connector Conversion Box GT16H CNB 37S...

Page 437: ... GOT SET UP 11 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 11 1 11 1 1 Time setting 11 1 11 1 2 Transparent setting Transparent mode setting 11 5 11 1 3 Cleaning of display section Clean 11 6 11 1 4 Behavior of duplicate IPs 11 8 11 1 5 License Management 11 11 11 2 Display Settings 11 13 11 2 1 Display setting functions 11 13 11 2 2 Display operation of display setting 11 14 11 2 3 Display setting operatio...

Page 438: ...ns 13 1 13 1 1 Function of monitor screens 13 1 13 1 2 Display operation of monitor screens 13 2 13 2 Debug Setting 13 3 13 2 1 Q L QnA ladder monitor setting 13 3 13 2 2 Backup restoration setting 13 5 13 2 3 Trigger backup settings 13 7 13 3 Memory Data Control 13 9 13 3 1 Functions of memory data control 13 9 13 3 2 Backup restoration 13 10 13 3 3 GOT data package acquisition 13 11 13 3 4 Memor...

Page 439: ...F Card or USB Memory 16 4 16 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT 16 5 16 3 2 Installing using the data control function Utility 16 7 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 16 9 16 5 CoreOS 16 11 16 5 1 Installing the CoreOS 16 11 16 5 2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed 16 14 17 DRAWING SOFTWARE SETTINGS CONTROLLER SETTING AND COMMON SETTINGS 17 1 Setting the C...

Page 440: ...ing to MELSEC iQ F Series 20 6 20 2 6 Connecting to FXCPU 20 8 20 2 7 Connecting to WSCPU 20 12 20 2 8 Connecting to the motion controller CPU 20 12 20 3 Connection diagram 20 13 20 3 1 RS 232 cable 20 13 20 3 2 RS 422 cable 20 13 20 4 GOT Side Settings 20 14 20 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 20 14 20 4 2 Communication detail settings 20 14 20 5 PLC Side Setting 20 16 2...

Page 441: ...module 22 12 22 2 5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I F 22 13 22 3 GOT Side Settings 22 14 22 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 22 14 22 3 2 Communication detail settings 22 14 22 3 3 Ethernet setting 22 15 22 3 4 Routing parameter setting 22 16 22 4 PLC Side Setting 22 17 22 4 1 Connecting to Built in Ethernet port CPU one to one connection 22 18 22 4 2 Connecting to Built in Et...

Page 442: ...A500 A500L F500 F500L V500 V500L 24 1 24 2 2 Connecting to FREQROL E500 S500 S500E F500J D700 F700PJ 24 3 24 2 3 Connecting to FREQROL E700 sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX 24 4 24 2 4 Connecting to FREQROL A700 F700 F700P 24 5 24 2 5 Connecting to FREQROL A800 F800 24 7 24 2 6 Connecting to MD CX522 K A0 24 9 24 3 Connection Diagram 24 10 24 3 1 RS 422 cable 24 10 24 4 GOT Side Settings 24 14 24 4...

Page 443: ...ing to the MELSERVO J2M series 25 11 25 5 3 Connecting to the MELSERVO J4 J3 JE Series 25 12 25 5 4 Station number setting 25 12 25 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 25 13 25 7 Precautions 25 13 26 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 26 1 Connectable Model List 26 1 26 2 System Configuration 26 1 26 2 1 Connecting to robot controller CRnD 700 26 1 26 3 GOT Side Settings 26 2 26 3 1 Setting communication inte...

Page 444: ...ing Unit Electric Multi measuring Instrument 28 4 28 5 1 Connecting to an energy measuring unit electronic multi measuring instrument 28 4 28 5 2 Station number setting 28 4 28 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 28 5 28 7 Precautions 28 6 MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS 29 GOT MULTI DROP CONNECTION 29 1 Connectable Model List 29 1 29 2 System Configuration 29 2 29 3 Connection Diagram 29 3 29 3 1 RS 485 cabl...

Page 445: ... Configurator 31 25 31 4 6 FX Configurator FP FX3U ENET L Configuration tool 31 25 31 4 7 RT ToolBox2 31 26 31 4 8 NC Configurator 31 26 31 5 GOT Side Settings 31 27 31 5 1 Setting communication interface 31 27 31 6 Personal Computer Side Setting 31 29 31 6 1 Accessing by GX Works3 31 29 31 6 2 Accessing by CW Configurator 31 33 31 6 3 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer PX Developer GX Configur...

Page 446: ...Can Be Set 32 21 32 7 Precautions 32 21 33 CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 33 1 Connectable Model List 33 1 33 2 Serial Connection 33 2 33 2 1 System Configuration for connecting to CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C or CQM1 33 2 33 2 2 System Configuration for connecting to CQM1H 33 3 33 2 3 System Configuration for connecting to CJ1H CJ1G CJ1M CJ2H or CJ2M 33 4 33 2 4 System Configuration for connecting to CP1H CP1...

Page 447: ...unication settings 34 6 34 4 2 Communication detail settings 34 6 34 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 34 7 34 5 1 Connecting E5AN E5EN E5CN E5GN 34 7 34 5 2 Connecting E5ZN 34 7 34 5 3 Connection to interface converter K3SC 10 34 7 34 5 4 Station NO setting 34 8 34 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 34 9 34 7 Precautions 34 9 35 CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 35 1 Connectable Model List 35 1 35 2 Seri...

Page 448: ...16 36 5 9 Station NO setting 36 16 36 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 36 17 37 CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 37 1 Connectable Model List 37 1 37 2 System Configuration 37 2 37 2 1 Connecting to PC3JG PC3JG P PC3JD or PC3JD C 37 2 37 2 2 Connecting to PC3J or PC3JL 37 3 37 2 3 Connecting to PC2J PC2JS or PC2JR 37 4 37 2 4 Connecting to PC2JC PC216P or PC2J16PR 37 5 37 3 Connection Diagram 37 6 37 3 1 RS 2...

Page 449: ...9 2 39 2 1 Connecting to ACS 13A JC JCM 33A JIR 301 M PCD 300 Series PC 900 Series PC 955 M C5 PC 935 M C5 39 2 39 2 2 Connecting to FCD 100 FCR 100 FCR 23A FIR Series PC 900 Series PC 955 M C PC 935 M C 39 2 39 2 3 When connecting to DCL 33A Series 39 3 39 3 Connection Diagram 39 4 39 3 1 RS 232 cable 39 4 39 3 2 RS 485 cable 39 5 39 4 GOT Side Settings 39 6 39 4 1 Setting communication interface...

Page 450: ...0 Connecting to KE3000 40 15 40 5 11 Connecting to LE5100 LE5200 LE5300 40 15 40 5 12 Connecting to converter SC8 10 40 16 40 5 13 Station number setting 40 17 40 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 40 18 40 7 Precautions 40 18 41 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 41 1 Connectable Model List 41 1 41 2 Serial Connection 41 2 41 2 1 System configuration for connecting to PROSEC T series 41 2 41 2 2 System config...

Page 451: ...ier Side 43 4 43 5 1 Connecting to MINAS A4 A4F A4L 43 4 43 5 2 Connecting to MINAS A5 43 4 43 5 3 Station number setting 43 4 43 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 43 5 43 7 Precautions 43 5 44 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 44 1 Connectable Model List 44 1 44 2 System Configuration 44 2 44 2 1 Connecting to FP0 C16CT FP0 C32CT or FP0R 44 2 44 2 2 Connecting to FP1 C24C or FP1 C4...

Page 452: ...2 cable 46 3 46 4 GOT Side Settings 46 4 46 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 46 4 46 4 2 Communication detail settings 46 4 46 5 PLC Side Setting 46 5 46 5 1 Connecting to communication module 46 5 46 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 46 6 47 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 47 1 Connectable Model List 47 1 47 2 Serial Connection 47 2 47 2 1 System Configuration for connecting to MICR...

Page 453: ...8 7 Precautions 48 11 49 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 49 1 Connectable Model List 49 1 49 2 Serial Connection 49 2 49 2 1 System configuration for connecting to GL120 or GL130 49 2 49 2 2 System configuration for connecting to GL60S GL60H or GL70H 49 2 49 2 3 System configuration for connecting to MP 920 930 CP 9300MS 9200 H or PROGIC 8 49 3 49 2 4 System configuration for connecting to MP 940 49 4 4...

Page 454: ...Ethernet Interface Module F3LE12 0T 50 17 50 3 6 Connecting to F3SP66 F3SP67 F3SP71 4N built in Ethernet interface 50 18 50 3 7 Precautions 50 18 50 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 50 18 51 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 51 1 Connectable Model List 51 1 51 2 System Configuration 51 2 51 2 1 Connecting to GREEN Series 51 2 51 2 2 Connecting to UT100 51 4 51 2 3 Connecting to UT2000 51...

Page 455: ... Connecting to SDC20 21 SDC30 31 52 20 52 5 5 Connecting to CMC10L 52 20 52 5 6 Connecting to DMC50 52 21 52 5 7 Connecting to SDC45 46 52 21 52 5 8 Connecting to CMS CMF015 52 21 52 5 9 Connecting to CML CMF050 52 21 52 5 10 Connecting to MQV 52 21 52 5 11 Connecting to MPC 52 22 52 5 12 Connecting to PBC201 VN2 52 22 52 5 13 Connecting to MVF 52 22 52 5 14 Connecting to AUR350C AUR450C 52 23 52 ...

Page 456: ...0 Connecting to AG500 53 20 53 5 11 Connecting to RMC500 53 21 53 5 12 Connecting to MA900 MA901 53 21 53 5 13 Connecting to THV A1 53 21 53 5 14 Connecting to SA100 SA200 53 21 53 5 15 Connecting to X TIO Module 53 22 53 5 16 Connecting to SB Series 53 23 53 5 17 Connecting to B 400 53 24 53 5 18 Station number setting 53 25 53 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 53 26 53 7 Precautions 53 26 54 CONNEC...

Page 457: ...13 56 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 56 1 Connectable Model List 56 1 56 2 System Configuration 56 2 56 2 1 Connecting to K80S or K120S 56 2 56 2 2 Connecting to K200S 56 3 56 2 3 Connecting to K300S 56 4 56 3 Connection Diagram 56 5 56 3 1 RS 232 cable 56 5 56 3 2 RS 422 cable 56 5 56 4 GOT Side Settings 56 7 56 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 56 7 56 4 2 Commu...

Page 458: ...e that Can Be Set 58 12 59 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER 60 CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION 61 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 61 1 Microcomputer Connection Serial 61 1 61 2 System Configuration 61 3 61 2 1 For the microcomputer connection serial 61 3 61 3 Connection diagram 61 4 61 3 1 RS 232 cable 61 4 61 3 2 RS 422 cable 61 4 61 4 Device Data Area 61 ...

Page 459: ...on 62 16 62 4 4 Formats 3 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection 62 28 62 4 5 Format 5 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method 62 42 62 4 6 Formats 6 7 4E frame 62 46 62 4 7 Formats 8 9 3E frame 62 56 62 5 GOT Side Settings 62 65 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 62 65 62 5 2 Communication detail settings 62 65 62 6 System configuration 62 67 62 7 Devic...

Page 460: ...e Setting 64 3 64 5 Device Range that Can Be Set 64 4 64 6 Connection Example 64 6 64 6 1 Connecting to SCHNEIDER PLC Modicon Premium series and Modicon Quantum series 64 6 64 6 2 Connecting to YOKOGAWA PLC STARDOM 64 8 64 7 Precautions 64 11 CONNECTIONS TO PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 65 VNC R SERVER CONNECTION 65 1 Connectable Model List 65 1 65 2 System Configuration 65 1 65 3 GOT Side Settings 65 2 65...

Page 461: ...ed in CD ROM SH 080871ENG 1D7MC5 GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM SH 080861ENG 1D7MB1 GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Functions for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM SH 080863ENG 1D7MB3 Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 Setting available functions o...

Page 462: ...1562 VN Abbreviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT155 GT1555 V Abbreviation of GT1555 VTBD GT1555 Q Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT157 GT156 GT155 GT145 GT1455 Q Abbreviation of GT1455 QTBDE GT1455 QTBD GT1450 Q Abbreviation of GT1450 QLBDE GT1450 QLBD GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455 Q GT1450 Q GT1275 GT1275 V Abbreviat...

Page 463: ... 25P Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z 1 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX CC Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z 3 Interface converter unit GT15 75IF900...

Page 464: ...SGB GT15 50PSCW GT15 50PSGW For GT14 GT14 50PSCB GT14 50PSGB GT14 50PSCW GT14 50PSGW For GT12 GT11 70PSCB GT11 65PSCB For GT11 GT11 50PSCB GT11 50PSGB GT11 50PSCW GT11 50PSGW GT11H 50PSC For GT10 GT10 50PSCB GT10 50PSGB GT10 50PSCW GT10 50PSGW GT10 40PSCB GT10 40PSGB GT10 40PSCW GT10 40PSGW GT10 30PSCB GT10 30PSGB GT10 30PSCW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSCB GT10 20PSGB GT10 20PSCW GT10 20PSGW Protective c...

Page 465: ...tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C GPPW E EV SW D5F GPPW E type software package GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN VIEWER E type software package PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 SW DNC MTW2 ...

Page 466: ... SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co Ltd PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by ...

Page 467: ...The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 5 3 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed 5 3 2 Communication detail settings 1 Bus Q 2 Bus A QnA 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Co...

Page 468: ...ternal cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name RS 422 connector conversion cable Communi cation type Cable model MELSEC Q RS 232 GT11H C30R2 6P 3m GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H CNB 42S 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC FA CNV2402CBL 0 2m FA CNV2405CBL 0 5m RS 422 GT01 C30R4 25P 3m GT01 C100R4 25P 10m or GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13 5m The config...

Page 469: ...or GT Works3 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Accessible range for monitoring GOT1000Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING How to monitor redundant system GOT1000Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNDANT SYSTEM 20 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 20 1 21 COMP...

Page 470: ......

Page 471: ...table Model List The following table shows the connectable models Continued to next page Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU RS 232 RS 422 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08SFCPU R16SFCPU R32SFCPU R120SFCPU Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series R16MTCPU RS 232 RS 422 R32MTCPU C...

Page 472: ...01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU RS 232 2 20 2 1 Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C controller module Q Series Q12DCCPU V 4 Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS Q26DHCCPU LS RS 232 2 20 2 1 MELSEC QS QS001CPU MELSEC L L02CPU 3 L06CPU 3 L26CPU...

Page 473: ...PUP21 1 A1NCPUR21 1 A2NCPU 1 A2NCPUP21 1 A2NCPUR21 1 A2NCPU S1 1 A2NCPUP21 S1 1 A2NCPUP21 S1 1 A3NCPU 1 A3NCPUP21 1 A3NCPUP21 1 A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU 1 A2SCPU S1 1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU MELSEC A A0J2HCPU 2 RS 422 20 2 4 A0J2HCPUP21 2 A0J2HCPUR21 2 A0J2HCPU DC24 2 A2CCPU 2 RS 422 20 2 4 A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF ...

Page 474: ...ction cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Communication driver A QnA L Q CPU LJ71C24 QJ71C24 PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOTM odel Total distan ce Number of connectable equipment Model name Adapter RS 422 connector conversion cable Communi cation type Cable model L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT L6ADP R2 RS 232 GT11...

Page 475: ...ion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Cable model MELSEC QnA RS 422 GT01 C30R4 25P 3m GT01 C100R4 25P 10m GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC Communication driver A QnA L Q CPU LJ71C24 QJ71C24 ACPU Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cab...

Page 476: ...ection diagram number FX5U FX5 422 BD GOT RS 422 GT01 C10R4 8P 1m GT01 C30R4 8P 3m GT01 C100R4 8P 10m GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 Expansion board RS 422 RS 422 connection diagram 2 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC built in port FX5 485 BD RS 422 RS 422 connection diagram 2 13m 1 GOT for 1 Expansion board FX5 485ADP RS 422 RS 422 connection diagram 2 13m 1 ...

Page 477: ...C with GX Works3 installed can be connected to them individually PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment 1 Model name Expansion board Expansion adapter Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FX5UC RS 422 RS 422 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 1...

Page 478: ...le GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Function expansion board 1 Function adapter 1 Communication type Cable model FX0 FX0S FX0N RS 422 GT01 C10R4 8P 1m GT01 C30R4 8P 3m GT01 C100R4 8P 10m GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC FX1 FX2 FX2C RS 422 GT01 C30R4 25P 3m GT01 C100R4 25P 10m GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT...

Page 479: ...oard 1 2 Function adapter 2 Commu nication Type Cable model Connection diagram number FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1N 232 BD FX2N 232 BD RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board FX1N CNV BD FX2N CNV BD FX2NC 232ADP RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 function ad...

Page 480: ...3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board FX3G FX3G CNV ADP FX3U 232ADP FX3U 232ADP MB RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 function adapter FX3GE FX3U 232ADP FX3U 232ADP MB RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 function adapter FX3S FX3S CNV ADP FX3U 232ADP FX3U 232ADP M...

Page 481: ... box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment 1 Model name Function expansion board 2 Function adapter 2 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number FX3U FX3UC FX3UC LT 2 FX3U 232 BD RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board FX3U 422 BD FX3U 232 BD FX3U CNV BD FX3U 232ADP...

Page 482: ...ternal cable MELSEC WS Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Cable model MELSEC WS RS 232 WS0 C20R2 2m GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 5m 1 GOT for 1 PLC Motion controller CPU Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Communication driver A QnA L Q CP...

Page 483: ...stance or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminati...

Page 484: ...n logging recipe function etc However the range may affect the sequence scan time when connecting to Q00UJ Q00U Q01U Q02UCPU or Q00J Q00 Q01CPU If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time do not set High This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above 2 Set this range if you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time further than the Normal setting when connectin...

Page 485: ...ission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 115200bps When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communic...

Page 486: ...speed in GX Works2 1 Click PLC parameter Adapter Serial Setting 2 Set RS 422 485 in Adapter Type 3 Set GOT Connection in Select Function 4 Adjust Communication Speed Setting with the GOT communication setting 20 4 2 Communication detail settings POINT POINT POINT L6ADP R4 adapter For details on the L6ADP R4 adapter refer to the following manual MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Mai...

Page 487: ...transfer the parameter to the programmable controller After the transfer turn off the programmable controller and then turn on the programmable controller again Connection in the multiple CPU system When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system the following time is taken until when the PLC runs QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70 18 seconds or more When the...

Page 488: ...ettings For details of MELSEC iQ F Series communication settings refer to the following manual MELSEC iQ F Series User s Manual 1 Module parameter setting When using FX5 485 BD POINT POINT POINT When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again or reset the PLC CPU ...

Page 489: ... by another CPU on the multiple CPU 2 Mount a safety function module R6SFM next to the RnSFCPU on the base unit The RnSFCPU and the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version If their pair versions differ the RnSFCPU does not operate Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU RS 232 RS 422 21 2 1 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32P...

Page 490: ... Q12HCPU 1 Q25HCPU 1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU RS 232 RS 422 21 2 2 Q12PRHCPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base RS 232 RS 422 21 2 2 Q25PRHCPU Extension base Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU RS 232 RS 422 21 2 2 Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q...

Page 491: ...CPUP21 S1 A2NCPUR21 S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 MELSEC A AnSCPU A2USCPU RS 232 RS 422 21 2 8 A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU 1 A2SCPU 1 A2SCPU S1 1 A2SHCPU 1 A2SHCPU S1 1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU 1 MELSEC A A0J2HCPU 1 RS 232 RS 422 21 2 8 A0J2HCPUP21 1 A0J2HCPUR21 1 A0J2HCPU DC24 1 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 RS 232 RS 422 21 2 8 A2CCPUC24 PRF A2CJCPU S3 A1FXCPU Mo...

Page 492: ...ies C Controller module 7 MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71C24 RJ71C24 R2 RJ71C24 R4 MELSEC Q Q mode Motion controller CPU Q Series MELSECNET H remote I O station CNC C70 Robot controller CRnQ 700 QJ71C24 2 QJ71C24 R2 2 QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 QJ71CMO 3 QJ71CMON 3 MELSEC L LJ71C24 LJ71C24 R2 MELSEC Q A mode A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71UC24 PRF A1SJ71C24 R2 A1SJ71C24 R4 A1SJ71C24 PRF MELSEC Qn...

Page 493: ...llowing manual Modem Interface Module User s Manual 2 Two GOTs can be connected with the function version B or later of the serial communication module Serial MELSEC Communication driver GOT Serial communication module RCPU Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment M...

Page 494: ...mmunication module QCPU Q mode Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable Serial MELSEC Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Serial communication module 1 Communication Type Cable model MELSEC Q Q mode QJ71C24 QJ71C24N QJ71C24 R2 QJ71C24N R2 QJ71CMO QJ71CMON RS 232 GT09 C3...

Page 495: ...connectable equipment Model name Serial communication module 1 Communication Type Cable model MELSEC L LJ71C24 LJ71C24 R2 RS 232 GT09 C30R2 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 2 GOTs for 1 serial communication module LJ71C24 RS 422 GT09 C30R4 6C 3m GT09 C100R4 6C 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 1...

Page 496: ...Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Serial communication module 1 or Computer link module 2 Communication Type Cable model MELSEC QnA QnACPU AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24N R2 RS 232 GT09 C30R2 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 serial communication unit AJ71QC24 R4 AJ71...

Page 497: ...river When connecting to a computer link module PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Serial communication module 1 Computer link module 2 Communication type Cable model MELSEC QnA QnACPU A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N1 A1SJ71QC24 R2 A1SJ71QC24N R2 A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 RS 232 GT09 C30R2 9P 3m or RS232 connect...

Page 498: ...9 C30R2 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 computer link module AJ71UC24 RS 422 GT09 C30R4 6C 3m GT09 C100R4 6C 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m GOT Computer link module ACPU AnSPUtype A0J2HCPU A2CCPUC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable AJ71C24 UC24 Communic...

Page 499: ... connected to the GOT Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 4 2 Back Panel 2 Serial communication module or computer link module side Connect the terminating resistors 330 1 4W orange orange brown on the serial communication module or computer link module side For details refer to the fol...

Page 500: ...e do not set High This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above 2 Set this range if you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time further than the Normal setting when connecting to Q00UJ Q00U Q01U Q02UCPU or Q00J Q00 Q01CPU However the monitor speed may be reduced POINT POINT POINT Setting Format This setting is required for replacement of F900 series with GOT1000 series 1 To ...

Page 501: ...n Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 19200bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment Default 8bit 8bit fixed Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications Default 1bit 1bit fixed Parity Specify...

Page 502: ...PLC CPU OFF then back ON again or reset the PLC CPU 2 Connection of multiple GOTs To some serial communication module models two GOTs can be connected using both CH1 and CH2 Transmission specifications Setting Data bit 8bits Parity bit Yes Odd Stop bit 1bit Sum check Yes Transmission speed Set the same transmission speed on both the GOT and the PLC Model Refer to Serial communication module MELSEC...

Page 503: ...n specifications 2 The serial communication module operates at the transmission speed set on the GOT 3 When the value of switch setting is other than 0 the setting of Format and Transmission Speed on the GOT side are required to be changed 21 4 2 Communication detail settings Switch No Bit Description Set value 3 Position Specified value Switch 1 b0 OFF CH1 transmission settings 1 Operation settin...

Page 504: ...erial communication module QnA Series For details of the serial communication module QnA Series refer to the following manual Serial Communication Module User s Manual Modem Function Additional Version Switch setting on serial communication module Set the Station number switches the Mode switch for the channel used for GOT connection and the Transmission specifications switches 1 Mode setting swit...

Page 505: ...2 When the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is within 115200bps within 230400bps in the case of A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 a controller other than GOT can be connected to the computer link module When only one device is connected to either of the interfaces a maximum transmission speed of 115200bps can be set to the one where the device is connected In this instance set SW09 to SW12 to OFF on t...

Page 506: ...RM4 5 MOFORM 1 2 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 PRF A1SJ71C24 R2 A1SJ71C24 PRF 8 0 2 3 5 7 8 0 2 3 5 7 8 9 0 3 4 B CD F A1SJ71UC24 R4 SCAN SCAN E SET E SIO E ST DWN MD L NEU NAK ACK C N P S PRO SIO COM MD RUN RD SD CPU SW 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 10 STATION NO 1 MODE SDA SDB RDA RDB SG FG NC RS 422 485 A1SJ71UC24 R4 1 3 2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71C24 R4 PULL MELSEC A1SCPU24 R2 STOP RUN RESET RESET...

Page 507: ...h the GOT side specifications See descriptions below SW06 SW07 SW08 Data bit setting 8bits ON SW09 Parity bit setting Set ON SW10 Even odd parity setting Odd OFF SW11 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF SW12 Sum check setting Set ON Setting switch Transmission speed 1 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps SW05 OFF ON OFF SW06 OFF OFF ON SW07 ON ON ON Transmission specifications switch Setting Switch Description Set valu...

Page 508: ...again or reset the PLC CPU Transmission specifications switch Setting Switch Description Set value SW11 Transmission speed setting Consistent with the GOT side specifications See descriptions below SW12 SW13 SW14 Data bit setting 8bits ON SW15 Parity bit setting Set ON SW16 Even odd parity setting Odd OFF SW17 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF SW18 Sum check setting Set ON SW19 Main channel setting RS 232...

Page 509: ...ing Therefore it takes time until the SD memory card becomes available When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available a system alarm occurs Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual When monitoring the Q170MCPU Set CPU No to 2 in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area CPU No 2 When th...

Page 510: ...21 22 21 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 21 6 Precautions ...

Page 511: ...fety function module R6SFM next to the RnSFCPU on the base unit The RnSFCPU and the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version If their pair versions differ the RnSFCPU does not operate Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU Ethernet 22 2 1 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120...

Page 512: ...CPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base Q25PRHCPU Extension base Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Ethernet 22 2 1 22 2 2 Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C controller module Q Series Q12DCCPU V 3 Q24DHCCPU V VG Ether...

Page 513: ...1 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU A2SCPU S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU MELSEC A A0J2HCPU Ethernet 22 2 1 A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU DC24 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF A2CJCPU S3 A1FXCPU Motion controller CPU Q Series Q172CPU 1 2 Ethernet 22 2 1 Q173CPU 1 2 Q172CPUN 1 Q173CPUN 1 Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU S1 Ethernet 22...

Page 514: ...hernet module 1 MELSEC iQ R Series Motion Controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series C Controller module 2 MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71EN71 MELSEC Q Q mode MELSEC QS Motion controller CPU Q Series CNC C70 Robot controller CRnQ 700 QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 QJ71E71 MELSEC QnA AJ71QE71N3 T AJ71QE71N B5 AJ71QE71N B2 AJ71QE71N T AJ71QE71N B5T AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71 B5 A1SJ71QE71N3 T A1SJ71QE71N B5 A1SJ71QE71N B2...

Page 515: ...Series 4 Motion Controller CPU 4 MELSEC iQ R Series C Controller module 4 MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71EN71 Ethernet 10BASE T Shielded twisted pair cable STP or unshielded twisted pair cable UTP Category 3 4 and 5 100BASE TX Shielded twisted pair cable STP Category 5 and 5e GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 100m 128 GOTs 6 recommended to 16 units or less GT16H CNB 37S GT...

Page 516: ...or A Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual 4 Select one of the following Controller Type in Ethernet of GT Designer3 Ethernet module MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71EN71 Ethernet module Q Series QJ71E71 Ethernet module QnA Series AJ71QE71 Ethernet module A Series AJ71QE71 For Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 22 3 3 Ethernet setting 5 When using the peripheral I F of Q170MCPU Q17nDCPU S1 or...

Page 517: ... 6m GT16H C100 37PE 10m MELSEC FX FX3UC FX3UC 1PS 5V FX2NC CNV IF FX3U ENET L 5 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m GT16H CNB 37S GT16H C30 37PE 3m GT16H C60 37PE 6m GT16H C100 37PE 10m MELSEC FX FX3U FX3U CNV BD FX3U 422 BD FX3U 232 BD FX3U ENET ADP 6 7 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 100m 2 4 GOTs GT16H CNB 37S GT16H C30 37PE 3m G...

Page 518: ...x 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 For the system configuration of the Ethernet module refer to the following manuals For FX Ethernet Interface Module User s Ma...

Page 519: ...10m Motion controller CPU 8 9 MELSEC iQ R Series C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m GT16H CNB 37S GT16H C30 37PE 3m GT16H C60 37PE 6m GT16H C100 37PE 10m MELSEC QnUDE H 4 5 MELSEC QnUDV 4 5 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m GT16H CNB 37S GT16H C30 37PE 3m GT16H C60 37PE 6m GT16H C100 37PE 10m C ...

Page 520: ...itching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 For the system configuration of Built in Ethernet port QCPU refer to the following manual QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 5 Select QnUD P V QnUDEH for Controller Type in Ethernet of GT Designer3 For Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 22 3 3 ...

Page 521: ...SE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 For the system configuration of the CNC C70 refer to the following manual C70 Series SET UP MANUAL 4 Select Q17nNC for...

Page 522: ...imit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 For the system configuration of the CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module refer to the CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module manual 4 Select QJ71E71 for Controller Type in Ethernet of GT Designer3 For Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 22 3 3 Ethernet setting 5 The number of co...

Page 523: ... S1 or MR MQ100 set as shown below Use the GT Designer3 Version1 12N or later Use Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 Gateway for the communication driver Select QnUDE H for Controller Type in Ethernet of GT Designer3 For Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 22 3 3 Ethernet setting Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 Communication driver Connection cable PLC CPU Connector conversion box Externa...

Page 524: ...3 Ethernet setting 4 When the drive is Ethernet FX Gateway the range is 1 to 64 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 3 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 120 4 GOT IP Address 2 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 2 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for con...

Page 525: ...71 is selected the port No is as follows RCPU RnCCPU QnUDE H 5006 fixed FX5CPU 5562 fixed RJ71EN71 Q17nNC QJ71E71 AJ71QE71 5001 fixed FX 5551 When using FX3U ENET L 5556 When using FX3U ENET ADP When using built in Ethernet port FXCPU 5556 3 When selecting the FX in Controller Type the communication type is the TCP fixed 4 Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set i...

Page 526: ...ing parameter setting is also necessary for the relay station For the setting refer to the following 22 4 PLC Side Setting 2 Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator a The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green Set items which are displayed in green cells from the MELSOFT Navigator b When the settings of Transfer netwo...

Page 527: ...1 Q170MCPU Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU S1 22 4 5 22 4 6 C Controller module Q Series Q12DCCPU V Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS Q26DHCCPU LS 22 4 8 Built in Ethernet port LCPU L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT 22 4 5 22 4 6 Ethernet module MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71EN71 22 4 3 Ethernet module Q Series QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 QJ71E71 22 4 7 Ethernet module L Series LJ7...

Page 528: ...tings 2 Ethernet setting When connecting Built in Ethernet port RCPU to a GOT the setting items for the network No and station No do not exist at the PLC side However these virtual values must be set on the GOT side Therefore set the network No and station No Set the network No that does not exist on the network system and any station No 1 Controller setting 2 Ethernet setting 1 Set the same value...

Page 529: ...l Manuals of MELSEC iQ R Series Manuals of MELSEC iQ F Series 22 4 2 Connecting to Built in Ethernet port CPU multiple connection This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration POINT POINT POINT Built in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built in Ethernet port CPU refer to the following manual Manuals of MELSEC iQ R Series...

Page 530: ...value as that of GOT N W No 2 Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No and the PLC No of other PLCs on the same network 3 In the case of MELSEC iQ F series it is FX5CPU 4 In the case of MELSEC iQ F series it is 5562 fixed 5 In the case of MELSEC iQ F series it is TCP fixed Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection IP address 192 168 0 1 Subnet Mask Default Gateway Online Program ...

Page 531: ... Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 is available to a Ping test from the PLC For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 refer to the following manual Manuals of MELSEC iQ R Series 22 4 3 Connecting to Ethernet module MELSEC iQ R Series This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module MELSEC iQ R Series in the following case of the system con...

Page 532: ...nnot be set twice or more multiple times Therefore the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of Target Station Network No s Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection IP address 192 168 3 19 Subnet Mask Default Gateway Setting Method of Network No and Station No Do Not Use IP Address Network No 1 1 Station No 2 2 Transient Transmission Group No ...

Page 533: ... refer to the following Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 1 Controller setting 2 Ethernet setting POINT POINT POINT Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 For Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 22 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings RJ71EN71 RUN INIT OPEN SD ERR C...

Page 534: ...settings of the GOT and C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series in the following case of system configuration Use CW Configurator for the C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series communication settings POINT POINT POINT C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series For details of C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series refer to the following manual Manuals of C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series System con...

Page 535: ... the PLC side However these virtual values must be set on the GOT side Therefore set the network No and station No Set the network No that does not exist on the network system and any station No 1 Controller setting 2 Ethernet setting 1 Set the same value as that of GOT N W No 2 Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No and the PLC No of other PLCs on the same network Item 1 Set value Sett...

Page 536: ... GOT and Built in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration POINT POINT POINT Connecting to Built in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built in Ethernet port CPU refer to the following manual QnUCPU User s Manual Communication via Built in Ethernet Port MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In Ethernet Function System configuration For connecting one Built in Ethernet port Q...

Page 537: ...t of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows a When normal communication C Ping 192 168 3 39 Reply from 192 168 3 39 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 32 b When abnormal communication C Ping 192 168 3 39 Request timed out 2 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and...

Page 538: ...re set to the default Network No 1 PLC No 1 IP address 192 168 0 18 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed Network No 1 virtual PLC No 2 virtual IP address 192 168 0 1 Port No 5006 fixed Communication format UDP fixed Connecting to Built in Ethernet port CPU The settings other than the following are set to the default 1 Network No 1 virtual PLC No 3 virtual IP address 192 168 0 2 Port No 5006...

Page 539: ...t of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows a When normal communication C Ping 192 168 0 1 Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 32 b When abnormal communication C Ping 192 168 0 1 Request timed out 2 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and ne...

Page 540: ...en using Q170MCPU set it according to the system configuration 2 Set the same network No as that of the GOT 3 Do not set the same station No as that of the GOT 4 Set when using Ethernet module in a redundant QnPRHCPU system GOT The settings other than the following are set to the default 1 Network No 1 PLC No 1 IP address 192 168 0 18 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed Network No 1 PLC No...

Page 541: ... 64 kinds of Transfer Network No s POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT For the setting refer to the following 22 3 4 Routing parameter setting 4 Communication confirmation The INIT LED on the Ethernet module turns on when the module is ready to communicate For confirming the communication state refer t...

Page 542: ... the followings and execute the Ping command again Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU faulty or not IP address of GOT specified by Ping command POINT POINT POINT Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC F...

Page 543: ...ary Not necessary 1 If the IP address of the C controller module Q Series has been changed input the changed IP address or host name 2 If the account of the C controller module Q Series has been changed input the changed user name and password b Online operation Necessary As necessary Not necessary GOT The settings other than the following are set to the default Network No 1 PLC No 1 IP address 19...

Page 544: ... IP address 192 168 3 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway IP address setting CH2 Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Points occupied by empty slot Use default value Remote Reset Output mode at STOP to RUN Intelligent function module settings Initial settings of intelligent function module WDT Watching timer setting Error check Operation mode at the time of error Module synch...

Page 545: ... that of the GOT PLC No and the PLC No of other PLCs on the same network Checking communication state of C controller module Q Series 1 When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows a When normal communication C Ping 192 168 3 1 Reply from 192 168 3 1 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 32 b When abnormal communication C Ping 192 168 3 1 Request timed out 2 Wh...

Page 546: ...on format UDP fixed Network No 1 PLC No 2 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed Ethernet module The settings other than the following are set to the default 1 IP address 192 168 0 19 Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 Switch settings of Ethernet module Network parameter of GX Developer Operation mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Online...

Page 547: ...ameter of GX Developer 1 Network parameter Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 Set the same network No as that of the GOT 2 Do not set the same station No as that of the GOT POINT POINT POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU operate the PLC CPU either turning OFF and then ON or resetting Exchange condition setting switch Setting Switch Descr...

Page 548: ...T POINT POINT Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 For Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 22 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Range Target network No 1 to 239 Relay network No 1 to 239 Relay station No 1 to 64 RUN BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 RDY BSY SW ERR COM ERR CPU R W TEST TEST ERR BSY SW ERR COM ERR CPU ...

Page 549: ...other than the following are set to the default 2 2 1 Network No 1 PLC No 1 IP address 192 168 0 18 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed Network No 1 virtual PLC No 2 virtual IP address 192 168 0 19 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed Ethernet module The settings other than the following are set to the default Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 Switch settings of Ethern...

Page 550: ...TCP timeout error OFF SW2 Data code setting binary code OFF fixed SW3 CPU exchange timing setting Enable write at RUN time ON fixed SW4 Initial timing setting OFF Device Application M102 COM ERR turned off command D100 IP address of Ethernet module D110 Application setting D111 Port No of Ethernet module D112 to D113 IP address of GOT D114 Port No of GOT D200 Initial fault code Buffer memory addre...

Page 551: ... then ON or resetting IP address of Ethernet module 192 168 0 19 Initial request COM ERR turned off request Clear the initial fault code Set to the permit of communication while stopping the PLC CPU Communication format UDP IP Port No of Ethernet module 5001 IP address of GOT When GOT is used FFFFFFFFH Port No of GOT When GOT is used FFFFH Read the initial fault code Request to open Normal complet...

Page 552: ...signer3 refer to the following 22 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings RUN BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 RDY BSY SW ERR COM ERR CPU R W TEST TEST ERR BSY SW ERR COM ERR CPU R W TEST ERR TEST RDY RUN BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 A1SJ71E71N3 T A1SJ71E71N B5 A1SJ71E71N B2 A1SJ71E71N T A1SJ71E71N B5T A1SJ71E71 B5 S3 A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 AJ71E71N3 T AJ71E71N B5 AJ7...

Page 553: ...ool 1 Ethernet setting Set the Ethernet parameter with FX3U ENET L Configuration tool For using FX3U ENET L Configuration tool install GX Developer Ver 8 88s or later on the personal computer For details on FX3U ENET L Configuration tool refer to the following manual FX3U ENET L Configuration tool Operation manual Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 Set the number of the Ethernet module GOT The...

Page 554: ...rogrammable controller CPU 3 Open settings Required Set if necessary Not required POINT POINT POINT When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral devices The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs and devices must be set Item Setting Setting necessity at GOT connection Communication data code 1 Use default value IP address 192 168 0 19 Initial timing 1 Use default value Send frame se...

Page 555: ...ing to the installation position of FX3U ENET ADP on the CPU body 2 The default value of IP address is 192 168 1 250 Set the IP address corresponding to the system configuration POINT POINT POINT When changing Ethernet parameter After writing Ethernet parameters to the PLC CPU turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again 2 Open settings POINT POINT POINT When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral ...

Page 556: ...bnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU faulty or not IP address of GOT specified by Ping command POINT POINT POINT Ethernet diagnostics of FX3U ENET L Configuration tool Ethernet...

Page 557: ...2 Ver 1 91V or later is required For details on the setting of FX3GE refer to the following manual FX3GE SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS HARDWARE MANUAL Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 The default value of IP address is 192 168 1 250 Set the IP address corresponding to the system configuration POINT POINT POINT When changing Ethernet parameter After writing Ethernet parameters to the PLC CP...

Page 558: ... POINT POINT Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 For Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 22 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Setting Setting with GOT connected Protocol TCP Open System MELSOFT connection Item Setting Use default value GOT NET No 1 GOT PLC No 1 GOT IP Address 192 168 0 18 GOT Port No Communication 5019 GO...

Page 559: ...or not IP address of GOT specified by Ping command 22 4 13 Connecting to Display I F CNC C70 This section describes the settings of the GOT and Display I F CNC C70 in the following case of the system configuration POINT POINT POINT Display I F CNC C70 For details of the Display I F CNC C70 refer to the following manual C70 Series SET UP MANUAL System configuration IP address settings of CNC C70 1 ...

Page 560: ... a When normal communication C Ping 192 168 0 19 Reply from 192 168 0 19 bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 64 b When abnormal communication C Ping 192 168 0 19 Request timed out 2 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Mounting condition of CNC C70 Cable connecting condition Switch settings and network parameter settings Operation state of...

Page 561: ... as necessary Up to 64 Transfer Network No s can be set However the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more multiple times Therefore the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Transfer Network No s GOT Use default value for settings other than the following Network No 3 PC No 1 IP address 192 168 3 18 Port No 5001 Communication format ...

Page 562: ...the fourth octet PC No of the Ethernet adapter unit IP address 3 Set according to the Ethernet adapter unit IP address 3 Routing parameter setting 1 Set the same value as the Ethernet adapter unit network No 2 Set according to the third octet network No of the Ethernet adapter unit IP address 3 Set according to the fourth octet PC No of the Ethernet adapter unit IP address Item Set value Network N...

Page 563: ...Ethernet port CPU For details of Built in Ethernet port CPU refer to the following manual User s Manual of Q173D S CPU Q172D S CPU and Q170MCPU System configuration Leave the Built in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU settings as default in the following system configuration 1 For the settings when using system devices including a hub and a transceiver refer to the following 22 4 6 Connecting to...

Page 564: ...port CPU 1 When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows a When normal communication C Ping 192 168 3 39 Reply from 192 168 3 2 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 32 b When abnormal communication C Ping 192 168 3 39 Request timed out 2 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Cable connectin...

Page 565: ...PLIFIER CONNECTION 26 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 27 CNC CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 GX Developer refer to the following manual GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Common GX Developer Version8 Operating Manual ...

Page 566: ... the SD memory card becomes available When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available a system alarm occurs Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual When connecting to multiple GOTs 1 Setting PLC No When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network set each PLC No to the GOT 22 3 1 Setting communicatio...

Page 567: ...e to the PLC and set the routing setting to monitor as other network When the Multi channel is supported for GT16 set each channel with the networks No to monitor When connecting to Built in Ethernet port of Built in Ethernet port CPU Connect to GOT after turning on the network equipment such as Built in Ethernet port CPU or HUB to enable the communication When the communication with Built in Ethe...

Page 568: ...22 58 22 ETHERNET CONNECTION 22 5 Precautions ...

Page 569: ...Model List 23 1 1 PLC Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models Continued to next page Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU CC Link G4 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08SFCPU R16SFCPU R32SFCPU R120SFCPU Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series R16MTCPU ...

Page 570: ...HCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module Q Series Q12DCCPU V 2 Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS Q26DHCCPU LS RS 232 23 2 1 MELSEC QS QS001CPU MELSEC L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU P CC Link G4 23 2 2 MELSEC Q A mode ...

Page 571: ...2HCPU DC24 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF A2CJCPU S3 A1FXCPU Motion controller CPU Q series Q172CPU 1 2 CC Link G4 23 2 1 Q173CPU 1 2 Q172CPUN 1 Q173CPUN 1 Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU S1 Q173DCPU S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU 3 Q170MSCPU 4 Q170MSCPU S1 4 MR MQ100 Motion controller CPU A Series A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU S3 A171SCPU A171...

Page 572: ...m the GOT to the peripheral connection module Connection cable 2 External cable CC Link G4 Communication driver CC Link module QCPU Peripheral connection module Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable 1 Peripheral connection module Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable Model Total distance 4 Number of connectable e...

Page 573: ...ection cable 2 External cable CC Link G4 Communication driver CC Link module Peripheral connection module Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT LCPU PLC Connection cable 1 Peripheral connection module Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable Model Total distance 4 Number of connectable equipment Model name CC Link module 1 Cable model M...

Page 574: ...nection diagram Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The total distance between GOT and peripheral connection module of the RS 232 cable must be 6m or less RS232 connection diagram 1 Connector conversion box side D Sub 9 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PLC side 7 3 2 6 5 4 1 8 9 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS RS RTS SD TXD RD RXD DR DSR SG ER DTR CD CS CTS ...

Page 575: ...NT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For the details on the Utility refer to the following manual 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Ut...

Page 576: ...etting switch and operation setting DIP switch 1 Station number setting switch Necessary As necessary Not necessary 2 Data link transmission speed setting switch Necessary As necessary Not necessary Model Reference Peripheral connection module AJ65BT G4 S3 23 5 1 AJ65BT R2N 23 5 2 CC Link module QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N 23 5 3 CC Link module 1 Station type Station No Mode All connect count Transmission ...

Page 577: ...to the following manual CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual QJ61BT11N MELSEC L CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual 3 CC Link function built in CPU For details on the CC Link function built in CPU refer to the following manual MELSEC L CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual System configuration 1 The Start I O No of the CC Link module is set to 0 Operation settin...

Page 578: ... mode setting switch to 5 MELSOFT connection mode 2 RS 232 transmission setting switch Turn OFF SW1 through SW8 of the RS 232 transmission setting switch If any switch of SW1 through SW8 is ON setting error will occur RUN LED turns off Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection AJ65BT R2N station number setting 1 to 64 Data link transmission speed setti...

Page 579: ...essary Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting master station 0 fixed Transmission rate mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Transmission rate mode setting 0 156kbps 1 625kbps 2 2 5Mbps 3 5Mbps 4 10Mbps 1 2 QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection No of board...

Page 580: ... The GOT starts to monitor after the L RUN LED of AJ65BT G4 S3 turns on It does not monitor while the L RUN LED turns off 23 5 5 Parameter setting when connecting to C controller module Q Series Use SW3PVC CCPU E Ver 3 05F or later for the C Controller module Q Series setting utility 1 Target module Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 If the IP address of the C controller module Q Series has be...

Page 581: ... For the setting method of Controller Setting of GT Designer3 refer to the following 23 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection No of boards in module 1 Target unit 1 Start I O No 0000H Channel No Use default value Operation setting Type Master station fixed Mode 1 Remote net Ver 1 mode Expanded cyclic setting Single fixed Numbe...

Page 582: ...arts before the SD card becomes available a system alarm occurs Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Connection to Q17nDCPU Q170MCPU CNC C70 CRnQ 700 The Q17nDCPU Q170MCPU CNC C70 and CRnQ 700 are applicable to the CC Link network system Ver 2 only For connecting to the CC Link Via G4 network system set the CC Lin...

Page 583: ...EVICE CONNECTIONS 24 INVERTER CONNECTION 24 1 25 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 25 1 26 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 26 1 27 CNC CONNECTION 27 1 28 ENERGY MEASURING UNIT ELECTRIC MULTI MEASURING INSTRUMENT CONNECTION 28 1 ...

Page 584: ......

Page 585: ...0 RS 422 24 2 2 FREQROL S500 S500E FREQROL F500J FREQROL D700 FREQROL F700PJ FREQROL E700 RS 422 24 2 3 FREQROL A700 RS 422 24 2 4 FREQROL F700 FREQROL F700P FREQROL A800 F800 RS 422 24 2 5 Sensorless Servo FREQROL E700EX RS 422 24 2 3 MELIPM MD CX522 K A0 RS 422 24 2 6 Connection cable Computer link option Inverter Connector conversion box External cable GOT FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO C...

Page 586: ...sion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number Model name Connection diagram number FREQROL A500 A500L F500 F500L V500 V500L 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 6 RS422 connection diagram 3 BMJ 8 Recom mended RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 31 ...

Page 587: ... Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number FREQROL E500 S500 S500E F500J D700 F700PJ 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 inverter Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Terminal cable Distributor Connection ...

Page 588: ...rol terminal option Communication type Connection diagram number FREQROL E700 sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 inverter FREQROL E700 sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX 2 FR E7TR 2 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 5 Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Terminal cable Distributor Connec...

Page 589: ...nnector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Control terminal option Communication type Connection diagram number FREQROL E700 sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX 1 FR E7TR 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 9 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 31 inverters for 1 GOT Inverter Connection cable GOT Connector ...

Page 590: ...2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number Model name Connection diagram number FREQROL A700 F700 F700P PU port RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 6 RS422 connection diagram 3 BMJ 8 Recomm ended RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m ...

Page 591: ...connectable equipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number FREQROL A800 F800 PU port RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 inverter FREQROL A800 F800 Built in RS485 terminal block RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Terminal cable Distributor Connection cable 1 Inve...

Page 592: ...ble FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO Communication driver Inverter Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number FREQROL A800 F800 Built in RS485 terminal block RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 8 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 31 inv...

Page 593: ...nnection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable quipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number MD CX522 K A0 1 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 inverter Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Terminal cable Distributor Connection cable 1 Inverte...

Page 594: ...5NR 2 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable Connector conversion box side 1 RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 5 4 3 6 2 8 1 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 SDA SDB RDA RDB P5S P5S SG Inverter or Distributor side Modular connector RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 SDA SDB RDA RDB RDR SG FR A5NR side terminal block 1 Connector conversion box side 2 R...

Page 595: ...etting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable RS422 connection diagram 6 Distributor side Terminating resistor 100Ω 1 2W SDA SDB RDA RDB P5S P5S SG 5 4 3 6 2 8 1 RS422 connection diagram 7 RS422 connection diagram 8 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RDR 1 6 2 7 5 3 8 4 9 FR A5NR side terminal block Station No 0 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RDR FR A5NR side terminal block Station No 1 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RDR FR A5NR side te...

Page 596: ...the GOT main unit to Disable RS422 connection diagram 9 RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG SDB SDA RDB RDA SG SDA SDB RDA RDB SG 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 FR E7TR side terminal block Station No 0 SDA SDB RDA RDB SG SDB SDA RDB RDA SG FR E7TR side terminal block Station No 1 SDA SDB RDA RDB SDB SDA RDB RDA SG SG FR E7TR side terminal block 1 Station No 2 Connector conversion box side 2 ...

Page 597: ... A500 and F500 Series 5 Terminal block layout in the FR E7TR control terminal option Mount the FR E7TR to the E700 series Connecting terminating resistors When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT Set the terminating resistor setting switch For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 4 2 Back Panel Pin No Signal name Remark 1 ...

Page 598: ...lity The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For the details on the Utility refer to the following manual 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Cli...

Page 599: ...NTROLLER CONNECTION 27 CNC CONNECTION HINT HINT HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller For example faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Ver...

Page 600: ...tings on the GOT can be changed When changing the settings on the GOT be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings 3 Inverter default values No need to change 4 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side 5 The setting is required for Frequency setting command selection GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter RS 485 po...

Page 601: ...need to change 4 Since the value has been set as a default no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side 5 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side 6 The setting is required on the inverter side when FR A5NR is used GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 FR A5NR Option unit Pr 79 Pr 33...

Page 602: ...ond with the GOT settings 3 Inverter default values No need to change GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 342 FR A5NR Option unit Pr 79 Pr 331 to Pr 337 Pr 340 to Pr 342 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Contents of setting PU connector FR A5NR Communication station number Pr 117 Pr 331 0 to 31 24 5 13 Station number setting Co...

Page 603: ...700PJ series only If Pr 999 is set as the following the communication settings other than PU communication station number and Communication EEPROM write selection can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings of the GOT side 1 When monitoring the value of Pr 999 9999 is always monitored GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 P...

Page 604: ...to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 340 Pr 342 RS 485 terminal Pr 79 Pr 331 to Pr 337 Pr 340 to Pr 342 Pr 549 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Contents of setting PU connector RS 485 PU communication station number RS 485 communication station number Pr 117 Pr 331 0 to 31 24 5 13 Station number setting PU communication speed RS 485 communication speed 2 Pr 118 Pr 332 192 4 1920...

Page 605: ...42 RS 485 terminal Pr 79 Pr 331 to Pr 337 Pr 340 to Pr 342 Pr 549 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Contents of setting PU connector RS 485 PU communication station number RS 485communication station number Pr 117 Pr 331 0 to 31 24 5 13 Station number setting PU communication speed RS 485communication speed 2 Pr 118 Pr 332 192 4 19200bps PU communication stop bit length RS 485 communication st...

Page 606: ...h to the default communication settings of the GOT side 1 When monitoring the value of Pr 999 9999 is always monitored 2 Inverters available for automatic batch setting Parameters are not automatically set in a batch depending on the SERIAL production number symbol of the inverter to be used For details contact your local distributor Parameter No Set value Description Operation in parameter settin...

Page 607: ...U connector on the inverter side GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 340 Pr 342 RS 485 terminal Pr 79 Pr 331 to Pr 337 Pr 340 to Pr 342 Pr 549 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Contents of setting PU connector RS 485 terminal PU communication station number RS 485 communication station number Pr 117 Pr 331 0 to 31 24 5 13 Stati...

Page 608: ...nication station number and Communication EEPROM write selection can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings of the GOT side 1 When monitoring the value of Pr 999 9999 is always monitored Parameter No Set value Contents of setting Operation in parameter setting mode Pr 999 1 10 GOT Initial settings PU connector AUTO GOT 1 Write 11 GOT initial setting RS 485 terminal ...

Page 609: ...e GOT be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings 3 Sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX series default values No need to change GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 340 Pr 342 Pr 549 FR E7TR RS 485 terminal block Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Contents of setting PU communication station n...

Page 610: ...PM series 2 Settings on the GOT can be changed When changing the settings on the GOT be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings 3 Inverter default values No need to change GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Contents of setting Communication station number...

Page 611: ... setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the inverter Specification range 0 to 31 Specification station NO Compatible dev...

Page 612: ...ion parameter change Do not make any change for each communication parameter of the inverter side from GOT If changed the communication to the inverter cannot be made 2 When setting 8888 or 9999 to inverter parameter Pr 8888 and 9999 designate special function When specifying from the GOT it will be as follows Screen switching devices system information devices Make sure to use GD for screen switc...

Page 613: ...IFIER CONNECTION 25 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models 1 For the RS 422 communication use MELSERVO J4 of software version A3 or a later version Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSERVO J2 Super MR J2S A RS 232 RS 422 25 2 1 MR J2S CP MR J2S CL MELSERVO J2M MR J2M P8A RS 232 RS 422 25 2 1 MR J2M DU MELSERVO J3 MR J3 A RS 232 RS 422 25 2 2 M...

Page 614: ...e model Connection diagram number MELSERVO J2 Super 1 RS 232 MR CPCATCBL3M 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier MELSERVO J2M 1 Connection cable Servo amplifier CHARGE CHARGE GOT Connector conversion box External cable Servo amplifier MELSERVO J4 J3 J2S M JE Communication driver Servo amplifier Connection cable Connector conversion box Exter...

Page 615: ...ion cable Servo amplifier GOT Connector conversion box External cable MELSERVO J4 J3 J2S M JE Communication driver Servo amplifier Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance 4 Number of connectable equipment Series name RS 422 232 interface converter RS 422 232 conversion cable Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number MELSERVO J4 1 J3 1 DSV CA...

Page 616: ...onverter Connection cable 2 Terminal cable RS 422 232 converter Distributor Connection cable 1 Servo amplifier Distributor Connection cable 1 Servo amplifier GOT Connector conversion box External cable MELSERVO J4 J3 J2S M JE Communication driver Servo amplifier Terminating cable Connection cable1 Distributor 3 Connection cable2 Distributor 3 RS 422 232 interface converter 2 Connector conversion b...

Page 617: ...ion 1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN1 Connection cable Servo amplifier CHARGE CHARGE GOT Connector conversion box External cable Servo amplifier MELSERVO J4 J3 J2S M JE Communication driver Servo amplifier Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series name Communication type Connection diagram number MEL...

Page 618: ...3 9 2 5 7 8 6 4 Connector conversion box side Plate 2 1 12 11 CD SD TXD RD RXD SG RS RTS CS CTS DR DSR ER DTR FG RXD LG TXD LG RS422 connection diagram 1 RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connection diagram 3 1 Make the wiring between the distributor and servo amplifier as short as possible 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Connector conversion box side Modular connector Servo amplifier side Distributor side 3 5 2...

Page 619: ...GND RTS RSA RTS RSB CTS CSA CTS CSB 9 19 5 15 11 1 10 Plate 9 19 5 15 11 1 10 Plate SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE 9 19 5 15 11 1 10 Plate 1 RS422 connection diagram 5 1 Perform terminal processing on the part between RDP 3 pin and RDN 6 pin with a 150 resistor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Distributor side Modular connector LG P5D RDP SDN SDP RDN LG NC 1 RS422 connection diagram 6 Connector conversion box side SDP ...

Page 620: ...o amplifiers Use the commercial connectors and cables shown in the table below or the comparable products Refer to the manual for the servo amplifier Connecting terminating resistors When connecting a servo amplifier to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminating res...

Page 621: ...erface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For the details on the Utility refer to the following manual 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range ...

Page 622: ...POINT POINT POINT 1 Parameter setting Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier or setup software 2 When changing the parameter Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective the new parameter Model name Refer to MELSERVO J2 Super Series 25 5 1 MELSERVO J2M Series 25 5 2 MELSERVO J4 J3 Series 25 5 3 Item Set value Basic parameter No 1...

Page 623: ...story clear Default 0000 1 Serial communication baud rate selection 1 0 9600bps 1 19200bps 2 38400bps 3 57600bps 2 Serial communication I F selection 0 RS 232 1 RS 422 3 Communication response delay time selection 0 Invalid 1 Valid Response after 800 s or longer delay Basic IFU parameter No 10 Interface unit serial communication station No selection 0 to 31 Default 0 2 Basic IFU parameter No 11 Sl...

Page 624: ...umber of the servo amplifier of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the servo amplifier 3 All station specification Target station differs depending on write in operation or read out operation ...

Page 625: ...e servo system Make sure to establish servo system with the station number set with the host address For details of host address setting refer to the following 25 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings GOT clock control Since the servo amplifier does not have a clock function the settings of Adjust or Broadcast by GOT clock control will be disabled Servo amplifier test operatio...

Page 626: ...25 14 25 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 25 7 Precautions ...

Page 627: ...d a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For...

Page 628: ...rnet setting 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 2 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 64 GOT IP Address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is...

Page 629: ... be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For the details on the Utility refer to the following manual 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Item Description Range Host The host is displayed The...

Page 630: ...ace Communication settings Model Reference Robot controller CRnD 700 26 4 1 Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection NETIP 192 168 0 19 GOTPORT 5001 GOT The settings other than the following are set to the default 2 Network No 1 PLC No 1 IP address 192 168 0 18 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed Network No 1 PLC No 2 IP address 192 168 0 19 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP ...

Page 631: ...ulty or not The IP address of the CRnD 700 specified for the Ping command 26 5 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT16 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 26 6 Precautions When setting IP address Do not use 0 and 255...

Page 632: ...26 6 26 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 26 6 Precautions ...

Page 633: ...red by the user referring the following MELDAS C6 C64 C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP B2255 F311 Cable Manufacturing Drawing 4 The distance from the GOT to the CNC F311 cable Connection cable External cable Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELDAS C6 C64 1 FCA C6 FCA C64 RS 232 RS 422 27 2 1 Ethernet 27 2 2 AJ71C24 MELDAS C6 Communication driver F311 cable Connection c...

Page 634: ...etween the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 For the system configuration of the expansion unit refer to the following manuals MELDAS C6 C64 C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP B2255 MELDAS C6 C64 C64T NETWORK MANUAL BNP B2373 4 Select AJ71QE71 for Controller Type in Ethernet of GT Designer3 For Ethernet of ...

Page 635: ...64 side connection refer to the following manuals MELDAS C6 C64 C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP B2255 MELDAS C6 C64 C64T NETWORK MANUAL BNP B2373 Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 232 cable must be 6m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the followin...

Page 636: ...ion Setting For details refer to the following 17 1 2 I F communication setting 27 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 19200bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 576...

Page 637: ...bnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway 1 Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected Only for connection via router Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Ethernet Download Port No 1 Set the GOT port No for Ethernet download...

Page 638: ...parameter setting by GPPW is as follows Set the first I O No as follows according to the expansion slot to which the unit is inserted a Unit No Ethernet 192 168 1 xx CNC 1 Communication with GOT N W No 239 PLC No 2 IP address 192 168 1 2 CNC 2 N W No 239 PLC No 3 IP address 192 168 1 3 GOT N W No 1 PLC No 1 IP address 192 168 1 1 Slot position Start I O No Mounting position of extension unit EXT1 ...

Page 639: ...RK MANUAL BNP B2373 POINT POINT POINT IP address setting IP address setting on GX Developer is invalid Set the IP address by the 7 segment LED and rotary switch of the CNC side referring to the next page 2 CNC side parameter setting Confirm the CNC side parameter setting with the settings of IP address gateway address subnet mask and port No by the 7 segment LED and rotary switch of the CNC side F...

Page 640: ... 27 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and CNC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT E...

Page 641: ...ing instrument 28 2 System Configuration 28 2 1 Connecting to an energy measuring unit electronic multi measuring instrument Manufacturer Series Model name 1 Clock Communication type Refer to Mitsubishi Energy measuring unit EMU4 BD1 MB RS 485 28 2 1 EMU4 HD1 MB Electric multimeasuring instrument ME110SSR MB RS 485 MODBUS RTU Communication driver ENERGY MEASURING UNIT ELECTRIC MULTI MEASURING INST...

Page 642: ...s 1 GOT side When connecting an energy measuring unit electric multi measuring instrument to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 4 2 Back Panel 2 Energy measuring unit electric multi measuring instrument side When connecting an ...

Page 643: ...400bps 2 Set 8bit 3 Set HL Order 4 Make the settings to match the setting of the energy measuring unit electronic multi measuring instrument POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following man...

Page 644: ... number setting In the MODBUS network a maximum of 31 energy measuring units electronic multi measuring instruments can be connected to 1 GOT Assign a non overlapped station number ranging from 1 to 247 arbitrarily to each energy measuring unit electronic multi measuring instrument In the system configuration the energy measuring unit electric multi measuring instrument with the station number set...

Page 645: ...er s address 031AH is displayed as 400795 on GT Designer3 GS device settings Set the GS device as follows GS573 1 2 1 The GS device specifies the maximum number of the holdingregister read times To input the numerical values to the GS device automatically at GOT startup use the status observation function or the script function Setting example of the status observation function For details of the ...

Page 646: ...er to the following 28 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings GOT clock control The settings of time adjusting or time broadcast made on the GOT will be disabled on the PLC Cutting the portion of multiple connection ofthe controller By setting GOT internal device GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller For example the faulty station where a communicatio...

Page 647: ...MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS 29 GOT MULTI DROP CONNECTION 29 1 ...

Page 648: ......

Page 649: ...p Connection Unit and PLC refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 POINT POINT POINT GOT Multi Drop Connection When using the GOT multi drop connection the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3 Version 1 12N or later as well as the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver t...

Page 650: ...ion box Connection cable Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit Connection type dependent Communication driver GOT Multi Drop Slave Communication driver PLC Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit Connection cable Connector conversion adapter Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model For details of the system configur...

Page 651: ...setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable 2 Set the terminating resistor selector to 330 3 Set the terminating resister setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable and connect a 330 terminating resistor to the GOT 4 Set the 1pair 2pair signal selection switch of the connection conversion adapter to 2pair 5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding 100 or less RS...

Page 652: ... Disable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 4 2 Back Panel Serial multi drop connection unit GT16 FA LTBGTR4CBL GT16 GT15 GT15 RS4 TE GT16 Handy GT10 9PT5S GT16 GT15 GT15 RS4 9S User created terminal block RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 SG RDB1 RDA1 SDB1 SDA1 RDB2 RDA2 SDB2 SDA2 SG FG SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RD...

Page 653: ...cation Setting For details refer to the following 17 1 2 I F communication setting 29 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Ut...

Page 654: ...ial Multi Drop Connection Unit interface setting on Communication with GT01 RS4 M of GT Designer 3 For the communication interface driver set the same communication driver as the serial multi drop connection For details on Communication with GT01 RS4 M of GT Designer3 refer to the manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Controller setting 1 Set the following to the driver for the connec...

Page 655: ...d Device 10 Points to D0 3 Details on the word device assignment contents a Control signal 1 1 10 second cycle flicker signal 1 By the repetition of turning ON OFF every 5 seconds the connection between GT01 RS4 M and the PLC can be confirmed on the PLC side When no repetition of this ON OFF is observed GT01 RS4 M is not connected to the PLC 1 When writing or clearing data on the program area from...

Page 656: ...me the file and save it The file format is ini fixed 2 Import Enter the name of the file previously saved and open the file The file format is ini fixed Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 For the connection with GOT 2 For the connected equipment Set the communication detail settings of the driver for controllers according to the connection type Ref...

Page 657: ...s according to the connection type POINT POINT POINT Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit For details on the Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit refer to the following manual Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit User s Manual 29 6 Setting of connection conversion adapter 29 6 1 Setting switches Set the switches according to the connection type POINT POINT POINT Connector conversion adapter For details on ...

Page 658: ...evice update cycle When the number of connected slave GOTs and the total device points of each GOT increase the device update cycle on the screen may get slower In such a case it is recommended to reduce the total device points of each GOT Please consider 250 points as a guide of 1 GOT and 750 points as a guide of the total points In addition when a timeout error occurs make the timeout time longe...

Page 659: ...MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 30 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 30 1 ...

Page 660: ......

Page 661: ...tion between GOT and the controllers is the same as that of when not using the multi channel function For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers refer to the following Each chapter indicating the system configuration Features of the multi channel function 1 With a single unit of GOT the system consisting of PLC CPU temperature controller servo amplifier and other controllers can ...

Page 662: ...1 Ethernet connection Channel No 2 Ethernet connection Channel No 3 Ethernet connection Channel No 4 Connection cable Connection cable Connection cable Connection cable GOT FXCPU ALLEN BRADLEY PLC Robot controller QCPU Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 Communication driver Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 Communication driver PLC Connection type Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Ch...

Page 663: ...sing the multi channel function for the first time 30 3 1 General flow from system selection to drawing System selection for using the multi channel function is explained below Make selection and setting for the multi channel function by following the order shown below System selection Determine the connection type and the channel No to be used 30 3 2 Determining the connection type and channel No...

Page 664: ...INGS CONTROLLER SETTING AND COMMON SETTINGS Ethernet connection Serial connection Ethernet connection Direct CPU connection MODBUS RTU connection Third party PLC connection Ethernet connection Computer link connection Temperature controller connection MODBUS TCP connection CC Link connection via G4 Inverter connection Robot controller connection Third party PLC connection serial connection Servo a...

Page 665: ... interface RS 232 interface RS 422 485 interface RS 422 485 interface and RS 232 interface cannot be used at the same time Switch the RS 422 485 interface and RS 232 interface with the RS 422 485 RS 232 selection connector in the environmental protection back cover Selected connection type Reference for required interface and communication unit Ethernet Connection This section GOT interface used f...

Page 666: ... connection use the following interface built in the GOT Refer to the explanation below to check if the number of channels for the multi channel function to be used is restricted or not If it is restricted review the system configuration Interface Interface built in GOT Name Ethernet interface 1 Interface Name Interface built in GOT RS 232 interface RS 422 485 interface 30 5 Multi channel function...

Page 667: ...PLC 30 5 Multi channel function check sheet Write down the following items to the check sheet 1 After writing down the names of communication units write down the CH No to be assigned to each communication interface based on the entry in Check Sheet No 1 selection of connection type and interface 2 After writing down CH No write down the communication driver name for each connection type For the c...

Page 668: ...interface 30 5 Multi channel function check sheet Make settings for Communication Settings by GT Designer3 referring to the check sheet where the necessary information has been written The position that the settings should be made on the communication settings screen are specified on the check sheet by numbers This completes the setting for Communication Settings Create a screen with GT Designer3 ...

Page 669: ...and when using the multi channel function Device settings It is necessary to set the device to be used together with the CH No GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Accessible range for monitoring The accessible range for monitoring is not changed even when the multi channel function is used GOT1000Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 Clock function Set the controller fo...

Page 670: ...nt function for other CH No change the CH No using the Utility Station No switching function Set the controller for which the station No switching function should be executed by the CH No GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual FA transparent function is executed for CH No 1 CH No 1 FXCPU CH No 2 QCPU CH No 3 ALLEN BRADLEY PLC CH No 4 Robot controller Station No switching is executed for CH No ...

Page 671: ...nnels When the advanced system alarm is used if the system alarms with the same error code occur in different channels the GOT treats the alarms as the same system alarm Therefore if the system alarms with the same error code occur one by one the time of later system alarm occurrence is not reflected to the GOT Confirmation of the channel No at which a system alarm occurred When a system alarm occ...

Page 672: ...the multi channel function Write Check Sheet The following symbols are used for each purpose Indicates parts where items and details are to be written Confirm the details and write them to the check sheet Indicates parts where written details are to be checked Confirm the details and perform the Communication Settings Check Write down the following items selected in this section to the check sheet...

Page 673: ...N TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 33 CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 34 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 35 CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC Check sheet No 1 selection of connection type and interface Channel No of controller No 1 to 4 RS 232 interface and RS 422 485 interface cannot be used at the same time CH No Selection of connection type 30 3 2 Selection of interface 30 3 3 1 Connection name 2 Connection ...

Page 674: ...e only one connection Connecting a controller Without multi channel Ethernet connection Driver name Connecting a controller With multi channel Ethernet connection 3 CH No RS 422 485 interface Connecting a controller Driver name 2 Driver name Multi channel Ethernet connection Multi Driver name RS 232 interface only one connection Connecting a controller Driver name Connecting a personal computer 9 ...

Page 675: ...FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 31 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 31 1 ...

Page 676: ......

Page 677: ...function is used Use of the FA transparent function does not affect the range accessible by the software For details on accessible range refer to the manual for the respective software 2 The software settings when using FA transparent function For the software settings refer to the following when using FA transparent function 31 6 1 Accessing by GX Works3 31 6 3 Accessing the PLC by the GX Develop...

Page 678: ...n 12 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1 04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function 13 GX Developer Version 8 88S or later is required to use the FA transparent function 14 GX Works2 Version 1 11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function 15 The adapter L6ADP R2 or L6ADP R4 is required 16 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1 07H or later is required to use the FA transparent function...

Page 679: ... required to use the FA transparent function 6 GX Developer Version 8 88S or later is required to use the FA transparent function 7 GX Works2 Version 1 11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function 8 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1 07H or later is required to use the FA transparent function 9 MX Component Version 4 03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function 10 Use MX Com...

Page 680: ...to use the FA transparent function 16 MR Configurator2 Version 1 09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function 17 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection 18 Setting Monitoring tool for C Controller module Version 4 00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function 19 GX Works2 Version 1 98C or later is required to use the FA transparen...

Page 681: ...er is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection 10 GX Works3 Version 1 005F or later is required to use the FA transparent function 11 MX Component Version 4 11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function 12 MX Sheet please use the MX Component Version 4 11M or later 2 When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection The following shows the software and the ...

Page 682: ...rect CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU GX Works3 MX Component MX Sheet R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU 4 R08ENCPU 4 R16ENCPU 4 R32ENCPU 4 R120ENCPU 4 R08SFCPU 4 R16SFCPU 4 R32SFCPU 4 R120SFCPU 4 Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series R16MTCPU MT Works2 MX Component MX Sheet R32MTCPU C Controller module MEL...

Page 683: ...wer 4 MX Component Version 4 11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function MX Sheet please use the MX Component Version 4 11M or later Series Model name Target software Connection type Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection MELSEC Q Q mode Q00JCPU GX Developer GX Works2 GX Configurator PX Developer MX Component MX Sheet Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU...

Page 684: ...02CPU A GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A MELSEC QnA QnACPU Q2ACPU GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU MELSEC QnA QnASCPU Q2ASCPU GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 MELSEC A AnCPU A2UCPU GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU S1 A2ACPUP21 S1 A2ACPUR21 S1 A3ACPU ...

Page 685: ... coupled I F Series Model name Target software Connection type Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection MELSEC A AnSCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet A1SHCPU A2SCPU 1 A2SCPU S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU MELSEC A A0J2HCPU GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU DC24 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CC...

Page 686: ... S3N A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU S1 MELSEC FX FX0 FX0S FX0N FX1 FX2 FX2C FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC GX Developer GX Works2 FX Configurator FP MX Component MX Sheet FX3G C FX3S FX3GE GX Developer FX Configurator FP MX Component MX Sheet GX Works2 FX3U C GX Developer FX Configurator FP FX3U ENET L Configuration tool MX Component MX Sheet GX Works2 MELSEC WS WS0 CPU0...

Page 687: ... CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC Series Model name Target software Connection type Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection FREQROL FREQROL A500 A500L FR Configurator FREQROL F500 F500L FREQROL V500 V500L FREQROL E500 FREQROL S500 S500E FREQROL F500J FREQROL D700 FREQROL E700 FREQROL E700EX FREQROL A700 FREQROL F700 MELIPM MD CX522 K A0 FR Configurator MELSERVO MR J2S A MR J2S ...

Page 688: ...onnection MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU GX Works3 MX Component MX Sheet R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU 2 R08ENCPU 2 R16ENCPU 2 R32ENCPU 2 R120ENCPU 2 R08SFCPU 2 R16SFCPU 2 R32SFCPU 2 R120SFCPU 2 Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series R16MTCPU MT Works2 MX Component MX Sheet R32MTCPU C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series R12CCPU V CW Configurator MELSEC iQ F S...

Page 689: ...ion 4 11M or later Series Model name Target software Connection type Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection MELSEC Q Q mode Q00JCPU GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base Q25PRHCPU Extension base Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02U...

Page 690: ...GX Works2 MX Component MX Sheet MELSEC Q A mode Q02CPU A Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A MELSEC QnA QnACPU Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU MELSEC QnA QnASCPU Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 MELSEC A AnCPU A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU S1 A2ACPUP21 S1 A2ACPUR21 S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU S1 A2NCPUP...

Page 691: ... F Series Model name Target software Connection type Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection MELSEC A AnSCPU A1SHCPU A2SCPU A2SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU MELSEC A A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU DC24 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF A2CJCPU S3 A1FXCPU Motion controller CPU Q Series Q172CPU MT Works2 1 Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU Q...

Page 692: ...U0 WS0 CPU1 WS0 CPU3 MELSECNET H Remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF ETB CNC CNC C70 Q173NCCPU MELDAS C6 C64 Robot controller CRnQ 700 Q172DRCPU CR750 Q Q172DRCPU CR751 Q Q172DRCPU CRnD 700 CR750 D CR751 D FREQROL FREQROL A500 A500L FREQROL F500 F500L FREQROL V500 V500L FREQROL E50...

Page 693: ...33 CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 34 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERTURE CONTROLLER 35 CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 1 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection MELSERVO MR J2S A MR J2S CP MR J2S CL MR J2M P8A MR J2M DU MR J3 A MR JE A MR J3 T MR J3 B 1 MR Configurator2 MR J4 A MR J4 B 1 MR J4W2 B 1 MR J4W3 B 1 MR Configurator2 Series Model name Target software Connection ty...

Page 694: ... Monitoring tool for C Controller module PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer Number of connectable equipment Connection type Model Interface Cable model Max distance Software For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to the following DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 2 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 2 ETHERNET CONNECTION GOT MULTI DROP CONNECTION 1 USB GT09 C30USB 5P 3m GT09 C20USB 5P 2m ...

Page 695: ...net device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 GX Works...

Page 696: ... Communication driver PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer Number of connectable equipment Connection type Model Interface Cable model Max distance Software For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to the following DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION USB GT09 C30USB 5P 3m GT09 C20USB 5P 2m 3m PX Developer GX Configurator 1 personal computer for 1 GOT ...

Page 697: ...rted 2 The motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series does not support the direct CPU connection GOT MULTI DROP connection PC Connection cable Varies according to the connection type GOT RCPU Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R series QCPU Motion controller CPU Q series Connection type dependant Communication driver PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer Number of connectable equipment Connection ...

Page 698: ...ion 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 The motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series does not support the direct CPU connection PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer Number of connectable equ...

Page 699: ...t connection 2 RCPU The motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series does not support the direct CPU connection Connection type dependant Communication driver GOT Servo amplifier Servo amplifier PC Connection cable Varies according to the connection type SSCNET H RCPU Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R series QCPU Motion controller CPU Q series PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer Number of conne...

Page 700: ... switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 RCPU The motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series does not support the direct CPU connection PC GOT External cable Connector conversion box Servo amplifier Servo amplifier Connection cable Varies according to the connectio...

Page 701: ...n cable Personal computer Number of connectable equipment Connection type Model Interface Cable model Max distance Software For details on the system configuration between GOT and Mitsubishi inverter refer to the following INVERTER CONNECTION USB GT09 C30USB 5P 3m GT09 C20USB 5P 2m 3m FR Configurator 1 personal computer for 1 GOT PC PLC Varies according to the connection type Connection cable GOT ...

Page 702: ... between the GOT and PLC refer to the following DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 1 ETHERNET CONNECTION USB GT09 C30USB 5P 3m GT09 C20USB 5P 2m 3m RT ToolBox2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT PC Connection cable Q173NCCPU Varies according to the connection type GOT Connection type dependant Communication driver PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer Number of connectable equipment Connection type Model In...

Page 703: ...e environment Click the OK button when settings are completed POINT POINT POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 17 1 2 I F communication setting Communication setting with personal computer Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer 1 Select Common Peripheral Setting PC Data Transfer ...

Page 704: ...e multi channel function specify the channel No on which FA transparent function is executed 1 Select Common GOT Environmental Setting GOT Setup from the menu 2 Check Enable GOT Setup 3 Select the Transparent tab 4 As necessary check one of CH1 to CH4 Default CH1 Click the OK button when settings are completed POINT POINT POINT Transparent setting on the utility screen Transparent setting can be p...

Page 705: ...n connecting the GOT and personal computer with USB 1 Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection a When connecting to RCPU 1 Click Online Connection Destination on GX Works3 2 Connection Channel Setup is displayed 3 Set Connection Channel Setup PC side I F USB PLC side I F GOT Other station No Specification 4 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of G...

Page 706: ...ction Destination in GX Works3 2 The Specify Connection Destination 1 is displayed 3 Set the Specify Connection Destination 1 PC side I F Serial USB PLC side I F GOT Other Station Setting No Specification 4 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting 5 Check mark either of the following in PC side I F Serial Setting Mark the RS 232C checkbox Mark the USB checkb...

Page 707: ... via a GOT 9 Specify the IP address for IP address same as the IP address assigned to the built in Ethernet port CPU 10 The screen returns to Specify Connection Destination Connection1 Click Connection Test to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the FX5UCPU 1 Click Online Specify Connection Destination on GX Works3 2 The Specify Connection Destination 1 is displayed 3 Set the Specify Connecti...

Page 708: ...g of GOT 7 Check mark via GOT direct coupled transparent mode in PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 8 The screen returns to Specify Connection Destination Connection1 Click Connection Test to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the FX5UCPU 1 Click Online Connection Destination on GX Works3 2 Connection Channel Setup is displayed 3 Set Connection Channel Setup PC side I F USB PLC side I F GO...

Page 709: ...he FA transparent function of CW Configurator When connecting the GOT and personal computer with USB 1 Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection a When connecting to RCPU 4 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 5 Check mark C24 in PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 6 The screen returns to the Connection Channel Setup Click Connection Test to...

Page 710: ...s displayed Here set the built in Ethernet port CPU which is firstly connected via a GOT 7 Set Ethernet Built in CPU for PLC Type 8 Specify the number for Network No and Station No same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module 9 Specify the IP address for IP Address same as the IP address assigned to the built in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module 10 The screen returns to the Connection Ch...

Page 711: ...ck Online Read from PLC in GX Developer 2 Set the PLC Series to QCPU Q mode 3 The Transfer Setup is displayed 4 Set the Transfer Setup PC side I F Serial USB COM PLC side I F PLC module Other station No specification 5 Double click Serial of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial setting 6 Check the following for PC side I F Serial setting Mark the USB checkbox When connecting the GOT and P...

Page 712: ... side I F C24 Other station No specification 5 Return to Transfer setup and double click C24 of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F detailed setting of C24 6 Check via GOT transparent mode for PLC side I F detailed setting of C24 7 Double click Serial of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial setting 8 Check the following for PC side I F Serial setting Mark the USB checkbox 9 The scree...

Page 713: ...eck the following for PC side I F Serial setting Mark the USB checkbox When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 7 Double click PLC module of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed setting of PLC module 8 On the PLC side I F Detailed setting of PLC module mark the via GOT Ethernet transparent mode checkbox and click Set 9 By clicking Set the GOT Ethernet transparent setting is displayed H...

Page 714: ...31 38 31 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 31 6 Personal Computer Side Setting 13 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Click Connection Test to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QCPU Q mode ...

Page 715: ... GX Developer For the GX Developer operation method refer to the following manual GX Developer Version Operating Manual 1 Click Online Read from PLC in GX Developer 2 Set the PLC Series to FXCPU 3 The Transfer Setup is displayed 4 Set the Transfer Setup PC side I F Serial PLC side I F PLC module Other station No specification 5 Double click Serial of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial s...

Page 716: ...ayed 3 Set the Transfer Setup PC side I F Serial USB PLC side I F GOT Other station No specification 4 Double click Serial of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial setting 5 Check the following for PC side I F Serial setting Mark the USB checkbox When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 6 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 Check mark eithe...

Page 717: ...isplayed 3 Set the Transfer Setup Connection1 PC side I F Serial USB PLC side I F GOT Other Station Setting No Specification 4 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting 5 Check mark either of the following in PC side I F Serial Setting Mark the RS 232C checkbox Mark the USB checkbox When connecting the GOT and PC with serial When connecting the GOT and PC wit...

Page 718: ...FX3U ENET ADP or Ethernet Module for PLC Type 10 Specify the IP address for IP address same as the IP address assigned to the FX3U ENET ADP or Ethernet Module 11 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Click Connection Test to check if GX Developer has been connected to the FXCPU ...

Page 719: ... view Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of GX Works2 2 The Transfer Setup is displayed 3 Set the Transfer Setup PC side I F Serial USB PLC side I F GOT Other station No specification 4 Double click Serial of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial setting 5 Check the following for PC side I F Serial setting Mark the USB checkbox When connecting the G...

Page 720: ...he PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial setting 5 Check the following for PC side I F Serial setting Mark the USB checkbox When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 6 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 On the PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT mark the via GOT Ethernet transparent mode checkbox and click Set 8 By clicking Set the GOT Etherne...

Page 721: ...d to the Ethernet module When QnUDE H is set for PLC type the setting is not required 11 Specify the IP address for IP address same as the IP address assigned to the built in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module 12 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Click to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU Q mode Connection Test Network No 3 PC No 1 IP address 192 168 3 18 Port No 5001 Communi...

Page 722: ...ing Mark the USB checkbox When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 6 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 Set the CPU mode to LCPU On the PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT mark the via GOT Ethernet transparent mode checkbox and click Setting 8 By clicking Set the GOT Ethernet transparent setting is displayed Here set the built in Ethernet port QC...

Page 723: ...ommunication Route Detailed Setting of CC IE Field is displayed 14 Set Network No and Station No assigned to CPU and click OK When connecting to CC Link IE Field Network master local module of the system configuration example the setting is as follows Network No 1 Station No 0 15 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Click Connection Test to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU Q mode ...

Page 724: ... GOT and PLC connection Mark the via GOT direct coupled transparent mode checkbox 9 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Click to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU Q mode Direct CPU connection Connection Test 1 Click the Connection Destination view Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of GX Works2 2 The Transfer Setup is displayed 3 Set the Tr...

Page 725: ...il setting for PC and GOT connection Set the IP address and port No to the same as the Ethernet download setting 31 5 1 Setting communication interface 8 Check mark C24 in PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 9 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Click to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU Q mode Connection Test 1 Click Show Assistant Dialog for View on GX LogViewer 2 The Assistant...

Page 726: ...r setup Interface USB When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 4 Set the PLC side in Transfer setup PLC type Q series PLC type Multi PLC specification None No 1 to 4 Mark the via GOT transparent mode checkbox Interface PLC Type Direct coupled Interface C24 5 Set the Module connecting I O address in Transfer setup Specify the actual I O address of the module 6 The screen returns to the Transfer setu...

Page 727: ...e procedure to set the FA transparent function of MT Developer with an example of connecting to motion controller CPU Q series 1 Click Communication Communication Setting in MT Developer 2 Check mark the following in Serial port Mark the USB checkbox 3 Click Detail When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 4 Check mark the following in PLC side I F Detailed setting of PLC module via GOT direct coupl...

Page 728: ...ck Serial of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial setting 5 Check mark the following in PC side I F Serial setting Mark the USB checkbox When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 6 Double click GOT of the CPU side I F to display CPU side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 Check mark the following in CPU side I F Detailed Setting of GOT Mark the via GOT direct coupled transparent mode checkbox Ma...

Page 729: ... Double click Ethernet Board of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Ethernet Board Setting 5 Set the protocol to TCP Network No and Station No are not required to be changed default because they are not used 6 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 Set the IP address and port No in Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection Set the IP addre...

Page 730: ...2 refer to the following 31 6 8 Accessing by MT Works2 31 6 11 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator This section explains the setting method of the FA transparent function of FR Configurator with an example of connecting to FREQROL A700 F700 series 1 Click Settings Communication Settings in FR Configurator 2 Check mark the following in Communication port Mark the USB checkbox 3 Click the ...

Page 731: ...Accessing by FX3U ENET L Configuration tool This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of the FX3U ENET L Configuration tool 1 Click Connection setup for Online on FX Configurator FP 2 Check mark the following in PC side Mark the USB GOT transparent mode checkbox 3 Click Comm Test 4 After the communication test is completed check that the GOT is correctly connected to t...

Page 732: ...n direct connection CRnQ 700 1 Right click a project name to be a target on the project tree of RT ToolBox2 Click Edit Project 2 Set Method to CRnQ 3 Click Detail 4 Check mark the following in Serial port Mark the USB checkbox 5 Click Detail 6 Check mark the following in PLC side I F setting of PLC module via GOT direct coupled transparent mode 7 As necessary select a CPU that is targeted in Targe...

Page 733: ...it Project 2 Set Method to CRnQ 3 Click Detail 4 Check mark the following in Serial port Mark the USB checkbox 5 Click Detail When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 6 Check mark the following in PLC side I F setting of PLC module via GOT Ethernet transparent mode 7 Click Setting The GOT Ethernet Transparent setting dialog box is displayed 8 Set Type to QJ71E71 9 Specify the number for Network No ...

Page 734: ...ator 1 Click File Open 2 The Open is displayed 3 Select NC on the upper left of the screen and set the following NC series C70 M or C70 L Connect pattern Set the pattern according to the connect pattern IP address Set as necessary 4 By clicking Open data is read from CNC and displayed 1 Click Online Batch Read 2 The Batch Read is displayed 3 Select the projects to be read from Select Project and s...

Page 735: ...lowing shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of Setting Monitoring tool for C Controller module with the C Controller module Q Series Q24DHCCPU V connected When connecting the GOT and personal computer with USB 1 Click Online Transfer Setup 2 The Transfer Setup is displayed 3 Set the Transfer Setup PC side I F Serial USB PLC side I F GOT Other station No specification 4 Set PC sid...

Page 736: ...ide I F Detailed Setting of GOT screen 6 By clicking Set the GOT Ethernet Transparent Setting is displayed Here set the C Controller module Q Series Q24DHCCPU V which is firstly connected via a GOT 7 Specify the IP address for IP address same as the IP address assigned to the C Controller module Q24DHCCPU V 8 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Click Connection Test to check if Setting Monitoring...

Page 737: ...used in case that the GOT monitoring is faulty due to PLC CPU errors or faulty communication between the PLC CPU and GOT When GOT monitoring is faulty check the following 1 Whether the PLC CPU operates normally Refer to the User s Manual of the PLC CPU you use 2 Whether the PLC CPU and GOT are connected normally 20 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 21 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION When monitoring the PLC CPU fr...

Page 738: ...onitoring performance of the whole multi drop system decreases As a result timeout error may occur in GOTs in the system When connecting the GOT and personal computer with modem connection When using the FA transparent function with a modem the communication settings of compatible software modem connection tool modem and GOT must be set correctly to communicate with the GOT If not correctly set th...

Page 739: ...ion such as Read to PLC or Write to PLC an error may occur on the GOT GX Works3 GX Works2 GX Developer In this case take the following corrective action File reading in the ladder monitor function for MELSEC Q Read write of values of the file register specified for the recipe function 1 The numerical indicates the system alarm No Reading TC monitor set value in the system monitor function Reading ...

Page 740: ...tion The execution of PLC write using the FA transparent function may be failed due to some reasons such as cable disconnection When this occurs re execute the PLC write from the same PC or reset the motion controller CPU When a cable disconnection has occurred When the cable between the GOT and the motion CPU is disconnected it takes time until a timeout error occurs in MT Works2 MT Developer Err...

Page 741: ...hen FA transparent function is used GOT suspends monitoring on channels supporting FA transparent function POINT POINT POINT Canceling the suspended GOT monitoring immediately To cancel the suspended 45 seconds GOT monitoring immediately after FA transparent is executed input 1 to device GS457 Then GOT resumes monitoring If FA transparent is resumed even if 1 is already input to device GS457 an er...

Page 742: ...31 66 31 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 31 7 Precautions ...

Page 743: ...4 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 44 1 45 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 45 1 46 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 46 1 47 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 47 1 48 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 48 1 49 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 49 1 50 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 50 1 51 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 51 1 52 CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 52 1 53 CONNECTION TO RK...

Page 744: ......

Page 745: ...TURE CONTROLLER 35 CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 32 CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 32 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name 1 Communication Type Refer to X SEL XSEL J RS 232 32 2 1 XSEL K XSEL KE XSEL KT XSEL KET XSEL P XSEL Q XSEL JX XSEL KX XSEL KTX XSEL PX XSEL QX SSEL SSEL ASEL ASEL PSEL PSEL PCON PCON C RS 232 RS 422 32 2 2 PCON CG PCON CF...

Page 746: ...IAI X SEL Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Connector conversion cable 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number X SEL Teaching connector RS 232 CB ST E1MW050 1 or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 Controller X SEL General RS232C po...

Page 747: ...ications 1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation For details of the product contact IAI Corporation 2 Use ERC2 SE 3 Use the following models ERC2 NP ERC2 PN IAI ROBO CYLINDER Communication driver RS232C conversion unit Communication cable PCON ACON SCON ERC2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Controller Communication cable RS232C conversion unit Connector conversion box External cable G...

Page 748: ...ista nce SIO converter 1 Connection cable 3 Connect or conversi on box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number Model name Comm unic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number ERC2 NP PN specific ations 2 RS 422 CB ERC PWBIO or CB ERC PWBIO RB Terminal block User preparing RS422 485 connection diag...

Page 749: ...e the following models ERC2 NP ERC2 PN Junction box 4D Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Terminating cable PCON ACON SCON ERC2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Controller Terminating cable Connection cable 1 Junction box 4D Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Communication type Connection diagram ...

Page 750: ...nector conversion box External cable GOT Terminal block Controller Connection cable 1 1 Terminal block Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number ERC2 NP PN specific ations 2 RS 422 CB ERC PWBIO or CB ERC PWBIO RB Terminal block User preparing RS422 485 connectio...

Page 751: ...le 2 Connection cable 1 Connection cable 1 Terminating cable Junction box 4D PCON ACON SCON ERC2 PCON ACON SCON ERC2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Controller Terminating cable Connection cable 1 Junctionbox 4D Connection cable 2 Connection cable 3 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Communication type Connection diag...

Page 752: ... ERC2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block Controller Connection cable 1 1 Terminal block Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number ERC2 NP PN specificat ions 2 RS 422 CB ERC PWBIO or CB ERC PWBIO RB Terminal b...

Page 753: ... box External cable GOT model Total distance 5 Number of connectable equipment Series Connection diagram number Cable model Model name Connection diagram number Connection diagram number Model name Comm unic ation type Cable model Connection diagram number PCON ACON SCON RS422 connection diagram 1 CB RCB CTL002 0 2m 1 5 1473574 4 2 RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connection diagram 2 or RS422 con...

Page 754: ...6H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 2 Controller ERC2 NP PN specificati ons 7 RS422 connection diagram 1 CB ERC PWBIO or CB ERC PWBIO RB Terminal block User preparing RS422 485 connection diagram 9 5 1473574 4 2 RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connection diagram 2 or RS422 connection diagram 4 100 m RCB TU SIO RS 232 RCB CV MW 0 3m 1 CB RCA SIO050 5m 1 or RS232 connection diagram 3 GT16H CNB...

Page 755: ...l block Terminal block Connector conversion box External cable Connection cable 1 Connection cable 1 SIO converter Controller Connection cable 1 1 Terminal block Connection cable 2 Max dista nce SIO converter 1 Connection cable 3 Connec tor convers ion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number Model n...

Page 756: ...on Box 3 IAI Robot Controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the IAI Robot Controller For details refer to the IAI Robot Controller user s manual Connector conversion box side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 IAI robot controller side 1 2 3 4 7 5 6 12 13 18 19 20 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS NC TXD RXD RTS SG CTS DSR EMGOUT EMGIN VCC ENBTBX DTR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7...

Page 757: ...3 RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connection diagram 4 1 2 3 4 Junction box 4D side E CON connector plug Model 1473562 4 Terminating resistor 220 1 4W 1 6 2 7 5 3 4 8 9 Connector conversion box side SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA CSA RSB CSB 1 2 3 4 Junction box 4D side E CON connector plug Model 1473562 4 Terminating resistor 220 1 2W 1 2 3 4 Junction box 4D side E CON connector plug Model 1473562 4 Jun...

Page 758: ... Emergency stop Terminal block 0V Terminal block User preparing Terminal block User preparing Terminating resistor 220Ω 1 4W Signal name SGA Orange Red1 SGB Orange Black1 GND Signal name SGA Orange Red1 SGB Orange Black1 GND SGA SGB SIO converter side TB1 Link connection Terminal block SIO converter side TB2 power supply or Emergency stop Terminal block Terminal block RC Tu PIO IAI robot controlle...

Page 759: ... GOT and the robot controller goes through the SIO converter The distance from the robot controller to the SIO converter must be 100 m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 IAI Robot Controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the IAI Robot Controller For details refer ...

Page 760: ...2 I F communication setting 32 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 IAI X SEL Controller 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 38400bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Data Bit Set this item when change the dat...

Page 761: ...atest setting is effective Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 38400bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the controller Default 8bit 7bit 8bit Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communicat...

Page 762: ... Mode switch 1 X SEL K type a When setting the mode switch to MANU Connect the GOT to the following teaching connector b When setting the mode switch to AUTO Connect the GOT to the following general RS232C port connector 1 The teaching connector and general RS232C port connector cannot be used at the same time 2 Other than X SEL K type Set the mode switch to MANU or AUTO and connect the GOT to the...

Page 763: ...om the setting tool PC software Transmission speed setting Set the transmission speed from the setting tool PC software 1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side Specify the transmission speed to match the transmission speed of the GOT Parameter Parameter Name Set Value I O parameter 90 Usage of SIO channel 0 opened to user 2 IAI protocol B fixed I O parameter 91 Sta...

Page 764: ...data is to be changed 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the robot controller of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the robot controller ...

Page 765: ...in a batch the communication is performed based on the value set with batch write When Clear 4 is set to the command trigger the communication with the controller is not performed and the set value is initialized When an unsupported set value is input to the command trigger the following error is displayed in the system alarm 315 Device writing error Correct device Device reserved for system use D...

Page 766: ...32 22 32 CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 32 7 Precautions ...

Page 767: ...PU23 the memory cassette equipped with a clock is required The C200H CPU01 CPU02 CPU03 does not support the clock function 7 The C200HE CPU11 does not support the clock function 8 For the 20 points PLC module of CP1E N type only the direct CPU connection is available 9 Not compatible with the redundant Ethernet Series Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to SYSMAC CPM CPM1 RS 232 33 2 1 CPM1A...

Page 768: ...Model name RS 232C adapter 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number CPM2A CQM1 RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C CPM1 CIF01 RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 RS 232C adapter CPM2C CPM2C CIF01 V1 OMRON connection cab...

Page 769: ... cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Max distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Serial communication board 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number CQM 1H RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC CQM1 SCB41 RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT1...

Page 770: ... GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 RS 422A converter CJ1H CJ1G CJ1M CJ2H CJ2M CPU1 CJ2M CPU3 CJ1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU41 V1 RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 port of a serial communication module CJ1W SCU41 V1 CJ1W SCU31 V1 RS 422 GT09 C30R40101 9P 3m GT09 C100R40101 9P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 3 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P...

Page 771: ...CP1E RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC CP1H CP1L CP1E CP1W CIF01 RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 RS 232C option board CP1W CIF11 CP1W CIF12 RS 422 GT09 C30R40103 5T 3m GT09 C100R40103 5T 10m or RS422 connection diagram 4 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT...

Page 772: ...r RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC C200HS C200H C200HX C200HG C200HE C200H LK201 V1 RS 232 GT09 C30R20103 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 3 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 rack type host link unit C200H LK202 V1 RS 422 GT09 C30R40102 9P 3m GT09 C100R40102 9P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6...

Page 773: ... converter 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number CS1H CS1G CS1D RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC CS1W SCU21 CS1W SCU21 V1 RS 232 GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 serial communicati on module CJ1W CIF11 RS 422 GT09 C30R40103 5T 3m GT09 C100R...

Page 774: ... C500 LK201 V1 RS 232 GT09 C30R20103 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 3 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 port of a rack type host link unit RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT OMRON SYSMAC Communication driver PLC Connection cable...

Page 775: ...ngth The maximum distance between GOT and controllers of RS 232 cable must be 6m or less b Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box c OMRON PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the OMRON PLC For details refer to the OMRON PLC user s manual 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OMRON PLC side 1 2 3 4 9 5 ...

Page 776: ...r compatible with the OMRON PLC For details refer to the OMRON PLC user s manual 3 Connecting terminating resistors a GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For details of terminating resistor settings refer to the following 4 2 Back Panel b OMRON PLC side When connecting an OMRON PLC to a GOT a terminating resistor must be set to the OMRON PLC OMRON P...

Page 777: ...ding to the usage environment POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings ...

Page 778: ...odel name Refer to PLC CPU CPM2A 33 2 12 CQM1 CQM1H CJ1 CJ2 CS1 33 2 13 CP1H CP1L CP1E 33 2 13 C200H 33 2 12 CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 33 2 14 RS 232C adapter CPM1 CIF01 CPM2C CIF01 V1 33 2 12 Connection cable CQM1 CIF01 33 2 15 CQM1 CIF02 CPM2C CN111 Rack type host link unit C200H LK201 V1 33 2 16 C200H LK202 V1 33 2 16 C500 LK201 V1 33 2 16 Serial communication module CJ1W SCU21 33 2 17 CJ1W SCU4...

Page 779: ...Peripheral port communication condition CJ2 Free OFF SW5 RS 232C communication condition OFF SW6 User customized DIP switch OFF SW7 Type specification for simplified backup OFF SW8 OFF RUN ERR ALM INH PRPHL COMM OPEN MCPWR BUSY PERIPHERAL PORT DIP switch inside battery compartment ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Switch Description Setting SW1 Enable disable write to user memory UM OFF SW2 Enable disable automa...

Page 780: ...the DIP switches 1 Host link RS 422 232 switch 2 DIP switches Setting PLC system settings Make the PLC system settings 1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown 2 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side 3 Set the station No according to the Host Address on the GOT side Channel Bit Item Set value 160 15 Arbitrary settings ON OFF 1H Arbitrary ...

Page 781: ... changed as follows CPM2A The communication condition switch to individual CPM2C The communication port function switch to OFF 33 2 16 Connecting to rack type host link unit Switch setting on C200H LK201 V1 Set the switches accordingly 1 Setting Machine No SW1 SW2 Set the Machine No within the range of 00 to 31 Set the station No according to the Host Address on the GOT side 2 Setting transmission...

Page 782: ...Setting the 1 1 1 N procedure switch 5 Setting the terminating resistor connection switch Settings Setting details Command level Parity Transmission code 2 fixed Levels 1 2 and 3 enabled Even ASCII 7 bits 2 stop bits Switch No Set value 1 OFF 2 OFF 3 ON 1 N procedure 4 OFF no 5V power supply Settings 0V Rotary switch Description Settings SW1 Machine No upper digit 101 0 to 3 SW2 Machine No lower d...

Page 783: ...re Level 1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown Settings Host link Settings For RS 232 communication For RS 422 communication RS 232 down RS 422 up Settings Internal up Settings Attached down Settings 0V up In operation Receiving Transmitting Transmission error Mode selection Host link Local Front Rear 6 7 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Switch No Settings Descrip...

Page 784: ...s available on the GOT side are shown 2 Set the same transmission speed as that of the GOT side 3 Set the host link station No according to the Host Address setting on the GOT side Device name Set value Port 1 Port 2 DM m DM m 10 8000H fixed The settings are Port setting Arbitrary setting Serial communication mode Host link Start bit 1bit Data bit 7bits Stop bit 2bits Parity Even DM m 1 DM m 11 DM...

Page 785: ...y transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown 2 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side 3 Set the host link station No according to the Host Address setting on the GOT side DIP switch Set value No Item SW1 RS 422 485 cable 2 wire 4 wire type switching 4 4 wire type SW2 Terminator ON OFF 1 no terminating resistor attached COMO3 A RS422 485 RDY COMA A ...

Page 786: ...ire Switch 4 4 wire type TERM Terminator ON OFF switch OFF no terminating resistor OFF SCB41 V1 2 ON TERM 4 WIRE PORT2 RS422 RS485 RDY COMM1 COMM2 TERM WIRE Switch No Setting Description 1 ON Enable Terminating resistance selection 2 OFF 4 wire type 2 wire or 4 wire selection 3 OFF 4 wire type 2 wire or 4 wire selection 5 ON RS control enabled RS control selection for RD 6 ON RS control enabled RS...

Page 787: ... switching hub manufacturer Ethernet OMRON Gateway Communication driver Ethernet module CS1H CS1G CS1D CJ1H CJ1M CJ1G CJ2H CJ2M GOT Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Maximum segment length 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Ethernet module 3 Cable model 1 CS1H CS1G CS1D CS1W ETN21 10BASE T Shielded ...

Page 788: ...rporation 4 If it is connected to devices other than the GOT using the connection the number of connectable GOTs decreases For details refer to the OMRON PLC user s manual 5 There is no restriction for the number of GOTs However if the number of GOTs increases the communication becomes high loaded and it may affect the communication performance ...

Page 789: ...ommunication Port No setting as that of FINS UDP Port of CX Programmer 3 Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers 33 3 2 Ethernet setting 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 127 GOT PLC No 3 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 254 GOT IP ...

Page 790: ...OMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk N W No Set the network No of the connected Ethernet module Default blank 1 to 127 PLC No 1 Set the station No of the connected Et...

Page 791: ... For the setting set in the module setting of CX Programmer Ver 5 0 or later or in the WEB function For details of Node IP Address dynamically change refer to the following manual OMRON PLC user s Manual 3 Set the same lowermost bit of the IP address setting as that of the node setting switch of the module 4 Set the same GOT Port No Communication In Communication detail settings as that of Port No...

Page 792: ...ller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub More ...

Page 793: ... FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 32 CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 33 CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 34 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 35 CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 34 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 34 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Communication Type Refer to THERMAC NEO E5AN E5EN E5CN E5GN RS 232 34 2 1 INPANEL NEO E5ZN RS ...

Page 794: ...l Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number E5AN E5EN RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT Interface converter Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 E5AN E5EN E5CN E5GN E5AN E5EN E5CN E5GN Connector conversion box External cable GOT Communication driver OMRON T...

Page 795: ... Corporation 2 The distance from the GOT to the interface converter Connection cable 2 External cable Interface converter Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT E5ZN E5ZN Communication driver OMRON THERMAC INPANEL NEO Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total ...

Page 796: ...version box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 OMRON temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the OMRON temperature controller For details refer to the user s manual of the OMRON temperature controller CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS NC FG SG SD RD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 1...

Page 797: ...onverter which will be terminating resistors Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 500m or less 2 OMRON temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the OMRON temperature controller For details refer to the user s manual of the OMRON temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 OMRON temperature controller s...

Page 798: ...N temperature controller 3 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 4 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer...

Page 799: ...values of the temperature controller from the GOT turn ON CMWT Communications writing in advance 34 5 3 Connection to interface converter K3SC 10 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the DIP switch of the temperature controller 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Set to Without Settings by DIP switch 1 Transmission speed settings Model name Refer to Temperature...

Page 800: ...pecification will be the station No of the temperature controller 3 All station specification Target station differs depending on write in operation or read out operation For write in operation all station will be a target For read out operation only one station will be a target Setting item Set value Switch No 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Data bit 7bits OFF 8bits ON Stop bit 2bits OFF 1bit ON Parity Even OFF OF...

Page 801: ...s GOT1000Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 34 7 Precautions Station number setting of the temperature controller system Make sure to establish temperature controller system with No 1 station GOT clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or Broadcast by GOT clock control will be disabled Disconnecting ...

Page 802: ...34 10 34 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 34 7 Precautions ...

Page 803: ...NECTION TO OMRON PLC 34 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 35 CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 35 CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 35 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to KV 5500 KV 5000 RS 232 35 2 1 RS 422 RS 485 Ethernet 35 3 1 KV 3000 RS 232 35 2 2 RS 422 RS 485 Ethernet 35 3 1 KV 1000 RS 232 35 2 3 RS 422 RS 485 Ether...

Page 804: ...ce Number of connectable equipment Model name Multi communication unit 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number KV 5500 KV 5000 KV L20V port 1 RS 232 GT09 C30R21102 9S 3m or RS232 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 multi communication unit KV L20V port 2 RS 232 GT09 C30R21103 3T 3m or RS232 connection diagram 3 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m RS ...

Page 805: ...uipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number Conversion connector 1 KV 3000 RS 232 GT09 C30R21101 6P or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC OP 26487 1 OP 26486 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m Multi communication unit KV 3000 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversio...

Page 806: ...gram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC OP 26487 1 OP 26486 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m Multi communication unit KV 1000 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Multi communication unit 1 Communication Type Cable model Connecti...

Page 807: ...name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number Conversion connector 1 KV 700 RS 232 GT09 C30R21101 6P or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC OP 26487 1 OP 26486 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42 3m 6m Multi communication unit KV 700 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External ca...

Page 808: ...side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box c KEYENCE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the KEYENCE PLC side module For details refer to the KEYENCE PLC user s manual KEYENCE PLC side Modular 6 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 5 3 2 4 6 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 5V SD RD 5V SG SG Connector conversion box side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 3 2 6 5 4 8 7 ...

Page 809: ...OT main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 4 2 Back Panel RS 485 cable 1 Connection diagram RS485 connection diagram 1 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The maximum distance between GOT and controllers of RS 485 cable must be 13m or less b Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector ...

Page 810: ...ings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected eq...

Page 811: ...sistent with that of the GOT side 3 Set the station No according to the host address on the GOT side 2 Setting DIP switches Set the DIP switches a When using KV L20R or KV L20 RS232 RS422 RS485 switch For port 2 For KV L20R For KV L20 Model name Reference PLC CPU KV 3000 35 9 KV 1000 35 9 KV 700 35 9 Multi communication unit KV L20R 35 9 KV L20 KV L20V Setting items Set value Transmission Speed 96...

Page 812: ...tor setting switch Set when carrying out RS 422 communication Settings When multi communication unit is a terminal When multi communication unit is not a terminal ON OFF Settings When multi communication unit is a terminal When multi communication unit is not a terminal ON OFF ON OFF Terminator setting switch Port 1 RS232 Port 2 RS232 RS422 RS485 ON OFF ...

Page 813: ...he number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Product manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION For details of the product contact KEYENCE CORPORATION Connection cable Ethernet module CPU GOT Connector conversion box External cable Ethernet KEYENCE Gateway Communication driver PLC Connection cable 1 Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Maximum segment length N...

Page 814: ...ange GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 1 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 254 GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 0 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 ...

Page 815: ...gs When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 35 3 3 PLC side setting POINT POINT POINT KEYENCE PLC For details of KEYENCE PLC refer to the following manual KEYENCE PLC user s Manual KV LE21V KV LE21V setting Set the IP address and port No by the unit editor of KV STUDIO 1 Adjust the settings with the Ethernet settings of the GOT side Ethernet setting Ite...

Page 816: ... 35 4 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controller that can be used on GT16 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 ...

Page 817: ... shows the connectable models 1 The GOT can only read the clock data In the clock setting though the adjust is available the broadcast is not available Series Model name Clock 1 Communication Type Refer to KOSTAC SU Series SU 5E RS 232 RS 422 36 2 1 SU 6B SU 5M RS 232 RS 422 SU 6M DirectLOGIC 05 Series D0 05AA RS 232 RS 422 36 2 2 D0 05AD D0 05AR D0 05DA D0 05DD D0 05DD D D0 05DR D0 05DR D DirectL...

Page 818: ...al communication port RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT SU 5M 6M general communication port 1 SU 5E 6B general communication port RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m SU 5M 6M general communication port 1 SU 5M 6M general communication port 2 RS 232 Z20P Programmable connecting cab...

Page 819: ... 01CV per 30 links For details refer to the following manual KOYO EI PLC user s Manual Connection cable Data Communications Module SU 5E 6B SU 5M 6B Data Communications Module Connector conversion box External cable GOT SU 5E 6B SU 5M 6B KOYO KOSTAC DL Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model na...

Page 820: ...i on port 1 communicati on port 2 RS 232 Z20P Programmable connecting cable S 9CNS1 Conversion connector 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT Direct LOGIC 06 communicati on port 1 Direct LOGIC 06 communicati on port 2 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10...

Page 821: ...nks exceeds 30 use a transmission line conversion unit D 01CV per 30 links For details refer to the following manual KOYO EI PLC user s Manual Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable D0 DCM DirectLOGIC 05 DirectLOGIC 06 DirectLOGIC 05 DirectLOGIC 06 D0 DCM GOT KOYO KOSTAC DL Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance ...

Page 822: ...ction diagram number D2 240 D2 250 1 D2 260 communicati on port 2 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT D2 250 1 D2 260 communicati on port 2 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m D2 240 D2 250 1 D2 260 D2 DCM RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 data co...

Page 823: ...ommunication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number PZ general communication port 2 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P...

Page 824: ...nection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 Connect a terminating resistor approximately 150 to the PLC at a terminal station RS422 connection diagram 2 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 Connect a terminating resistor approximately 150 to the PLC at a terminal station CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DT...

Page 825: ...e shield line 2 Connect a terminating resistor approximately 150 to the PLC at a terminal station When the number of links exceeds 30 use a transmission line conversion unit D 01CV per 30 links For details refer to the following manual KOYO EI PLC user s Manual RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 14 15 17 16 1 to 6 8 9 18 to 21 7 10 11 12 13 22 23 24 25 TXD TXD RXD RXD RTS RTS ...

Page 826: ...station When the number of links exceeds 30 use a transmission line conversion unit D 01CV per 30 links For details refer to the following manual KOYO EI PLC user s Manual TXD3 TXD3 RXD3 RXD3 SG TXD3 TXD3 RXD3 RXD3 SG RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 12 13 24 25 1 to 6 8 to 11 14 to 23 7 12 13 24 25 1 to 6 8 to 11 14 to 23 7 2 1 1 KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side Connector ...

Page 827: ... must be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 KOYO EI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the KOYO EI PLC side For details refer to the KOYO EI PLC user s manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a KOYO EI PLC to the GOT a terminating res...

Page 828: ...on setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed u...

Page 829: ...ion settings Make the following settings using the programmer system parameter setting Setting DIP switches Set the transmission speed using the CPU DIP switch 1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side Set the same transmission speed of the GOT Model name Refer to KOSTAC SU Series SU 5E 6B 36 5 1 SU 5M 6M 36 5 2 DirectLOGIC 05 Series DirectLOGIC 06 Series 36 5 3 Dire...

Page 830: ...settings using the programmer system parameter setting 1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side Set the same transmission speed of the GOT Item Set value Protocol CCM Response delay time 0ms Timeout Time 800ms 960ms 1200ms 1600ms 4000ms 8000ms 16000ms 40000ms Station No 1 to 90 Transmission mode HEX Stop bit 1bit 2bits Data bit 8bits Fixed Parity NONE ODD EVEN Trans...

Page 831: ...can be set on the GOT side Set the same transmission speed of the GOT 3 Communication and the DIP switch for a setup of a protocol SW5 Switch No Settings Setting details SW2 Code higher rank 101 figures 01 to 5A SW3 Code low rank 100 figures Setting item Set value Switch No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transmission speed 1 9600bps OFF ON ON 19200bps ON ON ON 38400bps OFF OFF OFF Parity ODD ON NONE OFF Self dia...

Page 832: ...d when setting device Item Set value Transmission mode HEX Protocol DirectNet Station No 1 to 90 Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Parity NONE ODD EVEN Only communication port 2 RTS On Delay Time Only communication port 2 0ms RTS Off Delay Time Only communication port 2 0ms Timeout Only communication port 2 800ms 960ms 1200ms 1600ms 4000ms 8000ms 16000ms 40000ms 485...

Page 833: ...CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 41 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 42 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 43 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 36 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT16 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for...

Page 834: ...36 18 36 CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 36 6 Device Range that Can Be Set ...

Page 835: ...CTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 37 CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 37 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models 1 Use PC3J of the version 2 1 or later Model name Model type Clock Communication Type Refer to PC3JG P TIC 6088 RS 232 RS 422 37 2 1 PC3JG TIC 6125 PC3JD TIC 5642 PC3JD C TIC 6029 PC3J 1 TIC 5339 RS 232 RS 422 37 2 2 PC3JL TIC 5783 PC2J THC 2764 RS 232 RS 422 3...

Page 836: ...me Link unit 1 Communication Type Cable model Connectiondiagram number Cable model Connection diagram number PC3JG PC3JG P PC3JD PC3JD C PC CMP2 LINK RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 GT09 C30R41201 6C 3m GT09 C100R41201 6C 10m or RS422 connection diagram 7 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 32 PLCs for 1 GOT JTEKT TOYOPUC PC Communication driver Link unit 2 P O...

Page 837: ...nector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Link unit 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number PC3J PC3JL RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 6 GT09 C30R41201 6C 3m GT09 C100R41201 6C 10m or RS422 connection diagram 7 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m ...

Page 838: ...el name Link unit 1 Communication Type Cable model Connectiondiagram number Cable model Connection diagram number PC2J PC2JS PC2JR PC CMP2 LINK RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 GT09 C30R41201 6C 3m GT09 C100R41201 6C 10m or RS422 connection diagram 7 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 32 PLCs for 1 GOT JTEKT TOYOPUC PC Communication driver Link unit Link unit I...

Page 839: ... PLC Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Link unit 1 Commu nication Type Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number PC2JC PC2J16P PC2J16PR PC CMP2 LINK RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 4 RS422 connection diagram 7 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 4...

Page 840: ...ors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS 232 RS 422 interface converter which will be terminals 2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line For PC2JC PC2J16P PC2J16PR 1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS 232 RS 422 interface converter which will be terminals 2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line RS422 con...

Page 841: ...Disable 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length a The length of the RS 422 cable used for connecting the connected equipment to the communication converter The length of the RS 422 cable must be 500m or less b The length of the RS 422 cable used for connecting the connected equipment to the GOT The total distance betwe...

Page 842: ...ta For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 19...

Page 843: ...TEKT PLC user s manual 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Settings by switch Make the communication settings using each setting switch 1 Setting of the station No Set the station No between 00 and 37 Octal 2 Transmission speed settings 3 Settings of data length and stop bit length Model name Refer to PLC CPU PC3JG PC3JG P PC3JD PC3JD C PC3J PC3JL PC2J PC2JS PC2JR 37 5 1 PC2JC 37 5 2 PC2J16P P...

Page 844: ...tion No 1 0 to 37 Octal Selection of module type Computer link Switch name Station NO setting SW2 Upper digit SW3 Lower digit Switch name Switch position Transmission speed bps SW4 1 19200 2 9600 Switch name Setting item Set value Switch No 4 3 2 SW5 Data bit 8bits OFF 7bits ON Stop bit length 2bits OFF 1bit ON Module type Computer link OFF Data length stop bit length and module type setting switc...

Page 845: ...ire type 2 2 wire type or 4 wire type Transmission speed setting switch Model PC CMP LINK Station number switch Data length stop bit length and module type setting switches P C C M P L I N K T X D R X D ERR CODE SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 4 SW4 3 SW4 2 SW4 1 A 6 D B C 4 8 F 1 0 E 2 9 7 3 5 A 6 D B C 4 8 F 1 0 E 2 9 7 3 5 A 6 D B C 4 8 F 1 0 E 2 9 7 3 5 LT 0V FG Transmission speed setting switch Model PC CMP2...

Page 846: ...settings GOT clock control The GOT clock function is available only for the PLC with the station number set with the host address For details of host address setting refer to the following 37 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings System configuration If the system is configured by mixing the PC3J extended function compliant PLC with the PC3J extended function incompliant PLC n...

Page 847: ...CHINE PLC 43 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 38 CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 38 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models 1 When the link unit ZW 10CM is used in JW 70CUH 100CUH the clock function is not available Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to JW 21CU RS 422 38 2 1 JW 22CU RS 232 RS 422 JW 31CUH RS 422 38 2 2 JW 32CUH RS 232 RS 422 JW 33CUH JW 50CU...

Page 848: ...ternal cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Link unit 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number JW 22CU RS 232 GT09 C30R20601 15P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS 422 GT09 C30R40601 15P 3m GT09 C100R40601 15P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT...

Page 849: ...ble Connector conversion box External cable GOT JW 31CUH JW 32CUH JW 33CUH SHARP JW Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Link unit 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number JW 32CUH JW 33CUH RS 232 GT09 C30R20602 15P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H ...

Page 850: ...PLC RS 422 GT09 C30R40601 15P 3m GT09 C100R40601 15P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m JW 50CUH JW 70CUH JW 100CUH JW 100CU JW 10CM ZW 10CM RS 422 GT09 C30R40603 6T 3m GT09 C100R40603 6T 10m or RS422 connection diagram 3 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m Z 512J Connection cable Connector con...

Page 851: ... diagram 2 Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 232 cable must be 6m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 SHARP PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the SHARP PLC side module For details refer to the SHA...

Page 852: ... switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 4 2 Back Panel 2 SHARP PLC side Connect the terminating resistor on the SHARP PLC side when connecting a GOT to a SHARP PLC The PLC CPUs and the modules on the PLC CPU side requiring a terminating resistor are shown below a JW 22CU Turn ON the terminating resistor setting switch SW1 on ...

Page 853: ...lay Time of the GOT side to 30ms or more POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings Whe...

Page 854: ...22CU only Set the terminating resistor setting switch 1 When using KV L20R or KV L20 Model name Refer to PLC CPU JW 22CU 38 5 1 JW 32CUH JW 33CUH 38 5 2 JW 70CUH JW 100CUH JW 100CU 38 5 1 Z 512J 38 5 2 Link unit JW 21CM 38 5 3 JW 10CM ZW 10CM 38 5 4 System memory No Item Set value 236 Transmission speed parity and stop bit 237 Station No 1 Station No 1 fixed Settings For RS 232 communication For R...

Page 855: ...inator switch SW7 3 Station number setting switch SW1 SW2 System memory No Item Set value 234 Transmission speed parity and stop bit 235 Station No 1 Station No 1 fixed System memory No Item Set value 236 Transmission speed parity and stop bit 237 Station No 1 Station No 1 fixed 1 2 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D0 0 0 3 2 1 1 2 3 Transmission speed 000 19200bps 001 9600bps 010 4800bps Parity 10 fixed Even 1 ...

Page 856: ... Setting details 0 19200bps 1 9600bps 2 4800bps 1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side Settings Setting details 4 fixed Computer link SW3 1 2 3 4 ON OFF SW4 C B A 9 8 7 6 5 F E D 4 3 2 1 0 SW0 C B A 9 8 7 6 5 F E D 4 3 2 1 0 Settings Setting details 4 fixed Computer link command mode Switch No Settings Setting details SW1 Station No lower digit 100 digit 1 fixed S...

Page 857: ...ONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 41 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 42 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 43 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 38 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT16 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for ...

Page 858: ...38 12 38 CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 38 6 Device Range that Can Be Set ...

Page 859: ...s JCS 33A C5 2 RS 232 39 2 1 JCR 33A C5 2 JCD 33A C5 2 JCM 33A Series JCM 33A C5 2 RS 232 39 2 1 JIR 301 M Series JIR 301 M C5 2 RS 232 39 2 1 PCD 300 Series PCD 33A M C5 2 RS 232 39 2 1 PC 900 Series PC935 M C5 2 RS 232 39 2 1 PC955 M C5 2 PC935 M C 1 RS 232 39 2 2 PC955 M C 1 FCD 100 Series 1 FCD 13A M C RS 232 39 2 2 FCD 15A M C FCR 100 Series 1 FCR 13A M C RS 232 39 2 2 FCR 15A M C FCR 23A Ser...

Page 860: ...35 M C5 Indicating controller Connection cable 1 Communi cation converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Communi cation Type Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Cable model Connection diagram number ACS13A JC JCM 33A JIR 301 M PCD 300 Series PC 955 M C5 PC 935 M C5 RS 232 RS485 connec...

Page 861: ...td 2 The distance from the GOT to the interface converter Connection cable 2 External cable Shinko Technos Controller Communication driver Connector conversion box External cable Interface converter Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT DCL 33A series DCL 33A series Indicating controller Connection cable 1 Communic ation converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GO...

Page 862: ...l distance between GOT and controllers of RS 232 cable must be 6m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 Shinko Technos indicating controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the Shinko Technos indicating controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the Shin...

Page 863: ...en preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 1200m or less 2 Shinko Technos indicating controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the Shinko Technos indicating controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 Shinko Technos indicating controller side A terminating res...

Page 864: ...lity s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the tr...

Page 865: ...ead out of data cannot be performed 39 5 2 Connecting to FCD 100 FCR 100 FCR 23A FIR Series PC 900 Series PC 955 M C PC 935 M C Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the indicating controller 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 When setting the 95 to the station No the read out of data cannot be performed 39 5 3 Connecting to communication converter I...

Page 866: ...ion specification Target station differs depending on write in operation or read out operation For write in operation all station will be a target In the WORD BIT write in operation only the indicating controller whose station No is the same as host address is applicable For details of host address setting refer to the following 39 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings In the ...

Page 867: ...on the indicating controller with the station number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 39 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings GOT clock control Since the indicating controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled When using the...

Page 868: ...39 10 39 CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 39 7 Precautions ...

Page 869: ...on Type Refer to LT230 Series LT230 RS 232 40 2 1 LT300 Series LT350 RS 232 RS 422 40 2 1 LT370 LT400 Series LT450 RS 232 RS 422 40 2 1 LT470 LT830 Series LT830 RS 232 40 2 1 DZ1000 Series DZ1000 RS 232 RS 422 40 2 1 DZ2000 Series DZ2000 RS 232 RS 422 40 2 1 DB1000 Series DB1000 RS 232 RS 422 40 2 1 DB2000 Series DB2000 RS 232 RS 422 40 2 1 KP Serise KP1000 RS 232 RS 422 40 2 2 KP2000 40 2 2 AL300...

Page 870: ...B2000 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 controller for 1 GOT RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 31 controllers for 1 GOT Interface converter Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT LT230 LT830 LT300 LT400 DZ1000 DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000 LT230 LT830 LT300 L...

Page 871: ... of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number KP1000 KP2000 AL3000 AH3000 SE3000 KE3000 LE5100 LE5200 LE5300 JU RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 controller for 1 GOT RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 31 controllers for 1 GOT Interface converter...

Page 872: ...ion cable 1 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Indicating controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Max distance Converter 1 Connection cable 3 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number Model name Commu nication Type Cable model Connection ...

Page 873: ...4 For the symbol B two terminal numbers are available Select as necessary Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 232 cable must be 6m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 CHINO controller side connector Use the connector ...

Page 874: ... differs according to the model This indicates the symbols of the position 10 third zone of the following models Model KP2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 Signal name Controller type LT300 LT400 DZ1000 DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000 KP1000 KP2000 5 JU A C F Terminal No Terminal No Terminal No Terminal No Terminal No Terminal No Terminal No Terminal No Terminal No SDA 11 11 19 14 28 14 28 31 1 SDB 12 12 20 15 29 15 ...

Page 875: ...4 When connecting to DB1000 or DB200 Series connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT 5 For KP2000 series the terminal No differs according to the model This indicates the symbols of the position 10 third zone of the following models Model KP2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 Signal name Controller type LT300 LT400 DZ1000 DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000 KP1000 KP2000 5 JU A C F Terminal No Terminal No Terminal N...

Page 876: ...or the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 CHINO controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the CHINO controller side module For details refer to the user s manual of the CHINO controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a CHINO controller to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the...

Page 877: ...al numbers are available Select as necessary RS485 connection diagram 2 1 Pin No of controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal 3 Set the Communication Type switch of the converter to RS 485 Controller 1 Controller 1 Term RDA RDB SDA SDB 4 5 6 7 8 SA SB SA SB SG 3 SG 3 Terminating resisto...

Page 878: ...hen preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 1200m or less 2 CHINO controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the CHINO controller side module For details refer to the user s manual of the CHINO controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 CHINO controller side The terminating resistor must be connected to the CHINO temperature controller User s Man...

Page 879: ...mmunication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 4 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest s...

Page 880: ...ey Lock setting To write the Digital and the Analog parameters set the Key Lock setting to Lock 2 Communication settings Set the communication settings with controller key operation 1 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units 2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Model name Refer to Controller LT230 LT300 40 5 1 LT400 LT830 40 5 2 DZ1000 DZ2000 40 5 3 DB1000 DB2000 40 5 4 G...

Page 881: ... of the other units 2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 40 5 7 Connecting to AL3000 AH3000 Key Lock setting To write the Digital and the Analog parameters set the Key Lock setting Communication settings Set the communication settings with controller key operation 1 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units 2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Item Set value Protocol MO...

Page 882: ...with any of the other units 2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Item Set value Protocol MODBUS RTU Station No 1 3 1 to 31 Transmission speed 2 3 9600bps 19200bps Data length 8bit fixed Parity bit 2 Even Odd Non Stop bit 2 1bit 2bit Transmission code Binary fixed Error check CRC 16 fixed SW1 1 SW1 2 SW1 3 SW1 4 SW1 5 Station No OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 2 ON ...

Page 883: ... the station No with any of the other units 40 5 11 Connecting to LE5100 LE5200 LE5300 Key Lock setting To write the Digital and the Analog parameters set the Key Lock setting Communication settings Set the communication settings with controller key operation 1 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units 2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Item Set value SW2 2 SW2 3 Transmi...

Page 884: ...with GOT and controller settings Settings by switch 1 Transmission speed setting 2 Communication type setting Item Set value Transmission speed select switch 1 9600bps 19200bps Communication type switch RS 485 RS 422 Setting item Set value Switch No 1 2 3 4 Transmission speed 9600bps OFF ON OFF OFF 19200bps OFF OFF ON OFF Setting item RS 485 RS 422 Transmission speed select switch Communication ty...

Page 885: ...l be the station No of the controller 3 All station specification Target station differs depending on write in operation or read out operation For write in operation all station will be a target For read out operation only one station will be a target All station specification is not available for KE3000 Do not use the all station specification for systemswhich include KE3000 Model name Specificat...

Page 886: ...the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 40 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings GOT clock control Since the controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment The GOT can disconnect some of multi...

Page 887: ...TION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 43 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 41 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 41 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to PROSEC T Series T2 PU224 RS 422 41 2 1 T3 T3H T2E RS 232 RS 422 T2N RS 232 RS 422 PROSEC V Series model 2000 S2 RS 422 41 2 2 model 2000 S2T model 2000 S2E model 3000 S3 R...

Page 888: ...0R40502 6C 10m or RS422 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m T2N RS 232 GT09 C30R20502 15P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m RS 422 GT09 C30R40503 15P 3m GT09 C100R40503 15P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 3 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m TOSHIBA PROSEC T V Communication ...

Page 889: ...ox c TOSHIBA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the TOSHIBA PLC For details refer to the TOSHIBA PLC user s manual RS 422 cable 1 Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1 RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connection diagram 3 TOSHIBA PLC side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 SG TXD RXD SG 5V RTS 5V Connector conversion box si...

Page 890: ... 3 Connecting terminating resistors a GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For details of terminating resistor settings refer to the following 4 2 Back Panel b TOSHIBA PLC side When connecting an TOSHIBA PLC to a GOT a terminating resistor must be set to the TOSHIBA ...

Page 891: ...s Make the settings according to the usage environment POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communicatio...

Page 892: ...T side 2 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side Connecting to model 2000 S2 S2T S2E model 3000 S3 Enter the transmission parameters 1 Can be used as RS 422 2 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side 3 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side Switch No Settings Setting details 4 OFF fixed Computer ...

Page 893: ...s for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Product manufactured by TOSHIBA Corporation For details of the product contact TOSHIBA Corporation 4 There is no restriction for the number of GOTs However if the number of GOTs increase...

Page 894: ...em Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 2 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 254 GOT IP address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0...

Page 895: ...address 1 to 254 that has been assigned upon system configuration in a HEX code Assign an address with a different value to each of the nodes in the system 2 Operation mode setting switch 1 XX indicates the value of the station address setting switches Subnet mask 255 255 192 0 2 XX indicates the value of the station address setting switches Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 3 It can be set freely from th...

Page 896: ...is also delayed Reduntant system When configuring a redundant system the Multicast address setting for the configured PLC pair System A Primary System B Secondary is required 41 4 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT16 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000Series Connection M...

Page 897: ...232 42 2 1 TC3 02 TC6 00 TC8 00 Robot controller TS2000 RS 232 42 2 2 TS2100 TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini Communication driver GOT TC3 TC6 TC8 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number TC3 TC6 TC8 RS 232 R...

Page 898: ...onnector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC side module For details refer to the TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC user s manual 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS CI TXD RXD DSR S...

Page 899: ...ironment POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Design...

Page 900: ... speed is changeable Set the following Special AUX Relay A using engineering tool The communication may not work properly if the settings are made using the GOT 1 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side 42 5 3 Connecting to TS2000 TS2100 No communication settings Communication is available using the default value of the robot controller Model name Refer to PLC C...

Page 901: ... 40 CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 41 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 42 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 43 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 42 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT16 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1...

Page 902: ...42 6 42 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 42 6 Device Range that Can Be Set ...

Page 903: ... Connection cable 2 External cable Series Clock Communication Type Refer to MINAS A4 RS 232 RS 485 43 2 1 MINAS A4F MINAS A4L MINAS A5 Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 MINAS GOT MINAS Connector conversion box External cable PANASONIC MINAS Communication driver Servo amplifier Connection cable 1 Servo amplifier Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance...

Page 904: ...rvo amplifier 43 3 2 RS 485 cable Connection diagram RS485 connection diagram 1 Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 1m or less 2 PANASONIC servo amplifier side connector Use the connector compatible with the PANASONIC servo amplifier For details refer to the user s manual of the PANASONIC servo amplifier Connector conversion box side 9 pin PANAS...

Page 905: ...tail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in ...

Page 906: ...ed to the GOT to 0 Set the station numbers axis numbers of other servo amplifiers connected to the GOT to other than 0 Example of RS 232 connection between GOT servo amplifier 1 Direct specification When setting the device specify the station number of the servo amplifier of which data is to be changed 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the se...

Page 907: ...reen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 43 7 Precautions Station number setting in the servo system Configure the servo system so that there is a servo amplifier with a station number set with a host address For details of host address setting refer to the following 43 4 2 Communication detail settings Monitor Speed When monitoring mu...

Page 908: ...43 6 43 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 43 7 Precautions ...

Page 909: ...R 44 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 44 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models 1 Any of the extension memory unit FP2 EM1 FP2 EM2 or FP2 EM3 is required 2 The clock function is available for the AFP3210C F AFP3211C F AFP3212C F and AFP3220C F Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to FP0 C16CT RS 232 44 2 1 FP0 C32CT FP0R FP1 C24C RS 232 44...

Page 910: ...ber FP0 C16CT FP0 C32CT FP0R Tool port RS 232 AFC8503 3m 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC FP0 C16CT FP0 C32CT FP0R RS232C port RS 232 GT09 C30R20904 3C 3m or RS232 connection diagram 4 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m Panasonic MEWNET FP Communication driver Connection cable FP1 C24C FP1 C40C FP peripheral device connection cable RS422 232C conversion adapter Connector conversi...

Page 911: ...Communication driver Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable FP2 FP2SH PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number FP2 FP2SH Tool port RS 232 AFC8503 3m 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC FP2 FP2SH RS232C port RS 232 AFC...

Page 912: ... box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number FP3 FP5 RS 232 AFP5520 0 5m AFP8550 GT09 C30R20901 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 RS422 232 conversion adapter Panasonic MEWNET FP Communication driver Connector con...

Page 913: ...tion cable FP10 S FP peripheral device connection cable RS422 232C conversion adapter Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC FPperipheral device connection cable 1 RS422 232 conversion adapter 1 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Co...

Page 914: ...ction cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number FP10 S RS 232 AFP3462 AFC85853 3m 1 GT09 C30R20902 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 computer communication unit Panasonic MEWNET FP Communication driver Connection cable FP M...

Page 915: ...strial Devices SUNX Co Ltd Panasonic MEWNET FP Communication driver Connection cable FP10SH Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number FP10SH RS 232 AFC85853 3m 1 GT09 C30R20902 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 2...

Page 916: ... box External cable GOT FPΣ PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number FP RS 232 AFC8503 3m 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC Panasonic MEWNET FP Communication driver Connection cable COM port FPΣ Connector conversion box External cable GO...

Page 917: ...ble Connector conversion box External cable GOT FP X PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number FP X RS 232 AFC8503 3m 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC Panasonic MEWNET FP Communication driver Connection cable Communication cassette FP X ...

Page 918: ... 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 3 2 4 7 5 6 8 20 FG RD SD RS SG CS DR CD ER Connector conversion box side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 8 7 9 5 4 6 FG SD RD CD SG ER CS RS RI PLC side Connector conversion box side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 8 7 6 5 4 9 FG SD RD SG CS RS PLC side Connector conversion box side CD RD RXD SD TXD...

Page 919: ...trial Devices SUNX PLC user s manual 44 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1 Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 422 cable must be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 Connector for Panaso...

Page 920: ...lity The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click Item Des...

Page 921: ...set on the GOT side Set the same transmission speed of the GOT The setting range varies with the connected PLC Connecting to the communication cassette 1 Communication settings Set the communication settings for the COM 1 port and COM2 port to connect GOT 1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side Set the same transmission speed of the GOT 2 Set the COM2 port only 2 S...

Page 922: ...t Can Be Set 44 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT16 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 ...

Page 923: ... TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 45 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 45 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to Large sized H Series H 302 RS 232 RS 422 45 2 1 H 702 H 1002 H 2002 H 4010 H 300 H 700 H 2000 H 200 to 252 Series H 200 RS 232 45 2 2 H 250 H 252 H 252B H 252C H Series board type H 20DR RS 232 45 2 2 H 28DR H 40DR...

Page 924: ...dule 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number H 302 2 H 702 2 H 1002 2 H 2002 2 H 300 H 700 H 2000 RS 232 GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC H 4010 RS 232 Specified transmission speed 4800bps GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 Specified transmission speed 19200bps GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m or RS232 co...

Page 925: ... HITACHI HIDIC H HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol2 Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number H 200 1 H 250 1 H 252 1 H 252B 1 H 20DR H 28DR H 40DR H 64DR H 20DT H 28DT H 40DT H 64DT HL 40DR HL 64DR RS 232 GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m or RS232 connect...

Page 926: ... connector compatible with the HITACHI IES PLC side module For details refer to the HITACHI IES PLC user s manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 4 2 Back...

Page 927: ...settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 17 1 2 I F communication setting 45 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 HITACHI HIDIC H 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected ...

Page 928: ...cted equipment Default 19200bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment Default 7bits 7bit fixed Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications Default 1bit 1bit fixed Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check and how it is performed during communication Default Even Even fixed R...

Page 929: ...ng range varies with the connected PLC Connecting to the intelligent serial port module 1 For transmission control procedure1 2 For transmission control procedure2 Item Set value Transmission speed 1 2 3 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Station No 0 Data bit 7bit Stop bit 1bit Parity bit Even Control Method DTR control Communication format RS 232 Sum check Done Protocol transmission control proce...

Page 930: ...t 45 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT16 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 for GT Works3 ...

Page 931: ...ONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 49 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 50 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 51 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 46 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 46 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to S10V LQP510 RS 232 RS 422 46 2 1 LQP520 S10mini LQP800 RS 232 RS 422 46 2 2 LQP000 LQP010 LQP...

Page 932: ...le LQE565 RS 422 GT09 C30R41301 9S 3m GT09 C100R41301 9S 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m LQP510 RS 422 GT09 C30R41301 9S 3m GT09 C100R41301 9S 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 PLC GOT Communication module S10mini Connection cable Connector con...

Page 933: ...ble length The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 422 cable must be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 HITACHI PLC side connector Use the connector supporting the HITACHI PLC side module For details refer to the HITACHI PLC user s manual Connecting terminating resi...

Page 934: ...ication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range ...

Page 935: ...nication settings Make the communication settings of the Communication module 1 The ranges of available channel No differ depending on the model of communication module 2 Avoid duplication of the channel No Settings by switch Make the communication settings using each setting switch 1 Settings of the channel No and the protocol Model name Refer to Communication module LQE560 46 5 1 LQE060 LQE160 L...

Page 936: ...46 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT16 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 for GT Works3 ...

Page 937: ...ASKAWA PLC 50 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 51 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 47 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 47 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to MICREX F F55 RS 232 RS 485 47 2 1 F70 RS 232 RS 485 47 2 2 F120S RS 232 RS 485 47 2 3 F140S F15 S MICREX SX SPH SPH200 RS 232 RS 485 47 2 4 SPH300 SPH2000 ...

Page 938: ...F55 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable FUJI MICREX F Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name RS 232C interface card 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number F55 NV1L RS2 RS 232 GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C...

Page 939: ...nts Systems Co Ltd 2 The distance connection cable external cable from GOT to RS 232C 485 interface capsule RS 232C 485 interface capsule MICREX F55 T link RS 232C 485 interface capsule MICREX F55 T link Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name RS 2...

Page 940: ... MICREX F Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name General purpose interface module 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number F70 NC1L RS2 RS 232 GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 general purpose interface modu...

Page 941: ...erface capsule MICREX F70 T link Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name RS 232C 485 interface capsule 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number F70 FFK120A C10 RS 485 GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m or RS485 connection...

Page 942: ... F Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name General purpose interface module 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number F120S F140S F15 S FFU120B RS 232 GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GO for 1 general purpose interface...

Page 943: ...or conversion box External cable MICREX F 120S 140S 15 S MICREX F 120S 140S 15 S PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name RS 232C 485 interface capsule 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number F120S F140S F15 S FFK120A C10 RS 485 GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m or RS485 connectio...

Page 944: ... Number of connectable equipment Model name General purpose interface module 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number MICREX SX SPH RS 232 NP4H CB2 2m 1 NW0H CNV 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 5m 1 GOT for 1 General purpose communication module NP1L RS1 NP1L RS2 NP1L RS3 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 6m 1 GO...

Page 945: ...th The maximum distance between GOT and controllers of RS 232 cable must be 6m or less b Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box c FUJI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI PLC side module For details refer to the user s FUJI PLC manual RS232 connection diagram 1 RS232 conne...

Page 946: ...rn ON the terminating switch of a interface converter which will be a terminal 2 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Enable 3 Make sure to pull the cable shield line into inside the connector cover and treat the line end for obtaining shield effect PLC side 1 Connector conversion box side 2 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RSA CSA RSB CSB SDA SDB RDA RDB SG FG SDA SDB RDA RDB SG ...

Page 947: ...ngth The maximum distance between GOT and controllers of RS 485 cable must be 13m or less b Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box c FUJI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI PLC side module For details refer to the user s FUJI PLC manual 2 Connecting terminating resistors ...

Page 948: ... Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment For FUJI MICREX F 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 9600bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the...

Page 949: ... switch Item Description Range Transmission Speed 1 Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 38400bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Data Bit 1 Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment Default 8bits 7bits 8bits Stop Bit 1 Set this item when change the data length u...

Page 950: ...ON OFF the terminating resistor using RS 485 terminating resistor ON OFF switch MODE Switch position NV1L RS2 NC1L RS2 Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format 1 1 Setting item Set value Switch No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transmission speed 9600bps ON OFF ON 19200bps OFF ON ON Stop bit 1bit ON 2bits OFF Data bit 7bits ON 8bits OFF Parity bit Even ON Odd OFF Done ON None OFF Initia...

Page 951: ...nsmission speed 9600bps ON OFF ON 19200bps OFF ON ON Stop bit 1bit ON 2bits OFF Data bit 7bits ON 8bits OFF Parity bit Even ON Odd OFF Done ON None OFF Initializing method By switch ON Item Set value MODE 4 Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format RS 232C 1 1 Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format RS 232C 1 1 and RS 485 1 N Command setting type...

Page 952: ...tation No using RS 485 station No switches Station No 0 to 99 Setting item Set value Switch No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 disable OFF OFF OFF Stop bit 1bit ON 2bits OFF Data bit 7bits ON 8bits OFF Parity bit Even ON Odd OFF Done ON None OFF Initializing method By switch ON Setting item Set value Switch No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transmission speed 9600bps OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 19200bps OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF O...

Page 953: ...the GOT operates as a loader 2 The switch is not used for connection with the GOT 3 Turn ON the terminating switch of the general communication module which will be a terminal Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive a D...

Page 954: ... Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd Ethernet FUJI Gateway Communication driver Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable Ethernet interface module MICREX SX SPH GOT PLC Connection cable 1 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Maximum segment length Number of connectable equipment Model name Ethernet interface module 3 Cable model SPH200 SPH300...

Page 955: ...k Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PC No 2 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 64 GOT IP Address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Ethernet Download Port No 1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Defau...

Page 956: ...P address and self port reference No POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual GT User s Manual 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 o...

Page 957: ...ide setting MICREX SX SPH POINT POINT POINT FUJI PLC For details of FUJI PLCs refer to the following manuals FUJI PLC user s Manual Setting the IP address and self port reference No Set the IP address and self port reference No using a peripheral tool of the PLC 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Ethernet setting 2 Make sure that Self port reference No 251 is equivalent to the port No in the ...

Page 958: ...m configuration the PLC with the station number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following Communication detail settings System configuration of the PLC side GOT can communicate in a system configuration where NC1L PS4 FFU120B and FFK120A C10 are mixed When using FFK120A C10 the number of PLCs that can communicate is at most 6 units GOT cl...

Page 959: ...tact System Sacom corp 4 The distance from the converter to the GOT Series Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to Micro Controller X PXR3 RS 232 48 2 1 PXR4 PXR5 PXR9 PXG4 RS 232 48 2 2 PXG5 PXG9 PXH9 Interface converter Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 PXR9 PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 PXR9 Connector conversion box External cable GOT FUJI PXR PXG PXH Communication driver Temperature c...

Page 960: ... Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 PXH9 RS 232 ZZPPXH1 TK4H4563 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT Interface converter Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 PXH9 PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 PXH9 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 ...

Page 961: ...7 Connector Conversion Box 3 FUJI temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the FUJI temperature controller RS232 connection diagram 1 1 Use the interface converter in the DCE mode RS232 connection diagram 2 1 Use the interface converter in the DCE mode CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS ...

Page 962: ...ing on the model Refer to the following table 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal Turn ON the terminating switch of an interface converter which will be a terminal 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Temperature controller side Interface converter RC 77 1 1 1 1 TXD TXD FG RXD RXD Temperature controller si...

Page 963: ...ct FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 500m or less 2 FUJI temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the FUJI temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 FUJI tempe...

Page 964: ...changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 5 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item ...

Page 965: ...ny of the other units 3 Set as necessary 2 RS 232 communication settings PC loader communication 48 5 3 Connecting to PXH9 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller 1 RS 485 communication settings 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units 2 RS 232 communication settings P...

Page 966: ...nating resistor selection OFF Setting item Set value Switch No 1 2 3 4 Transmission speed 9600bps ON ON OFF 19200bps OFF OFF ON 38400bps ON OFF ON MANUAL AUTO AUTO ON Terminating resistor selection switch RS 422 485 switch RS 485 communication setting switch DCE DTE switch DCE DTE RTS DTR RESET BIT RATE MANUAL AUTO MONITOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 422 485 TERMINATOR ON OFF POWER DATA OUT TXD TXD FG RXD RXD DAT...

Page 967: ... the communication settings by operating the DIP switch of the temperature controller 1 Make the same setting as that of GOT side Settings by DIP switch 1 Transmission speed settings Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps Terminating resistor selection 1 ON OFF Setting item Set value Switch No 1 2 3 4 2 5 6 2 7 8 Transmission speed 9600bps ON OFF ON ON Terminating resistor selection 1 Enable ON...

Page 968: ...fication When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the temperature controller of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 200 to 215 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the temperature controller Setting item Set value Swi...

Page 969: ...ature controller with the station number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 48 4 2 Communication detail settings FIX processing of temperature controller The temperature controller power must not be turned off during the FIX processing Otherwise data within the non volatile memory will corrupt and the temperature controller will be...

Page 970: ...48 12 48 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 48 7 Precautions ...

Page 971: ...WA PLC 51 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 49 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 49 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Model name Clock Communication Refer to GL120 RS 232 RS 422 49 2 1 GL130 GL60S RS 232 RS 422 49 2 2 GL60H GL70H MP920 RS 232 RS 422 49 2 3 MP930 CP 9300MS CP 9200 H PROGIC 8 MP940 RS 232 RS 422 49 2 4 CP 9200SH RS 232 49 2 5 CP 317 MP2200...

Page 972: ... GL120 GL130 RS 232 GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC JAMSC 120NOM27100 RS 422 GT09 C30R40201 9P 3m GT09 C100R40201 9P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 1 GOT for 1 MEMOBUS module GOT MEMOBUS Module Connector conversion box External cable Connection cable GL60S ...

Page 973: ... External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communica tion module 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number MP 920 MP 930 RS 232 GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC CP 9200 H PROGIC 8 connecting to port1 PROGIC 8 ...

Page 974: ...diagram 4 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS 422 GT09 C30R40202 14P 3m GT09 C100R40202 14P 10m or RS422 connection diagram 3 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS Communication driver GOT Communications Module CP 9200SH CP 317 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector co...

Page 975: ...transmission speed of the 218IF 02 is 115200 bps the maximum transmission speed selectable in the GOT is 57600 bps YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS Communication driver Communications Module MP2200 MP2300 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Commun...

Page 976: ...SR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 6 7 9 4 5 8 FG TXD RXD DSR GND DTR RTS CTS EST CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 6 7 9 4 5 8 FG TXD RXD DSR GND DTR RTS CTS NC Connector conversion box side YASKAWA PLC side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 7 6 5 8 9 FG TXD RXD RTS GND DSR OP CTS PWR DTR Connector conversion box ...

Page 977: ...rminating resistor refer to the following 4 2 Back Panel b YASKAWA PLC side When connecting a YASKAWA PLC to a GOT connect a terminating resistor to the YASKAWA PLC if required YASKAWA PLC user s Manual RS422 connection diagram 1 RS422 connection diagram 2 1 The terminating resistor 120 is valid by connecting pin 1 with pin 4 and pin 5 with pin 6 of the YASKAWA PLC side RS422 connection diagram 3 ...

Page 978: ...il settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 19200bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the con...

Page 979: ...N SETTING 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 49 2 9 PLC Side Settings POINT POINT POINT YASKAWA PLC For details of YASKAWA PLCs refer to the following manuals YASKAWA PLC user s Manual Communication and port settings Make the communication and port settings with a peripheral tool 1 Set the address according t...

Page 980: ... Dest Source Dest 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 32767 DW00008 DW00009 DW00010 DW00011 DW00012 DW00013 STORE STORE STORE STORE STORE STORE 0009 0009 NL 2 0008 0008 NL 2 0007 0007 NL 2 Source Dest Source Dest Source Dest 00000 00000 00000 DW00014 DW00024 DW00025 STORE STORE STORE Clears the system registers Clears the normal pass counter Clears the error counter Sets parameters in the first scan aft...

Page 981: ...arameter settings completed When the receive message command coil Execute turns on the executing coil Busy turns on The normal completion coil Complete or abnormal completion coil Error turns on at the completion of processing Receive message abort coil Communication device type Dev Typ 5 217IF Communication protocols Pro Typ 1 MEMOBUS Line number Cir No 1 For 217IF any of 1 to 16 set in 2 Transmi...

Page 982: ...For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation Communications Module MP920 MP2200 MP2300 CP 9200SH CP 312 CP 317 Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable Ethernet YASKAWA Gateway Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Maximum segment length 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication module 3 C...

Page 983: ...ach of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers 49 3 2 Ethernet setting 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 2 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 64 GOT IP address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255...

Page 984: ...ocal Station s Port Number on the GOT side For the Local IP Address and the Local Port Local Station s Port Number on the GOT side refer to the following 49 3 2 Ethernet setting Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk N W No Set the network No of the connected Ethernet module Default blank 1 to 239 PLC No 1 Set the station No of the connected Et...

Page 985: ... Time 0 Not required for communication with GOT Count of Retry Number of Retries 0 Message communication of connection parameter setting Connection Number 1 Range of built in MP2300S Ethernet 1 to 4 Range of 218IF 02 1 to 20 Local Port 10500 256 to 65534 Node IP Address 1 IP address of GOT Node Port 1 Port No of GOT Connection Type UDP recommended TCP UDP Protocol Type Extended MEMOBUS Extended ME...

Page 986: ...igh speed scan DWGH SB000001 STORE STORE STORE STORE STORE STORE END_FOR 0009 NL 2 Source 00000 Dest DW00012 Write range LO 3 2 2 2 1 2 0008 NL 2 Source 00000 Dest DW00011 Sets the holding register offset 0007 NL 2 Source 00000 Dest DW00010 Sets the input register offset 0006 NL 2 Source 00000 Dest DW00009 Sets the input relay offset 0005 NL 2 Source 00000 Dest DW00008 Sets the coil offset 0004 NL...

Page 987: ...ON at abnormal completion Source 00000 Dest DW00025 STORE Source 00000 Dest DW00024 STORE Source 00000 Dest DW00014 STORE Source 0000065534 Dest DW00013 Increments the normal pass counter Dest DW00024 0013 0013 NL 2 0014 0014 NL 1 0015 0015 NL 1 0016 0017 NL 1 0017 0018 NL 1 0018 0019 NL 2 0019 0020 NL 2 0020 0021 NL 1 0012 0012 NL 2 0011 0011 NL 2 0010 NL 2 DB000211 true MSG RCV Execute SB000004 ...

Page 988: ...rce DW00000 Dest DW00026 Dest DW00025 Stores the processing results Increments the abnormal pass counter 0021 0023 NL 2 0022 0024 NL 2 0023 0025 NL 2 0024 0026 NL 2 0025 0027 NL 2 0026 0028 NL 2 0027 0029 NL 2 0028 0030 NL 1 0029 0031 NL 1 0030 1 When connecting to multiple GOTs set connection numbers individually for each GOT 2 Set the offset for each device 3 Set the available write range for th...

Page 989: ...lowing manuals YASKAWA PLC user s Manual Parameter settings Make the parameter settings with a peripheral tool Settings for CP 218IF 1 Be sure to set the values above for the address so that the GOT communicates with the programmable controller correctly For the Host Address setting on the GOT side refer to the following 49 3 2 Ethernet setting Item Set value Module Type CP 218 CPU Number 01 Circu...

Page 990: ...Ts ladder programs to receive messages for each GOT are required ladder program to receive massages Continued to next page FSCAN L ONCOIL 1 0000 SB000003 SB000004 1 0002 IFON 2 0003 FOR I 00000 to 00031 by 00001 3 0007 00000 DW00000 001 044 2 0009 FEND DW 002 2 0010 00003 DW00002 002 DW 008 2 0012 00000 DW00008 003 DW 009 2 0014 DW00009 004 DW 010 2 0015 DW00010 005 DW 011 2 0016 16500 DW00011 006...

Page 991: ...e offset is needed set Option Offset to each object or make a setting added the offset value to the device 1 0023 MSG RCV RECEIVE MESSAGE function standard system functions ONCOIL EXECUTE BUSY DB 210 1 0024 SB000004 FIN FOUT DB000210 009 ONCOIL ABORT COMPLETE DB 211 1 0026 SB000004 FIN FOUT DB000211 010 039 DEV TYP ERROR DB 212 1 0028 00006 FIN FOUT DB000212 011 041 PRO TYP 1 0029 00001 FIN CIR NO...

Page 992: ...oller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub More...

Page 993: ...ER 50 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 50 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to FA M3 F3SP05 RS 232 RS 422 50 2 1 F3SP08 F3SP10 F3SP20 F3SP30 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP22 0S F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 FA M3V F3SP76 7S F3SP71 4S FA500 FA500 RS 232 RS 422 50 2 2 STARDOM NFCP100 RS 232 50 2 3...

Page 994: ...sion cable or the SIO port adapter cable GOT Conversion cable FA M3 M3V Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable Communication driver YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Conversion cable 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number F3SP05 F3SP08 F3...

Page 995: ... PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name PC link module 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number F3SP05 F3SP08 F3SP10 F3SP20 F3SP30 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N F3LC11 1F F3LC12 1F RS 232 GT09 C30R20302 9P 3m or RS232 connect...

Page 996: ...ies PC link module 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number FA500 LC01 0N LC02 0N RS 232 GT09 C30R20205 25P 3m or RS232 connection diagram 3 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PC link module LC02 0N RS 422 GT09 C30R40302 6T 3m GT09 C100R40302 6T 10m or RS422 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m GOT STARDOM Connecti...

Page 997: ...onnector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box c YOKOGAWA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA PLC side module For details refer to the YOKOGAWA PLC user s manual RS232 connection diagram 1 RS232 connection diagram 2 1 Connect the shield to the housing of the connectors on both the GOT and YOKOGAWA product sides RS232 connect...

Page 998: ... switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 4 2 Back Panel b YOKOGAWA PLC side When connecting a PLC link module to a GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the PC link module The following describes how to connect it on the PC link module F3LC11 2N Set the terminator switch TERMINATOR on the front panel of F3LC11 2N to ...

Page 999: ...ent POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 o...

Page 1000: ...mat Set the transmission speed and data format according to settings of the transmission speed data length parity and stop bit on the GOT side Item Transmission speed and data format Transmis sion speed Data bit Parity Stop bit Communicati on mode 0 9600 bps 8bits Even 1bit Communicati on mode 1 9600 bps 8bits None 1bit Communicati on mode 2 19200 bps 8bits Even 1bit Communicati on mode 3 19200 bp...

Page 1001: ...h Set the data length parity stop bit and checksum consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT side 3 Station No switch F3LC11 2N only 4 Terminator switch F3LC11 2N only 5 SW3 switch F3LC11 2F only Unused switch Turn off all the unused switches Setting 1 Transmission speed 4 4800bps 5 9600bps 6 19200bps TERMINATOR 2 SD A OFF 4 WIRE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SD B RD A SD B S...

Page 1002: ...op bit and checksum consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT side l 3 Module function switch SW3 Setting 1 Transmission speed 4 4800bps 5 9600bps 7 19200bps 9 38400bps A 57600bps C 115200bps A 1 Side view indicated by A 2 3 A F3LC11 1F F3LC12 1F 2 1 With right side cover removed Switch No Description Settings 1 Character length ON 8bits OFF 7bits 2 Parity ON done OFF none 3 ON even OF...

Page 1003: ...Set the same transmission speed of the GOT 1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown 2 Data format setting switch Set the data length parity stop bit and checksum consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT side l 3 Station No switch LC02 0N only Setting 1 Transmission speed 4 4800bps 5 9600bps 6 19200bps Switch No Description Settings 1 Data bit ON 8bits OFF 7bits 2...

Page 1004: ... Page 1 Adjust the settings with GOT communication settings 50 2 5 Communication detail settings 4 Select Reboot Online Mode on the Reboot screen of the FCX Maintenance Page to set the online mode Defining Logic POU Define Logic POU using Logic Designer peripheral software and download the project to STARDOM 1 Start Logic Designer and create a new project using a template Use STARDOM Serial Commun...

Page 1005: ...ings are made Double click Physical hardware Configuration IPC_33 FCX01 FCX Target Setting and input the IP address or the host name 7 Downloading the project 1 Execute Build Make Same as when pressing the function key F9 2 Download after confirming that the compile error does not occur Select Download in the project control dialog displayed when Online Project control is selected 3 When the downl...

Page 1006: ...en the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer PC link FA M3 module FA M3 M3V Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable Ethernet YOKOGAWA Gateway Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Maximum segment length 3 Number of connectable equipment Series Eth...

Page 1007: ...n the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers 50 3 2 Ethernet setting 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 2 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 64 GOT IP address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mas...

Page 1008: ...the following manuals YOKOGAWA PLC user s Manual 50 3 4 Connecting to Ethernet Interface Module F3LE01 5T F3LE11 0T Switch settings of Ethernet Interface Module Set the switches accordingly POINT POINT POINT Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface Module on the base unit Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk N W ...

Page 1009: ...ndition setting switch Set the data format write protection or operation mode with the DIP switch on the side of the base unit Switch No Description Set value 1 Data code OFF ASCII 2 Write protect OFF not protect 3 Reserved ON not available OFF always 4 5 6 7 Line processing on TCP timeout 1 OFF close the line 8 Operation mode OFF normal operation 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D EF 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B...

Page 1010: ... using multiple GOTs A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monit...

Page 1011: ...N TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 51 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 51 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to GREEN UT320 RS 232 RS 485 51 2 1 UT321 UT350 UT351 UT420 UT450 UT520 UT550 UT551 UT750 UP350 UP351 UP550 UP750 UM330 UM331 UM350 UM351 US1000 UT100 UT130 RS 232 51 2 2 UT150 UT152 UT155...

Page 1012: ...OKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Communication driver Temperature controller Connection cable 1 RS232C RS485 converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 4 Number of connectable equipment Model name Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number UT320 UT321 UT350 UT351 UT...

Page 1013: ... RS 485 communication interface GREEN Series GREEN Series Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable Temperature controller Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communic ation Type Cable model Connection diagram number UT320 UT321 UT350 UT351 UT420 UT450 UT520 UT550 UT551 UT750 1 UP350 UP351 U...

Page 1014: ...onnection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Communication driver Temperatur e controller Connection cable 1 RS232C RS485 converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model name Communication Type Cabl...

Page 1015: ...T2000 UTAdvanced Communication driver Temperatur e controller Connection cable 1 RS232C RS485 converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number UT2000 RS485 connection diagram 5 1200m ML2 RS 232...

Page 1016: ... Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Communication driver Temperature controller Connection cable 1 RS232C RS485 converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 5 Number of connectable equipment Model name Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model name Communication Type...

Page 1017: ...uffix code is 1 in type 2 without the optional suffix code LP UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable Temperature controller Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communic ation Type Cable model Connection diagram number UT32A UT35A UT55A UT75A UP35A UP55A...

Page 1018: ...de connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 YOKOGAWA temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the YOKOGAWA temperature controller RS232 connection diagram 1 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable ...

Page 1019: ... will be a terminal 3 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Enable 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 5 When the suffix code is 1 in type 3 except 1 or 6 in type 2 6 When the suffix code is 1 or 2 in type 2 without the optional suffix code LP 7 For standard when the suffix code is 1 in type 3 except 3 in type 2 for detail when the op...

Page 1020: ...ating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Turn on the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Temperature controller SDB SDA RDB RDA SG 4 3 5 6 SDB SDA RDB RDA SG B A SG GND Temperature controller RS23C RS485 interface converter 3 Terminating resistor 220Ω 1 4W ...

Page 1021: ...ss b The length of the RS 485 cable used for connecting the temperature controller to the GOT The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 485 cable must be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 YOKOGAWA temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible wit...

Page 1022: ... the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 9600bps 4800bps 960...

Page 1023: ... switches 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units Settings by switch 1 Settings of the transmission speed and the parity Make those settings by operating the communication setting Rotary switch Model name Refer to Temperature controller GREEN 51 5 1 UT100 51 5 2 UT2000 51 5 3 UTAdvanced 51 5 4 RS232C RS485 converter ML2 square 51 5 ...

Page 1024: ...nication setting DIP SW 2 A setting of the transmission speed Make this setting by operating the timer change over time Rotary switch Switch position Communication mode ON PC link communication mode Switch position Station No 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 A 11 B 12 C 13 D 14 E 15 F 16 Item Set value Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Data bit 1 7bits 8bits Parity bit 1 Even ...

Page 1025: ...of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the temperature controller 3 All station specification Target station differs depending on write in operation or read out operation For write in operation all station will be a target In the WORD BIT write in operation only the temperature controller whose station No is the same as host address is applicable 51 4 ...

Page 1026: ...ion number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 51 4 2 Communication detail settings GOT clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment The GOT can disconnect some o...

Page 1027: ... CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 52 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Continued to next page Series Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to DMC DMC10 RS 232 52 2 1 DMC50 RS 485 52 2 2 SDC SDC15 RS 232 52 2 3 SDC25 SDC26 SDC35 SDC36 SDC20 RS 232 RS 485 52 2 4 SDC21 SDC30 RS 232 RS 485 52 2 5 SDC31 SDC40A RS 232 RS 485 52 2 6 SDC40B SDC40G SDC45 RS ...

Page 1028: ...ble Model List Series Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to NX NX D15 RS 232 RS 485 MODBUS 52 2 10 NX D25 NX D35 NX DX1 NX DX2 NX DY NX S01 NX S11 NX S12 NX S21 NX D15 Ethernet MODBUS 52 2 10 NX D25 NX D35 NX DX1 NX DX2 NX DY NX S01 NX S11 NX S12 NX S21 ...

Page 1029: ...verter DMC10 DMC10 GOT AZBIL SDC DMC Communication driver Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connectioncable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number DMC10 RS485 connection diagram ...

Page 1030: ...terface converter SDC15 SDC25 26 SDC35 36 SDC15 SDC25 26 SDC35 36 GOT AZBIL SDC DMC Communication driver Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connectioncable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection...

Page 1031: ...rsion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number SDC20 21 RS485 connection diagram 2 500m CMC10L RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT SDC20 21 Connection cable C...

Page 1032: ...ion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number SDC30 31 RS485 connection diagram 2 500m CMC10L RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT SDC30 31 SDC30 31 Connection ...

Page 1033: ... External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number SDC40A 40B 40G RS485 connection diagram 2 500m CMC10L RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT Connector conversion box Exter...

Page 1034: ... Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable Interface converter Control equipment Control equipment GOT Control equipment Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model name Communication Type Cable model...

Page 1035: ...ter Control equipment Control equipment GOT Control equipment Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number CMF050 CML PBC201 VN2 AUR350C AUR450C CMC10B RS48...

Page 1036: ...diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 control equipment for 1 GOT SCU module RS 232 SCU module RS 422 RS485 connection diagram 3 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m AZBIL SDC DMC Communication driver AHC 2001 communication unit AHC 2001 communication unit Connection cable GOT Connector conversion box External cable PLC Connection cable Connector conversio...

Page 1037: ...HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER 52 2 10 Connecting to NX series Use a MODBUS R RTU or MODBUS R TCP communication driver to connect the GOT to NX series For the MODBUS R RTU or MODBUS R TCP connection refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Peripheral Connection 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION For the valid devices refer to the follo...

Page 1038: ... connection diagram 1 1 For details on the setting method of the TERMINAL mode refer to the following 52 5 5 Connecting to CMC10L Connector conversion box side Interface converter CMC10L 1 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS NC FG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 3 2 7 5 CS SD RD RS SG CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS NC FG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SG SD RD Connector conversion box side Tem...

Page 1039: ...EMENS PLC 59 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 232 cable must be 6m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 AZBIL control equipment side connector Use the connector compat...

Page 1040: ...e converter has a built in terminating resistor set the terminating resistor of GOT to Enable For details of terminating resistor settings refer to the following 52 5 5 Connecting to CMC10L Control equipment side Control equipment side Interface converter side 3 CMC10L 11 12 13 DA DB SG DA DB SG 2 1 1 2 DA DB SG Signal name Model of control equipment DMC10 SDC15 SDC25 26 SDC35 36 AUR350C AUR450C P...

Page 1041: ...et the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Enable 3 Connect FG grounding to the single sided end of a cable shield line Connector conversion box side 3 Control equipment side Control equipment side SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA CSA RSB CSB FG RDA RDB SDA SDB SG FG 1 6 2 7 5 3 4 8 9 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG FG 4 4 1 1 Terminating resistor 150Ω 1 2W 2 Signal name Model of control equipmen...

Page 1042: ... distance between GOT and controllers of RS 485 cable must be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 AZBIL control equipment side connector Use the connector compatible with the AZBIL control equipment side module For details refer to the user s manual of the AZBIL control equipment...

Page 1043: ...to DMC50 3 Host Address is ignored when connecting to DMC10 or SDC 4 Host Address is valid when connecting to DMC50 Devices to be the target of Host Address setting differ depending on the system configuration When connecting to the temperature controller via COM module Specify the station No of the COM module When connecting to the temperature controller directly Specify the station No of the tem...

Page 1044: ...face setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Model name Compatible format SDC20 21 SDC30 31 S...

Page 1045: ...for the station address 52 5 2 Connecting to SDC40A 40B 40G Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller 1 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side 2 Do not set to 0 3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units Model name Refer to Control equipment DMC10 52 5 1 DMC50 52 5 6 ...

Page 1046: ...he GOT side 2 The sum of data length parity bit and stop bit Settings by switch 1 Setting DIP switches a Transmission speed settings b Frame length settings c Connecting terminating resistors 2 Mode selector switch settings Set the switch to TERMINAL Item Set value Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps Communication mode 2 CPL Data bit 1 7bits 8bits Parity bit 1 Odd even none Stop bit 1 1bit 2bits...

Page 1047: ...ation address without overlapping with that of other units 52 5 9 Connecting to CML CMF050 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the control equipment 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Do not set to 0 3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units 52 5 10 Connecting to MQV Communication settings Make the communication sett...

Page 1048: ... communication condition switch 2 Communication condition selection Set the communication condition switch 3 Station address setting Set the station address switch Item Set value Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication condition selection 1 0 8 bit data length Even parity Stop bit 1 1 8 bit data length Non parity Stop bit 2 Station address 2 3 0 to 127 Item Set value Communica...

Page 1049: ...ss without overlapping with that of other units 52 5 16 Connecting to CMC10B Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the Smart Loader Package SLP CM1 of the control equipment 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Do not set to 0 3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units Station address setting Set the station address switch Item Set v...

Page 1050: ...g the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No shown in the table below on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the control equipment 1 Although the station number range of AHC2001 is 1 to 127 use the station number range of DMC50 of 1 to 15 Item Set value Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200b...

Page 1051: ...M module or temperature controller with the station number set with the host address must be included 52 4 2 Communication detail settings GOT clock control Since the control equipment does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment The GOT can disconnect some of multiple conne...

Page 1052: ...52 26 52 CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 52 7 Precautions ...

Page 1053: ...ocol MODBUS from the temperature controller model names For the detailed model names of RKC temperature controller refer to the following catalog RKC temperature controller catalog Series Model name 1 Clock Communication Type Refer to SR Mini HG H PCP J RS 232 RS 422 53 2 1 H PCP A RS 232 RS 422 53 2 2 H PCP B SRZ Z TIO RS 232 RS 422 53 2 3 Z DIO Z CT CB CB100 RS 232 53 2 4 CB400 CB500 CB700 CB900...

Page 1054: ... diagram number Model name H PCP J RS 232 W BF 28 0500 0 5m 1 W BF 28 1000 1m 1 W BF 28 3000 3m 1 or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m Up to 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT W BF 02 0500 0 5m 1 W BF 02 1000 1m 1 W BF 02 3000 3m 1 FAX067 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 1...

Page 1055: ...on box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number H PCP A H PCP B RS 232 W BF 28 0500 0 5m 1 W BF 28 1000 1m 1 W BF 28 3000 3m 1 or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m Up to 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT W BF 02 0500 0 5m 1 W BF 02 1000 1m 1 W BF 02 3000 3m 1 FAX067 GT16H ...

Page 1056: ...istance Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number SRZ RS485 connection diagram 1 1200m CD48 5 V 1 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 3 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m Z TIO Up to 16 Z DIO Up to 16 Z CT Up to 16 Total of Z TIO Z CT and Z DIO Up to 31 for 1 GOT COM COM Terminating resistor GOT Interface converter Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Z COM Z TIO Z DIO Z CT Z...

Page 1057: ...rnal cable Z COM Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Terminating resistor 1 Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number Z COM RS 422 W BW 02 W BF 02 0500 0 5m W BF 02 1000 1m W BF 02 3000 3m 1 or RS422 connection diagram 2 RS422 connecti...

Page 1058: ... of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connection diagram number FB400 FB900 RS 232 1 RS232 connection diagram 4 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m Up to 1 temperature controllers for 1 GOT RS 422 1 RS422 connection diagram 3 RS422 connection diagram 4 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m Up to 31 t...

Page 1059: ...eries Connector conversion box External cable GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Converter 1 Connection cable 2 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Model name Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model name Communication Type Cable model Connectiondiagram number FB100 FB400 FB900 RS485 connection diagram 1 1200...

Page 1060: ...e controller for 1 GOT PF900 901 HA400 401 HA900 901 MA900 901 AG500 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 3 RS422 connection diagram 4 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT THV A1 RS 422 W BF 02 0500 0 5m W BF 02 1000 1m W BF 02 3000 3m 2 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P ...

Page 1061: ...erface converter Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Max distance 2 Converter 1 Connection cable 3 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 3 Number of connectable equipment Model name Cable model Connection diagram number Cable model Connectiondiagram number Model name Comm unicati on Type Cable model Connection diagram number PF900 PF901 RS422 con...

Page 1062: ...ternal cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number SB RS485 connection diagram 1 1200m CD485 V 1 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 3 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Con...

Page 1063: ...e RKC temperature controller side RS232 connection diagram 1 1 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller RS232 connection diagram 2 1 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller Connector conversion box side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS NC SD ...

Page 1064: ...mum distance b The length of the RS 422 cable used for connecting the temperature controller to the GOT The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 422 cable must be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 RKC temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatibl...

Page 1065: ...following table Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 1200m or less 2 RKC temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the RKC temperature controller side module For details refer to user s manual of the RKC temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 RKC temperature controller side The terminating resistor...

Page 1066: ...ails on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 9600bps 9600...

Page 1067: ...that of other units Setting DIP switches Make the settings of transmission speed communication mode data length parity bit and stop bit 1 Transmission speed settings a COM PORT1 COM PORT2 b COM PORT3 Model name Refer to Temperature controller H PCP J 53 5 1 H PCP A H PCP B 53 5 2 Z TIO module Z DIO module Z CT module 53 5 3 Z COM module 53 5 4 CB Series 53 5 5 FB Series 53 5 6 RB Series 53 5 7 PF9...

Page 1068: ... switches Make the settings of transmission speed data length parity bit and stop bit 1 Transmission speed settings 2 Settings of data length and parity bit SW2 Communication protocol 5 6 7 8 ON OFF OFF OFF MODBUS protocol SW3 Communication protocol 5 ON MODBUS protocol SW2 Data bit configuration 1 2 OFF OFF Data 8 bit Non parity Stop 1bit SW3 Data bit configuration 1 2 OFF OFF Data 8 bit Non pari...

Page 1069: ...gs 2 Select the module address without overlapping with that of other units Setting DIP switches Make the settings of transmission speed data bit configuration communication protocol Unit address setting switch Setting range 0 to F Item Setting range Communication speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication protocol MODBUS Data bit configuration Data bit 8bits Parity None Data bit 8bits Parity...

Page 1070: ...ng Item Set value Instrument 0 CFG file ZTIO_rkc cfg Interval time 0 to 250ms Module address setting switch Setting range 0 to F Item Setting range Communication speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication protocol Host MODBUS Data bit 8bits fixed Parity None fixed Stop bit 1bit fixed Unit address 2 0 to F Interval time 0 to 250ms Dip switch settings valid invalid valid Setting item Set value ...

Page 1071: ...on Instruction Manual 53 5 6 Connecting to FB Series Communication settings 1 Items and setting range are common to communication 1 and communication 2 2 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 3 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Data bit configuration Communication setting mode Set the communication setting mode using the operation panel of the FB series main unit For d...

Page 1072: ...settings 2 Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of other units 3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made Item Setting range Communicatio...

Page 1073: ...the device address1 without overlapping with that of other units 3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 53 5 14 Connecting to SA100 SA200 Communication s...

Page 1074: ...OFF again and set the DIP switches and rotary switch to the original position Item Setting range Communication speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication protocol MODBUS Data bit configuration Data bit 8bit Parity None Data bit 8bit Parity Even Data bit 8bit Parity Odd Stop bit 1bit fixed Module address 2 1 to 99 Internal data bus terminating resistor When combining the module turn ON the int...

Page 1075: ...ime from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary Data bit configuration Communication setting mode Set the communication settings for the SB series with the front key switch For details of the settings refer to the following manual 1 channel Type ...

Page 1076: ...ion 1 to 5 Communication specifications setting RS 422A RS 485 DIP switch settings SW4 Terminating resistor setting with without Item Setting range Unit address setting CH1 to CH4 The setting value of the rotary switch plus 1 is the communication address Unit address setting CH5 to CH8 The setting value of the rotary switch plus 2 is the communication address 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 ...

Page 1077: ...patible to the station No specification will be the station No of the temperature controller Temperature controller Module address setting of temperature controller side GOT side station number setting Remark H PCP J H PCP A H PCP B Z TIO Z COM 0 to F Hexadecimal 1 to 16 Decimal The GOT side station number setting is the module address setting value 1 Z DIO 0 to F Hexadecimal 17 to 32 Decimal The ...

Page 1078: ...ure controller system Make sure to establish temperature controller system with No 01 station GOT clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment By setting GOT internal device GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the ...

Page 1079: ...1 SLC500 30 SLC500 40 SLC5 01 SLC5 02 SLC5 03 RS 232 SLC5 04 SLC5 05 MicroLogix1000 Digital CPU 1761 L10BWA RS 232 54 2 2 1761 L10BWB 1761 L16AWA 1761 L16BWA 1761 L16BWB 1761 L16BBB 1761 L32AWA 1761 L32BWA 1761 L32BWB 1761 L32BBB 1761 L32AAA MicroLogix1000 Analog CPU 1761 L20AWA 5A RS 232 1761 L20BWA 5A 1761 L20BWB 5A MicroLogix1200 1762 L24BWA RS 232 MicroLogix1400 1766 L32AWA RS 232 MicroLogix15...

Page 1080: ...cation driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number SLC500 RS 232 GT09 C30R20701 9S 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 PLC SLC500 series Connection cable DH485 network Adapter Connector conversion box External ca...

Page 1081: ...utomation Inc MicroLogix 1000 1200 1500 series Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT AB MicroLogix Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series 2 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number MicroLogix 1000 1200 1400 1500 RS 232 1761 CBL PM02 1 Series C or later o...

Page 1082: ...RADLEY PLC user s manual RS232 connection diagram 1 RS232 connection diagram 2 RS232 connection diagram 3 ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 3 2 6 5 4 7 8 CD TXD RXD DSR SG DTR RTS CTS FG Connector conversion box side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 6 7 20 4 5 8 FG TXD RXD DSR SG DTR RTS CTS CD ALLEN BR...

Page 1083: ...ompleted POINT POINT POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 17 1 2 I F communication setting Communication detail settings 1 AB SLC500 AB 1 N 1 Do not specify the same value for the adapter address and host address 2 AB MicroLogix 1 Do not specify the same value for the adapter address and host address 2 3 4 Click...

Page 1084: ...fy the stop bit length for communications Default 1bit 1bit 2bits Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check and how it is performed during communication Default None None Even Odd Sum Check Type Specify the format in which the sum check is performed during communication when performing sum check Default BCC BCC CRC16 Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communicatio...

Page 1085: ... 100Mbps ControlLogix5570 1756 EN2TR 10 100Mbps 5 The number of the connectable GOTs for 1 PLC differs depending on the PLC series ControlLogix5550 5555 5560 When PLC GOT is N 1 the following number of the PLCs can be connected to 1 GOT TCP 128 or less When PLC GOT is 1 N the following number of the GOTs can be connected to 1 PLC TCP 64 or less recommended to 16 or less ControlLogix5570 When PLC G...

Page 1086: ...cription Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 2 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 64 GOT IP address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 1087: ...ress can be set for the different port No 54 3 3 PLC side setting POINT POINT POINT ALLEN BRADLEY PLC For details of ALLEN BRADLEY PLCs refer to the following manuals ALLEN BRADLEY PLC user s Manual Parameter setting Set the following parameters with the software package manufactured by the Allen Bradley 1 For the IP address make the same setting as that of each Ethernet module set on GT Designer3...

Page 1088: ...ting IP address Do not use the IP address 192 168 0 18 when using multiple GOTs A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub M...

Page 1089: ...dels Series Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to Series90 30 IC693CPU311 RS 232 RS 422 55 2 1 IC693CPU313 IC693CPU323 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 IC693CPU363 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 Series90 70 IC697CPU731 RS 232 RS 422 55 2 2 IC697CPX772 IC697CPX782 IC697CPX928 IC697CPX935 IC697CPU780 IC697CGR772 IC697CGR935 IC697CPU788 IC697CPU789 IC697CPM790 VersaMax Micro IC200UAA003 RS 232 RS ...

Page 1090: ...tor conversion box External cable GOT GE SNP X Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Power Supplies 1 Model name Communication Modules 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693PWR332 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU311 IC693CPU313 IC693CPU323 IC693CMM3...

Page 1091: ...CPU313 IC693CPU323 IC693CMM311 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m 8 PLCs for1 GOT IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693PWR332 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 IC693CMM311 RS 422 IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693PWR332 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU363 IC693CMM311 RS 422 PLC Connection cab...

Page 1092: ...788 IC697CPU789 IC697CPU731 IC697CGR772 IC697CGR935 IC697CPM790 IC697CMM711 RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 PLCs for 1 GOT Series 90 70 Communication Modules Connection cable POWER SUPPLY LOGIC POWER PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OK RUN EN CENTRAL PROCESSOR UNIT MEM PROTECT P1 P2 P3 OK PORT 1 PORT 2 COMMUNICATIONS COPROCESSOR POWER SUPPLY LOGIC POWER PROGRAMMABLE CO...

Page 1093: ...be connected For the RS 232 connection Connection cable VersaMax Micro Connector conversion box External cable GOT GE SNP X Communication driver PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number IC200UAA003 IC200UAR014 IC200UDD104 IC200UDD112 IC200UDR001 IC200UDR0...

Page 1094: ... Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment PLC Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 IC200UAA007 IC200UAR028 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD120 IC200UDD212 IC200UDR005 IC200UDR006 IC200UDR010 IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 IC200UDR164 IC200UDR064 RS 422 RS422 connection diagram 3 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 13m ...

Page 1095: ...rollers of RS 232 cable must be 6m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 GE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the GE PLC side module For details refer to the GE PLC user s manual RS232 connection diagram 1 RS232 connection diagram 2 1 For details of the pin assignmen...

Page 1096: ... which will be a terminal Communication Module Communication Module SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA CSA RSB CSB TERM RD B RD A SD B SD A 0V RTS A CTS A RTS B CTS B SHLD 1 6 2 7 5 3 4 8 9 24 25 13 21 9 7 10 11 22 23 1 TERM RD B RD A SD B SD A 0V RTS A CTS A RTS B CTS B SHLD 24 25 13 21 9 7 10 11 22 23 1 1 1 Terminating resistor120Ω 2 Connector conversion box side Connector conversion box side PLC PLC RT RD ...

Page 1097: ...the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 GE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the GE PLC side module For details refer to the GE PLC user s manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT Set the terminating resistor setting switch of t...

Page 1098: ...he Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 C...

Page 1099: ...mber and set it as 00 to 09 6 Set to 0 only when connecting to Port2 55 5 2 Connecting to VersaMaxMicro Communication settings Make the communication settings using the engineering tool 1 Set to the SNP protocol 2 Set to Slave 3 Set to Long 4 Set to 0 5 Set within the range of 00 to 31 When specifying the station No from 0 to 9 add 0 before the number and set it as 00 to 09 6 Set the same set valu...

Page 1100: ...mber setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive 1 Direct specification Specify the station No of the PLC to be changed when setting device POINT POINT POINT PLC Station NO settings Make sure to set a 2 digit number for the station No of ...

Page 1101: ...S PLC 59 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER 55 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT16 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 for GT Works3 55 7 Precautions GOT clock control The PLC clock data cannot be written ...

Page 1102: ...55 14 55 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 55 7 Precautions ...

Page 1103: ...S INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 57 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 58 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 59 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER 56 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 56 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to K80S K7M D S DC RS 232 RS 422 56 2 1 K120S K7M D U K200S K3P 07 S RS 232 RS 422 56 ...

Page 1104: ...nector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Cnet I F module 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number K80S K120S RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT G7L CUEB RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 K80S K120S Cnet I F module K80S K120S Cnet I F module Connector conversion box Externa...

Page 1105: ... Communication driver LS Industrial Systems MASTER K K200S Cnet I F module Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Cnet I F module 1 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number K200S G6L CUEB RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S...

Page 1106: ...onnector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Series Cnet I F module 1 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number K300S G4L CUEA RS 232 RS232 connection diagram 2 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 PLC for 1 GOT K300S Cnet I F module K300S Cnet I F module Connector conversion box External cable GOT Connection cable 1 Connection cab...

Page 1107: ...r details refer to the user s manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 56 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1 RS232 connection diagram 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM PLC side 1 7 4 2 5 3 6 8 9 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS NC 5V TXD2 RXD2 RXD1 SG TXD1 5V SG SG Connector conversion box side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 CD RD RXD SD TXD ER...

Page 1108: ...onnector compatible with the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side module For details refer to the user s manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer ...

Page 1109: ...ding to the usage environment POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings ...

Page 1110: ... to the following User s Manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 56 6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT16 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 for GT Works3 Model name Refer to PLC CPU K80S K120S 56 5 1 K200S K300S Cnet I...

Page 1111: ...nnectable models 57 2 System Configuration 57 2 1 Connecting to Flexi Soft 1 Product manufactured by SICK Inc For details of the product contact SICK Inc Series Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to Flexi Soft FX3 CPU000000 RS 232 57 2 1 FX3 CPU130002 FX3 CPU320002 Connector conversion box External cable GOT Flexi Soft Connection cable SICK Flexi Soft Communication driver PLC Connection cab...

Page 1112: ...nication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 SICK Flexi Soft POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICA...

Page 1113: ...details of SICK PLCs refer to the following manual User s Manual pf the SICK PLC 57 4 1 Connecting to Flexi Soft Communication settings Communication settings are not required since the following contents are fixed 57 5 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT16 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual...

Page 1114: ...57 4 57 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 57 5 Device Range that Can Be Set ...

Page 1115: ...s AG For details of this product contact Siemens AG Series Clock Communication Type Ethernet connection Type Refer to SIMATIC S7 200 RS 232 58 2 2 Ethernet OP Communication 58 3 3 SIMATIC S7 300 1 RS 232 58 2 1 Ethernet FETCH WRITE 58 3 1 OP Communication 58 3 3 SIMATIC S7 400 1 RS 232 58 2 1 Ethernet FETCH WRITE 58 3 1 OP Communication 58 3 3 SIMATIC S7 1200 Ethernet OP Communication 58 3 3 SIMAT...

Page 1116: ...onversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 2 Number of connectable equipment Series HMI Adapter 1 Communication Type Cable model Connection diagram number SIMATIC S7 300 400 MLFB 6ES7 972 0CA11 0XA0 RS 232 GT09 C30R20801 9S 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 HMI Adapter SIMATIC S7 200 Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GO...

Page 1117: ...ommunication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer SIEMENS Controller Type Set either of the following S7 300 400 series S7 200 I F Interface to be used Driver Set either of the following When connecting ...

Page 1118: ...op Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications Default 1bit 1bit fixed Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check and how it is performed during communication Default Odd Odd fixed Adapter Address 1 2 Specify the adapter address station No of the adapter to which the GOT is connected in the connected network Default 1 1 to 31 Host Address 1 2 Specify the host address station No...

Page 1119: ...ion Error information cannot be monitored when the GOT is connected to a SIEMENS PLC The error information on the PLC CPU side can be monitored For details on the alarm list system alarm refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual At system startup 1 When powering ON the system Turn ON all PLC CPUs before turning ON the GOT If the GOT is turned ON before power up of th...

Page 1120: ...factured by Siemens AG For details of the product contact Siemens AG 4 If the number of GOTs increases the communication becomes highloaded and it may affect the communication performance SIMATIC S7 300 400 series GOT Connection cable Ethernet Module Connector conversion box External cable Communication driver Ethernet SIEMENS S7 Gateway PLC Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable...

Page 1121: ...ernet Module 3 Cable model SIMATIC S7 200 CP 243 1 CP 243 1 IT 10BASE T Shielded twisted pair cable STP or unshielded twisted pair cable UTP Category 3 4 and 5 100BASE TX Shielded twisted pair cable STP Category 5 and 5e GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m GT16H C60 42P 6m GT16H C100 42P 10m 100m 2 When PLC GOT is N 1 The following shows the number of PLCs for 1 GOT 128 or less When PLC GOT is 1 N The ...

Page 1122: ...odes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Product manufactured by Siemens AG For details of the product contact Siemens AG 4 If the number of GOTs increases the communicati...

Page 1123: ...according to the usage environment 1 Click the Setting button and perform the setting in the GOT IP Address Setting screen 2 Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers 58 3 3 Ethernet setting 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 2 Set ...

Page 1124: ...ve Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk N W No Set the network No of the connected Ethernet module Default blank 1 to 239 PLC No 1 Set the station No of the connected Ethernet module Default blank 1 to 64 Type SIEMENS S7 fixed SIEMENS S7 fixed IP Address Set the IP address of the connected Ethernet module Default blank PLC side IP address FET...

Page 1125: ...ress PLC side IP address Subnet mask PLC side subnet mask Item Setting details Options Mode Select Fetch passive Addresses IP dec Local PLC side IP address Remote GOT side IP address PORT dec Local PLC side port No Remote GOT side port No Item Setting details Options Mode Select Write passive Addresses IP dec Local PLC side IP address Remote GOT side IP address PORT dec Local PLC side port No Remo...

Page 1126: ...ve the communication performance Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT When monitoring a nonexistent or turned off station If a time out occurs with the initial communication by monitoring a nonexistent or turned off station the time out can delay the communication with the normally operating station Timing to start GOT communication ...

Page 1127: ... ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 55 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 56 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 57 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 58 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 59 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER 59 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER For the connection to the HNC controller manufactured by Hirata Corporation please contact our company ...

Page 1128: ...59 2 59 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER ...

Page 1129: ... 61 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 62 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 63 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 64 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 65 VNC R SERVER CONNECTION 60 CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER For the connection to the controller manufactured by Muratec please contact our company ...

Page 1130: ...60 2 60 CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER ...

Page 1131: ...MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION 61 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 61 1 62 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 62 1 ...

Page 1132: ......

Page 1133: ...used 61 4 Device Data Area Flow of data processing 1 When reading or writing data 1 The host sends a request message the read write command to the GOT 2 The GOT performs a read write processing to its virtual devices according to the request from the host 3 Upon completion of the processing the GOT sends a response message processing result to the host 4 Creating the following objects on the scree...

Page 1134: ...terrupt output from the touch switches on the GOT 2 The GOT sends the written data interrupt output to the host 1 61 5 Message Formats 2 61 4 Device Data Area 2 1 Host GOT Screen data Interrupt output Screen display Device data area virtual devices 2 Interrupt D13 D13 3139H 31H output value1 output value2 39H When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 ...

Page 1135: ...or the microcomputer connection serial Computer Communication driver Host Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Host Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Communication Type Connection diagram number RS 232 RS 232 connection diagram 1 GT16H CNB 42S GT16H C30 42P 3m 6m 1 GOT for 1 host RS 422 RS 422 c...

Page 1136: ...to the microcomputer to be used Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 422 cable must be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a microcomputer to the GOT a term...

Page 1137: ... POINT POINT Values of virtual devices inside the GOT When the GOT is turned OFF or reset values are cleared to their defaults bit devices OFF word devices 0 Values are held in the memory when project data are written to the GOT Virtual device 2 Address Specification Value Refer to Name Device range decimal Device type Formats 1 2 Formats 3 to 6 Formats 7 to 10 Formats 11 to 13 Formats 14 15 D 0 t...

Page 1138: ...n SIO error occurs and turn OFF when an request message from the host is received successfully after the error occurrence b7 turns ON about 3 seconds after the host side DTR becomes OFF and turns OFF when transmission is performed successfully to the host after the error occurrence System D4 Clock data year D5 Clock data month D6 Clock data day b15 b0 b3 Unused b4 SIO framing error b5 SIO parity e...

Page 1139: ...04 Thursday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Tuesday 04 is stored to D10 although Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility time display Address Description Set side D7 Clock data hour System D8 Clock data minute D9 Clock data second D10 Clock data day of week 1 D11 D12 Unused b15 b0 Data of hours 00 to 23 stored as 2 digit BCD b7 Unused b8 b15 b0 Data of m...

Page 1140: ...ted interrupt output to the host side 1 2 The data amount number of bytes to be interrupt output is set at Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings 61 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Output value when 1 is set to Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings User D14 Output value when 2 is set to Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings Out...

Page 1141: ...llowing 61 5 Message Formats Address Address Specification Value Formats 1 2 Formats 3 to 6 Formats 7 to 10 Formats 11 to 13 Formats 14 15 D0 0 D0 D0 0000H 8000H 8001H D1 1 D1 D1 0001H 8002H 8003H D4095 4095 D4095 D4095 0FFFH 9FFEH 9FFFH Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Formats 3 to 6 A compatible 1C frame Formats 7 to 10 QnA compatible 3C 4C frame Formats 11 to 13 Digital Elec...

Page 1142: ...Address Address Specification Value b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Formats 1 2 Formats 3 to 6 Formats 7 to 10 Formats 11 to 13 Formats 14 15 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 L0 8192 Same as address column on left 2 2000H A000H L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 A001H L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17 L16 8193 2001H A002H L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 A003H L2039 L2038 L2037 L2036 L2035 L2034 L2033 L2032 8319 207FH A0FEH L204...

Page 1143: ...he time elapsed after GOT is turned ON is stored in 100ms units 1 When setting the LH order to 32bit Storage for the communication detail settings The lower and upper bits are stored in SD0 and SD1 respectively 2 When setting the HL order to 32bit Storage for the communication detail settings The upper and lower bits are stored in SD0 and SD1 respectively System SD2 1 Communication error status An...

Page 1144: ... communication module attachment Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings Review the contents of the message to transmit 5 Command error An unsupported command was used Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the commands in the message 61 5 2 List of commands 105 Timeout error There is no response from the GOT or the station of the specified address does not exist Check th...

Page 1145: ...2102H 2103H SD2 8450 D9002 SD2 2102H 2104H 2105H SD3 8451 D9003 SD3 2103H 2106H 3000H 2107H 3001H SD4 8452 D9004 SD4 2104H 2108H 3002H 2109H 3003H SD5 8453 D9005 SD5 2105H 210AH 3004H 210BH 3005H SD6 8454 D9006 SD6 2106H 210CH 3006H 210DH 3007H SD7 8455 D9007 SD7 2107H 210EH 3008H 210FH 3009H SD8 8456 D9008 SD8 2108H 2110H 300AH 2111H 300BH SD9 8457 D9009 SD9 2109H 2112H 300CH 2113H 300DH Formats ...

Page 1146: ... Example FFH 7FH Address Description Set side SM0 to 49 Interrupt output When the ON OFF state of SM0 to 49 is changed by a touch switch on the GOT for example the interrupt codes shown below are transmitted interrupt output to the host side 1 2 The data amount number of bytes to be interrupt output is set at Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings 61 6 1 Setting communication interfa...

Page 1147: ...range of SM0 to 52 4 For reading or writing data in word units specify the addresses in 16 point units Example SM0 SM16 SM32 etc Address Address Specification Value b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Formats 1 2 Formats 3 to 6 Formats 7 to 10 Formats 11 to 13 Formats 14 15 SM7 SM6 SM5 SM4 SM3 SM2 SM1 SM0 8464 2 4 3 4 2110H 2200H SM15 SM14 SM13 SM12 SM11 SM10 SM9 SM8 2201H SM23 SM22 SM21 SM20 SM19 SM18 SM17 S...

Page 1148: ... frame format 1 This is the basic format of the dedicated protocols 61 5 4 Format 4 A compatible 1C frame format 2 This is the appended format of the A compatible 1C frame format 1 with a block No Format 5 A compatible 1C frame format 3 This is the enclosed format of the A compatible 1C frame format 1 with STX and ETX Format 6 A compatible 1C frame format 4 This is the appended format of the A com...

Page 1149: ...ds multiple different word devices in 1 point units 64 points RW 52H 57H Random write in word units 1 Writes to multiple different bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points Writes to multiple different word devices in 1 point units 64 points TR 54H 52H Read clock data Reads the clock data of the GOT TS 54H 53H Set clock data Sets the clock data of the GOT Command Command name Description ...

Page 1150: ...s multiple different word devices in 1 point and 2 point units 64 points 1402 0001 Random write in bit units Writes to multiple different bit devices in 1 point units 64 points 1402 0000 Random write in word units 1 Writes to multiple different bit devices in 16 point and 32 point units 3 64 words 1024 points Writes to multiple different word devices in 1 point and 2 point units 64 points 0406 000...

Page 1151: ...27 points 1 31H Batch write w out station No Writes to bit devices in byte units 255bytes 2040 points Writes to word devices in byte units 255bytes 127 points B 42H Batch write w station No Writes to bit devices in byte units 255bytes 2040 points Writes to word devices in byte units 255bytes 127 points 3 33H Multi point write in bit units w out station No Writes bit patterns bit ON OFF inversion d...

Page 1152: ...ssing of read commands 2 During processing of write commands Response message during faulty communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 During interrupt output format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is performed in...

Page 1153: ...ss notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 5 Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be read set to the GOT clock data The address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit Message format 5 Read clock d...

Page 1154: ...0H 0 30H H L Number of points 0 2 30H 32H 52H 44H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 32H 03H 1BCH D100 D101 0102H 0304H Item Message format Request message host GOT Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is performed i...

Page 1155: ...ormat 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 8 C 38H 43H Sum Check H L Command R D 52H 44H H L Address 8 3 38H 33H 2 32H 0 30H H L Number of points 0 2 30H 32H Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 8 C 38H 43H Sum Check H L Data 1 M15 to 0 0 30H 0 30H ...

Page 1156: ... during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 5 6 35H 36H Sum Check H L Command W D 57H 44H H L Address 0 1 30H 31H 0 30H 0 30H H L Number of points 0 2 30H 32H H L Data 1 D100 0 ...

Page 1157: ...sage during faulty communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 5 6 35H 36H Sum Check H L Data 1 M15 to 0 0 30H 0 30H 1 31H 0 30H H L Data 2 M31 to 16 8 38H 0 30H 0 30H 0 30H M 1 6 M 1 7 M 1 8 M 1 9 M 2 0 M 2 1 M 2 2 M 2 3 M 2 4 M 2 5 M 2 6 M 2 7 ...

Page 1158: ... microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 3 5 33H 35H Sum Check H L Command R R 52H 52H H L Address 1 0 1 30H 31H 0 30H 0 30H H L Address 2 8 3 38H 33H 2 32H 0 30H Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 8 E 38H 45H Sum Check H L Data 1 D100 0 30H 6 36H 4 34H 0 30H 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 1159: ...T Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L C 5 43H 35H Sum Check H L Address 2 8 38H 2 32H 0 30H 3 33H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 0 M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 7 M 8 M 9...

Page 1160: ...mmunication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L A 9 41H 39H Sum Check H L Command T R 54H 52H Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L D 0 44H 30H Sum Check H L Year data 0 4 30H 34H H L Month data 0 6 30H 36H H L Day data 0 1 30H 31H H...

Page 1161: ... 2004 Thursday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of week is Tuesday Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility time display Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE After execution Item Message format Request message host GOT Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connect...

Page 1162: ... is set to 4 byte 31H 39H 3139H D13 Interrupt Interrupt output Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 Output value 1 Output value 2 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 3 33H Sum check C 43H 39H Output value 1 39H Output value 1 format 1 in the case of GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 in the case of GOT A900 Series microcomputer connectio...

Page 1163: ...ck error The sum check code created from received data differs from the sum check code in the receive data Review the contents of the message to transmit 10H Command error An unsupported command was used Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the commands in the message 61 5 2 List of commands 11H Message length error The upper limit of the data length that can be received by the GOT...

Page 1164: ...onverted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 2 Station No Station No is used to identify the GOT with which the host communicates Setting range 0 to 31 The address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit The GOT processes only commands whose station No matches the Host Address 0 to 31 set at Communication Detail ...

Page 1165: ...te second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be read set to the GOT clock data The address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 1 Read clock data TR command 2 Set clock data TS command 7 Error code This is the response message at faulty communication appended with error contents The...

Page 1166: ...rame format 1 Response message during faulty communication GOT host Example Format 3 A compatible 1C frame format 1 Sum check is performed in this range 05H ENQ H L 9 6 39H 36H Sum Check H L Command R 52H T 54H H L Station No 0 30H 0 30H H L PLC No 0 30H 0 30H 30H Wait 0 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 9 0 39H 30H Sum Check H L Year data 0 4 30H 34H H L Month data 0 6 30H ...

Page 1167: ...E will be displayed on the utility time display Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE Item Message format Request message host GOT Example Format 3 A compatible 1C frame format 1 Response message during normal communication GOT host Example Format 3 A compatible 1C frame format 1 Response message during faulty communication GOT host Example Format 3 A compatible 1C frame format 1 Sum check is perfo...

Page 1168: ...sage to transmit 05H Overrun error The next data was transmitted from the host before GOT completes the processing of the data received Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings Decrease the transmission speed 06H Character section error The character section specification error The method of specifying the character section is wrong The specified command has error The number of points o...

Page 1169: ...request destination module I O No and station No Ignored in a microcomputer connection of the GOT Specify 00 The request destination module I O No is 0000 00 is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit The request destination module I O No is 4 digit 2 Station No Station No is used to identify the GOT with which the host communicates Setting range 0 to 1FH The add...

Page 1170: ...points a When using random read write command When setting multiple bit accesses word accesses or double word accesses limit the total number of access points to within 64 points b When using multiple block batch read write commands When setting multiple blocks limit the total number of points of all blocks to within 64 points 7 Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies ...

Page 1171: ... H L Station No 0 30H 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H H L Host Address No 0 30H 0 30H H Command 9 39H L 0 30H 1 31H 1 31H H Sub command 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 1 Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX H L Sum check E 43H E 43H H L Frame ID No F 46H 8 38H H L PLC ...

Page 1172: ...r C section H L 0 30H 0 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H 1 H L 0 4 30H 34H H L 0 6 30H 36H H L 0 1 30H 31H H L 1 8 31H 38H H L 4 6 34H 36H H L 4 9 34H 39H H L 0 2 30H 32H H Command 0 30H 9 39H L 0 30H 1 31H H Sub command 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H Character C section 1 Sum check Frame ID No PLC No Station No Network No Request destination module I O No...

Page 1173: ...d on the utility Example When June 1 2004 Thursday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of week is Tuesday Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility time display Item Message format Response message during faulty communication GOT host Example Format 7 QnA compatible 4C frame format 1 NAK 15H H L F 46H 8 38H H L 0 30H 0 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30...

Page 1174: ...the message to transmit Check the devices that can be used and the device ranges 61 4 Device Data Area 7F20H Character error A character other than A to Z 0 to 9 space and control codes has been received Review the contents of the message to transmit 7F23H Communication message error EXT CR LF was not found within the upper limit of the receive buffer Check the communication cable and communicatio...

Page 1175: ...munication is performed in ASCII code 1 Command Specifies the contents to access from the host to GOT The command is converted to a 1 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted For details of the commands that can be used refer to the following 61 5 2 List of commands 2 Station No Station No is used to identify the GOT with which the host communicates Setting range 0 to 1FH The address notated in hexade...

Page 1176: ...Message format 2 Set clock data M command 6 Error code This is the response message at faulty communication appended with error contents The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of error codes generated in formats 12 and 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode refer to the following Er...

Page 1177: ... of GOT Assuming that the clock data of GOT has been set to 2004 June 1 18 46 49 Tuesday Continued to next page Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE Item Message format Request message host GOT Example Format 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n Digital compatible signal GS580 to GS583 OFF Partly compatible Digital compatible signal GS580 to GS583 ON...

Page 1178: ...Sum Check H L Station No 0 30H 0 30H 1BH ESC 41H A 0DH CR 0AH LF H L Year data 0 4 30H 34H H L Month data 0 6 30H 36H H L Day data 0 1 30H 31H H L Hour data 1 8 31H 38H H L Minute data 4 6 34H 36H H L Second data 4 9 34H 39H H L Day of week data 0 2 30H 32H 1 Following 1 03H ETX Com mand This range Sum check 02H STX H L 8 C 38H 43H Sum Check H L Station No 0 30H 0 30H 1BH ESC 41H A 0DH CR 0AH LF H...

Page 1179: ...ethod extended mode ASCII code 1 n Response message during faulty communication GOT host Example Format 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n Sum check is performed in this range 05H ENQ H L 9 A 39H 41H Sum Check H L Station No 0 30H 0 30H 1BH ESC 4DH M 0DH CR 0AH LF H L Year data 0 4 30H 34H H L Month data 0 6 30H 36H H L Day data 0 1 30H 31H H L Hou...

Page 1180: ... clock data setting command If a wrong day of the week is set by the clock data setting commands the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When June 1 2004 Thursday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of week is Tuesday Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility time display ...

Page 1181: ...tinued to next page 31H 39H 3139H D13 Interrupt output Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 in format 11 Output value 1 Output value 2 Interrupt Item Message format Request message host GOT Example Format 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n Digital compatible signal GS580 to GS583 OFF Partly compatible Digital compatible signal GS580...

Page 1182: ...ings is set to 1 byte 2 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 2 byte 3 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 4 byte This range Sum check is performed 02H STX H L Station No 0 30H 0 30H 1BH ESC 49H I 0DH CR 0AH LF H L 9 4 39H 44H Sum Check H L 3 9 33H 39H Output value 1 03H ETX Com mand Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX H L 9 39...

Page 1183: ...ffers from the sum check code in the receive data Review the contents of the message to transmit 10H Command error An unsupported command was used Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the commands in the message 61 5 2 List of commands 12H Message length error The upper limit of the data length that can be received by the GOT has been exceeded 16H Clock data setting error The setti...

Page 1184: ... w out station No 2 w station No 2 w station No Response message during normal communication GOT host 1 During processing of read commands format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 2 During processing of write commands Response message during faulty communication GOT host During interrupt output 02H STX 0DH CR Data Com m...

Page 1185: ...o the following 61 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 4 Address Specifies the head No of the device data to be read written The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following 61 4 Device Data Area 5 Bit pattern Specifies the pattern of th...

Page 1186: ...data 6 command w out station No read clock data G command w station No 6 Set clock data 5 command w out station No set clock data F command w station No 10 Data Specifies the data to read from write to the specified device data word unit The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 11 Write data Specifies the data to write to the ...

Page 1187: ...esponse message during normal communication GOT host format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Response message during faulty communication GOT host 02H STX 0DH CR H L Station No 1 5 31H 35H H L Address 0 30H 0 30H 8 38H H L Number of bytes 0 4 30H 34H A 41H C 43H Com mand Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H...

Page 1188: ...range 02H STX 03H ETX H L D 0 44H 30H Sum Check H L Station No 1 5 31H 35H H L Address 2 32H 0 30H H L Number of bytes 0 4 30H 34H A 41H 0 30H 0 30H Com mand 02H STX 0DH CR M 1 6 M 1 7 M 1 8 M 1 9 M 2 0 M 2 1 M 2 2 M 2 3 M 2 4 M 2 5 M 2 6 M 2 7 M 2 8 M 2 9 M 3 0 M 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 8 M 9 M 1 0 M 1 2 M 1 3 M 1 4 M 1 5 M 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 M 0 M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 7 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0...

Page 1189: ... Message format Request message host GOT format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host 02H STX 0DH CR H L Station No 1 5 31H 35H H L Address 0 30H 0 30H 8 38H H L Number of bytes 0 4 30H 34H B 42H C 43H Following 1 Com...

Page 1190: ...y communication GOT host 02H STX 0DH CR 42H B H L Station No 5 35H 1 31H H Address 0 30H 2 32H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Number of bytes 4 34H 0 30H Following 1 Com mand Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L 5 A 35H 41H Sum Check M 1 6 M 1 7 M 1 8 M 1 9 M 2 0 M 2 1 M 2 2 M 2 3 M 2 4 M 2 5 M 2 6 M 2 7 M 2 8 M 2 9 M 3 0 M 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 8 M 9 M 1 0 M 1 2 M 1 M 1 4 M 1 5 M 1 1 0 0 0...

Page 1191: ...1010 Bit pattern 1100 Result 1110 1 OFF specification Bits set to 1 by the bit pattern are turned OFF Original data 1010 Bit pattern 1100 Result 0010 2 Invert specification Bits set to 1 by the bit pattern are inverted Original data 1010 Bit pattern 1100 Result 0110 3 Write specification The numerical values to write by the bit pattern are specified directly Original data 1010 Bit pattern 1100 Res...

Page 1192: ...e start address and end address can be specified crossing over different devices R100 0000H R50 0000H 0000H R100 1616H R50 1616H 1616H Before execution After execution Item Message format Request message host GOT format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Response message during normal communication GOT host Response mess...

Page 1193: ...t 2 Response message during normal communication GOT host format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Response message during faulty communication GOT host 02H STX 0DH CR H L Station No 2 7 32H 37H G 47H Com mand Sum check is performed in this range 02H STX 03H ETX H L B 42H Sum Check 3 33H H L Station No 2 7 32H 37H G 47H...

Page 1194: ... 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE After execution Item Message format Request message host GOT format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host 46H F 0DH CR H L Station No 2 7 32H 37H H L Month data 0 6 30H 36H H L Day Data 0 1 30...

Page 1195: ...g 61 4 6 SM devices To enable the interrupt output set 8 bits to the data length at Communication Detail Settings 61 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH 7FH 3139H D13 Interrupt Interrupt output Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 31H Output value 1 39H Output value 2 Item Message format Interrupt outp...

Page 1196: ...fer to the following 61 4 5 Details and actions for errors error codes stored into SD2 When an error other than those to be stored in SD2 occurs at faulty only the NAK response is executed Precautions 1 Batch reading writing crossing over different devices When using the batch read 0 A or batch write 1 B command do not batch read write crossing over different devices This will cause an error respo...

Page 1197: ...g 61 6 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 19200bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Data bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the ...

Page 1198: ...communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Special Interrupt Code Hex Event type 20H Base Screen 1 and Overlap Window 1 Output when the screens are switched according to the change in the switching device values assigned to 1 2 1 Base Screen or Overlap Window 1 2 switches independently without being interlocked Example of output Whe...

Page 1199: ...transmission settings of the GOT The transmission settings in the microcomputer connection serial are made at Detail Setting on GT Designer3 61 6 2 Communication detail settings 2 Monitor screen settings The following shows the monitor screen settings in this system configuration example a Common settings Set D20 to the screen switching device base screen 1 Select Common GOT Environmental Setting ...

Page 1200: ...layed as a lamp 4 Switch 2 This is a bit alternate switch for changing the state of D22 b0 5 Switch 3 This is the screen switching switch to Sample Screen 1 Touching this changes the base screen to Sample Screen 1 Sample Screen 1 123 Screen 2 Sample Screen 2 Screen 1 No Basic Settings Device Style Device Data Type Display Format Number size Digits D21 Unsigned BIN16 Signerd Decimal Arbitrary 4 No ...

Page 1201: ...value displayed on base screen 1 The host side repeats the processing on the left as long as base screen 1 is displayed When receiving a response to reading of device D21 from the GOT Creates the next device value D21 Calculates the sum check of the send packet Issues the update request of device D21 Batch numerical value display write packet 2 When receiving an interrupt requesting the base scree...

Page 1202: ...ndy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 61 9 Precautions GOT clock control The settings of time adjusting or time broadcast made on the GOT will be disabled on the PLC Use the dedicated commands to set or read out the clock data of microcomputer ...

Page 1203: ...network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standard The use of shielded twisted pair cable STP is recommended in environments in which the performance against noise is required 2 A length between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repe...

Page 1204: ...s of virtual devices inside the GOT When the GOT is turned OFF or reset values are cleared to their defaults bit devices OFF word devices 0 Values are held in the memory when project data are written to the GOT Virtual device 2 Address Specification Value Refer to Name Device range decimal Device type Format 1 2 Format 3 4 Format 5 Format 6 7 8 9 D 0 to 4095 Word 0 to 4095 8000 to 9FFFH 0000 to 0F...

Page 1205: ... Communication error status Stores the communication error details of GOT b4 to 6 turn ON when an SIO error occurs and turn OFF when an request message from the host is received successfully after the error occurrence b7 turns ON about 3 seconds after the host side DTR becomes OFF and turns OFF when transmission is performed successfully to the host after the error occurrence System D4 Clock data ...

Page 1206: ... is stored to D10 although Thursday THU will be displayed on the utility time display Address Description Set side D7 Clock data hour System D8 Clock data minute D9 Clock data second D10 Clock data day of week 1 D11 D12 Unused b15 b0 Data of hours 00 to 23 stored as 2 digit BCD b7 Unused b8 b15 b0 Data of minutes 00 to 59 stored as 2 digit BCD b7 Unused b8 b15 b0 Data of seconds 00 to 59 stored as...

Page 1207: ... written to D13 and D14 from a GOT touch switch for example the data of D13 and D14 are transmitted interrupt output to the host side 1 2 The data amount number of bytes to be interrupt output is set at Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Output value when 1 is set to Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings...

Page 1208: ...g 62 4 Message Formats Address Address Specification Value Format 1 2 Format 3 4 Format 5 Format 6 7 8 9 D0 0 8000H 0000H D0 8001H D1 1 8002H 0001H D1 8003H D4095 4095 9FFEH 0FFFH D4095 9FFFH Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Formats 3 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Format 5 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method Formats 6 7 4E frame Formats 8 9 3E fram...

Page 1209: ...ta format refer to the following 62 4 Message Formats 2 For reading or writing data in word units specify the addresses in 16 point units Example M0 M16 M32 and others Address Address Specification Value b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Formats 1 2 Formats 3 4 Format 5 Formats 6 7 8 9 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 L0 8192 A000H 2000H Same as address column on left 2 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 A001H L23 L22 L21 L...

Page 1210: ...to 32bit Storage for the communication detail settings The lower and upper bits are stored in SD0 and SD1 respectively 2 When setting the HL order to 32bit Storage for the communication detail settings The upper and lower bits are stored in SD0 and SD1 respectively System SD2 1 Communication error status An error data error code occurred during communication is stored Host Address Communication er...

Page 1211: ...und before the upper limit of the receive buffer was exceeded Check the communication cable and communication module attachment Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings Review the contents of the message to transmit 5 Command error An unsupported command was used Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the commands in the message 62 4 2 List of commands 105 Timeout error Th...

Page 1212: ...2103H SD3 2107H 3001H SD4 8452 2108H 3002H 2104H SD4 2109H 3003H SD5 8453 210AH 3004H 2105H SD5 210BH 3005H SD6 8454 210CH 3006H 2106H SD6 210DH 3007H SD7 8455 210EH 3008H 2107H SD7 210FH 3009H SD8 8456 2110H 300AH 2108H SD8 2111H 300BH SD9 8457 2112H 300CH 2109H SD9 2113H 300DH Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Formats 3 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Format 5 Digit...

Page 1213: ...ing communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH 7FH Address Description Set side SM0 to 49 Interrupt output When the ON OFF state of SM0 to 49 is changed by a touch switch on the GOT for example the interrupt codes shown below are transmitted interrupt output to the host side 1 2 The data amount number of bytes to be interrupt output is ...

Page 1214: ...oint units Example SM0 SM16 SM32 etc Address Address Specification Value b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Format 1 2 Format 3 4 Format 5 Format 6 7 8 9 SM7 SM6 SM5 SM4 SM3 SM2 SM1 SM0 8464 2200H 2110H 2 3 SM15 SM14 SM13 SM12 SM11 SM10 SM9 SM8 2201H SM23 SM22 SM21 SM20 SM19 SM18 SM17 SM16 8465 2202H 2111H SM31 SM30 SM29 SM28 SM27 SM26 SM25 SM24 2203H SM39 SM38 SM37 SM36 SM35 SM34 SM33 SM32 8466 2204H 2112H ...

Page 1215: ...o set data format Set the data format at Detail Setting in GT Designer3 For details of the data format setting method refer to the following 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Type Name Description Refer to Format 1 GOT A900 series microcomputer connection ASCII This format is used when the GOT is connected to the host in a 1 1 connection The data format is ASCII 62 4 3 ...

Page 1216: ...ead clock data Reads the clock data of the GOT TS 54H 53H Set clock data Sets the clock data of the GOT Command Command name Description Max number of points processed Symbol ASCII code 0 30H Batch read w out station No Reads bit devices in byte units 255bytes 2040 points Reads word devices in byte units 255bytes 127 points A 41H Batch read w station No Reads bit devices in byte units 255bytes 204...

Page 1217: ... point units 64 points 0401 0000 Batch read in word units Reads bit devices in 16 point units 3 64 words 1024 points Reads word devices in 1 point units 64 points 1401 0001 Batch write in bit units Writes to bit devices in 1 point units 64 points 1401 0000 Batch read in word units Writes to bit devices in 16 point units 3 64 words 1024 points Writes to word devices in 1 point units 64 points 0403 ...

Page 1218: ... of the number of interrupt data bytes refer to the following 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Message format Request message host GOT Response message during normal communication GOT host 1 During processing of read commands 2 During processing of write commands Response message during faulty communication GOT host During interrupt output H L Command Data Data 06...

Page 1219: ...e address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit In the format 2 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 1 digit Binary code binary and transmitted 5 Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be read set to the GOT clock data In the format 1 the add...

Page 1220: ...OT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during normal communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Command R D 52H 44H H L Address 0 1 30H 31H 0 30H 0 30H H L Number of points 0 2 30H 32H Command R D Address 00H 64H Number of p...

Page 1221: ...ies microcomputer connection Binary Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Command R D 52H 44H H L Address 8 3 38H 33H 2 32H 0 30H H L Number of points 0 2 30H 32H Command R D Address 83H 20H Number of points 02H H L Data 1 M15 to 0 0 30H 0 30H 1 31H 0 30H H L 8 38H 0 30H 0 30H 0 30H M 1 6 M 1 7 M 1 8 M 1 9 M 2 0 M 2 1 M 2 2 M 2 3 M 2 4 M 2 5 M 2 6 M 2 7 M 2 8 M 2 9 M 3 0 M 3 1 ...

Page 1222: ...A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Command W D 57H 44H H L Address 0 1 30H 31H 0 30H 0 30H H L Number of points 0 2 30H 32H H L Data 1 D100 0 0 30H 30H 6 36H 4 34H H L Data 2 D101 0 0 30H 30H 6 36H 5 35H Command W D Address...

Page 1223: ...ring faulty communication GOT host H L Data 1 M15 to 0 0 30H 0 30H 1 31H 0 30H H L Data 2 M31 to 16 8 38H 0 30H 0 30H 0 30H M 1 6 M 1 7 M 1 8 M 1 9 M 2 0 M 2 1 M 2 2 M 2 3 M 2 4 M 2 5 M 2 6 M 2 7 M 2 8 M 2 9 M 3 0 M 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 0 M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 7 M 8 M 9 M 1 0 M 1 2 M 1 3 M 1 4 M 1 5 M 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H L W D 57H 44H Command H L Address 8 38...

Page 1224: ...ter connection ASCII format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Command R R 52H 52H H L Address 1 0 1 30H 31H 0 30H 0 30H H L Address 2 8 3 38H 33H 2 32H 0 30H Command R R Address 1 00H 64H Address 2 20H 80H H L Data 1 D100 0 30H 6 36H 4 34H 0 30H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 0 M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 7 M 8 M 9 M 1 0 M 1 2 M 1 3 M 1 4 ...

Page 1225: ...ction ASCII format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Address 2 8 38H 2 32H 0 30H 3 33H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 0 M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 7 M 8 M 9 M 1 0 M 1 2 M 1 3 M 1 4 M 1 5 M 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H L Data 2 M15 to 0 0 30H 0 30H 1 31H 0 30H H L R W 52H 57H Command H L Addre...

Page 1226: ... format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Command T R 54H 52H H L Year data 0 9 30H 39H H L Month data 1 0 31H 30H H L Day data 0 1 30H 31H H L Hour data 1 8 31H 38H H L Minute data 4 6 34H 36H H L Second data 4 9 34H 39H H L Day of week data 0 4 30H 34H Year data 09H M...

Page 1227: ...day is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Thursday Thursday THU will be displayed on the utility time display Time display 2009 10 01 18 46 49 THU After execution Item Message format Request message host GOT format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during normal communication G...

Page 1228: ...output disable flag 62 3 6 SM devices 3139H D13 Interrupt Interrupt output Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 31H Output value 1 39H Output value 2 Item Message format Interrupt output GOT host 1 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 1 byte 2 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 2 byte 3 When Interrupt Data Byte in Comm...

Page 1229: ...T A900 series With setting LH Order the order of upper bits and lower bits are reversed when the GOT displays and writes 32 bit data Error code Description Measures 10H Command error An unsupported command was used Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the commands in the message 62 4 2 List of commands 11H Message length error The upper limit of the data length that can be received...

Page 1230: ...pt data bytes refer to the following 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Message format Request message host GOT 1 w out station No 2 w station No Response message during normal communication GOT host 1 During processing of read commands 2 During processing of write commands Response message during faulty communication GOT host During interrupt output Data Com mand D...

Page 1231: ...ss 0 to 31 set at Communication Detail Settings The message of command whose station No does not match is ignored For setting method of Communication Detail Settings refer to the following 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 4 Address Specifies the head No of the device data to be read written In the format 3 the address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit AS...

Page 1232: ... the format 4 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 1 digit Binary code binary and transmitted 9 Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be read set to the GOT clock data In the format 3 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit In the ...

Page 1233: ... format Request message host GOT format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during normal communication GOT host format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Station No 1 5 31H 35H H L Ad...

Page 1234: ... 1 5 31H 35H H L Address 2 32H 0 30H H L Number of bytes 0 4 30H 34H A 41H 0 30H 0 30H Com mand Station No 0FH Address Number of bytes 04H A 20H 00H Com mand M 1 6 M 1 7 M 1 8 M 1 9 M 2 0 M 2 1 M 2 2 M 2 3 M 2 4 M 2 5 M 2 6 M 2 7 M 2 8 M 2 9 M 3 0 M 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 8 M 9 M 1 0 M 1 2 M 1 3 M 1 4 M 1 5 M 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 M 0 M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 7 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H L Da...

Page 1235: ...fore execution After execution Item Message format Request message host GOT format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Data 1 R100 upper 3 D 33H 44H H L Data 2 R100 lower 2 1 32H 31H H L Data 3 R101 upper 3 6 33H 36H H...

Page 1236: ... Data 3 M23 to 16 0 0 30H 30H H L Data 4 M31 to 24 8 0 38H 30H 1 H L Station No 1 5 31H 35H H L Address 2 32H 0 30H 0 30H H L Number of bytes 0 4 30H 34H B 42H 0 30H Following 1 Com mand M 1 6 M 1 7 M 1 8 M 1 9 M 2 0 M 2 1 M 2 2 M 2 3 M 2 4 M 2 5 M 2 6 M 2 7 M 2 8 M 2 9 M 3 0 M 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 8 M 9 M 1 0 M 1 2 M 1 M 1 4 M 1 5 M 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 M 0 M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 M 7 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0...

Page 1237: ... 1 1 31H 0 30H 3 33H H L 2 32H 0 30H H L Bit pattern2 4 34H 0 30H Write specification 2 0 30H F 46 E 45H 2 2 M 2 4 M 2 5 M 2 6 M 2 7 M 2 8 M 2 9 M 3 0 M 3 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Source data bit pattern 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 Result write specification1 1 M 2 0 3 2 M 2 0 3 3 M 2 0 3 4 M 2 0 3 5 M 2 0 3 6 M 2 0 3 7 M 2 0 3 8 M 2 0 3 9 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Source data bit pattern 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0...

Page 1238: ...1 by the bit pattern are turned ON Original data 1010 Bit pattern 1100 Result 1110 1 OFF specification Bits set to 1 by the bit pattern are turned OFF Original data 1010 Bit pattern 1100 Result 0010 2 Invert specification Bits set to 1 by the bit pattern are inverted Original data 1010 Bit pattern 1100 Result 0110 3 Write specification The numerical values to write by the bit pattern are specified...

Page 1239: ...dress greater than the end address Either of the start address or end address exceeds the device range that can be specified 2 Address specifying crossing over different devices The start address and end address can be specified crossing over different devices R100 0000H R50 0000H 0000H R100 1616H R50 1616H 1616H Before execution After execution Item Message format Request message host GOT format ...

Page 1240: ...ormat 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during normal communication GOT host format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Response message during faulty communication GOT host H L Station No 2 7 32H 37H G 47H Com mand Station No 1BH G Com mand H L Month data 1 0 31H 30H H L Day data 0 1 30H 31H H L...

Page 1241: ...isplayed on the utility Example When October 1 2009 Tuesday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Thursday Thursday THU will be displayed on the utility time display Time display 2009 10 01 18 46 49 THU After execution Item Message format Request message host GOT format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connecti...

Page 1242: ...tion Detail Settings 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH 7FH 3139H D13 Interrupt Interrupt output Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 31H Output value 1 39H Output value 2 Item Message format Interrupt output GOT host 1 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 1 byte 2 Wh...

Page 1243: ...s stored in SD2 For details of error code stored in SD2 the error contents cause and measures refer to the following 62 3 5 Details and actions for errors error codes stored into SD2 When an error other than those to be stored in SD2 occurs at faulty only the NAK response is executed Precautions 1 Batch reading writing crossing over different devices When using the batch read 0 A or batch write 1 ...

Page 1244: ...dress Specifies the head No of the device data to be read written The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following 62 3 Device Data Area 3 Number of points Specifies the number of device data to be read written Setting range 1 to 40H The address notated in hex...

Page 1245: ...device The following shows as example of writing 0064H and 0065H to virtual devices D100 and D101 D100 D101 0102H 0304H Item Message format Request message host GOT Response message during normal communication GOT host Data length 00H 06H Address 64H 00H Number of points 00H 02H 1BH ESC 52H R Com mand 00H 00H 00H 00H 42H 00H B Data length 00H 06H Address 02H 01H Number of points 03H 04H 1BH ESC 41...

Page 1246: ...SM52 interrupt code output disable flag 62 3 6 SM devices To issue interrupts in format 11 set the data length to 8 bits at Communication Detail Settings 62 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH 7FH 31H D13 Interrupt Interrupt output Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 1 31H Output value 1 Item Message fo...

Page 1247: ...lower bits are reversed when the GOT displays and writes 32 bit data Error code Description Measures 10H Command error An unsupported command was used Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the commands in the message 62 4 2 List of commands 12H Message length error The upper limit of the data length that can be received by the GOT has been exceeded FAH Address error The start addres...

Page 1248: ...ue 0 30H 0 30H H L PLC No 0 30H 1 31H H L Network No 0 30H 1 31H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 0 0 30H 30H H L H L Serial No 0 30H 0 30H 0 0 30H 30H H L H L Request type 0 30H 0 30H 5 4 35H 34H H L H L Device code 2AH D 44H H Start Device 1 31H 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H 0 30H Character A section H Sub...

Page 1249: ...erface Communication settings Transmit the data notated in hexadecimal converted to a 2 digit ASCII code from the upper digit Transmit the data notated in hexadecimal converted to a 1 digit binary code from the upper digit Request destination module I O No Ignore GOT Request destination module station No Ignore GOT Request data length Number of bytes from the start of CPU monitoring timer to the l...

Page 1250: ...the total number of access points to within 64 points When using multiple block batch read write commands When setting multiple blocks limit the total number of points of all blocks to within 64 points Transmit the data notated in decimal converted to a 4 digit ASCII code from the upper digit Transmit the number of devices converted to a 2 digit binary code from the lower digit Year month day hour...

Page 1251: ...GOT format 6 4E frame ASCII format 7 4E frame Binary L Fixed value 0 30H 0 30H H L PLC No 0 30H 1 31H H L Network No 0 30H 1 31H H 0 30H 0 30H H Request data length 0 30H L 0 30H C 43H 0 30H H CPU monitoring timer 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Serial No 0 30H 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L Request type 0 30H 0 30H H 5 35H 4 34H Character A section H Command 9 39H L 0 30H 1 31H 1 3...

Page 1252: ... H D 44H 4 34H Character B section H L 9 39H H L 1 31H 0 30H 0 30H H L 0 30H 1 31H L 1 31H 8 38H H L 0 30H 0 30H 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H 1 1 Request destination module I O No Request destination module station No H L 6 36H H L 4 34H 9 39H 4 34H H L 0 30H 4 34H Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data Second data Day of week data Data length target range End code 00H 00H 2 Year data 09H 0AH ...

Page 1253: ... 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L Response type 0 30H 0 30H H D 44H 4 34H L 0 30H 0 30H 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H 1 1 Request destination module I O No Request destination module station No H L PLC No 0 30H 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H Request destination module I O No Request destination module station No L Sub command 0 30H 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L Command 0 30H 1...

Page 1254: ...0H 0 30H L Response type 0 30H 0 30H H 5 35H 4 34H L 0 30H 0 30H 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H 1 Request destination module I O No Request destination module station No Character C section H L 9 39H H L 1 31H 0 30H 0 30H H L 0 30H 1 31H L 1 31H 8 38H H 1 H L 6 36H H L 4 34H 9 39H 4 34H H L 0 30H 4 34H Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data Second data Day of week data L Command 0 30H 1 31H H 0 ...

Page 1255: ...ed value 0 30H 0 30H H L PLC No 0 30H 1 31H H L Network No 0 30H 1 31H H 0 30H 0 30H H Response data length 0 30H L 0 30H 4 34H 0 30H H End code 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Serial No 0 30H 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L Response type 0 30H 0 30H H D 44H 4 34H L 0 30H 0 30H 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H Request destination module I O No Request destination module station No Data length tar...

Page 1256: ...0 30H L 1 31H 6 36H 0 30H H End code 0 30H 0 30H L 5 35H 6 36H Following 1 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Serial No 0 30H 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L Response type 0 30H 0 30H H D 44H 4 34H L 0 30H 0 30H 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H 1 1 Request destination module I O No Request destination module station No H L PLC No 0 30H 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H 0 30H H 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H 30H H L 0 30H 0 30H Request destination m...

Page 1257: ...ice number to specified number of points exceeds the maximum address device number step number for each process Correct the specified number of points or the start address device number 62 3 Device Data Area When reading data which the command bit length is longer than the specification the set number of write data points differs from the specified number of points value Check the command data len...

Page 1258: ...GOT side Network No 1 PLC No 1 Format 8 3E frame ASCII Format 9 3E frame Binary H L PLC No 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 H Command 0 30H 4 34H L 0 30H 1 31H 1 H L Device code 2AH D 44H H Start Device 1 31H 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H 0 30H Character A section H Sub command 0 3...

Page 1259: ...ode from the upper digit Transmit the data notated in hexadecimal converted to a 1 digit binary code from the upper digit Request destination module I O No Ignore GOT Request destination module station No Ignore GOT Request data length Number of bytes from the start of CPU monitoring timer to the last request data Transmit the data notated in hexadecimal converted to a 4 digit ASCII code from the ...

Page 1260: ...the total number of access points to within 64 points When using multiple block batch read write commands When setting multiple blocks limit the total number of points of all blocks to within 64 points Transmit the data notated in decimal converted to a 4 digit ASCII code from the upper digit Transmit the number of devices converted to a 2 digit binary code from the lower digit Year month day hour...

Page 1261: ... 10 01 18 46 49 THU Item Message format Request message host GOT format 8 3E frame ASCII format 9 3E frame Binary H L PLC No 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Request data length 0 30H C 43H H 0 30H 0 30H L CPU monitoring timer 0 30H 0 30H H 5 35H 0 30H L Subhe...

Page 1262: ... 34H H L PLC No 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H Following 1 H D 44H 0 30H L Subheader 0 30H 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Response data length 1 31H 2 32H H 0 30H 0 30H L End code 0 30H 0 30H 1 1 31H 31H Data length target data 00H Network No PLC No 00H D0H Subheader 00H 00H 00H Request destina...

Page 1263: ... L Response data length 1 31H 6 36H H 0 30H 0 30H L End code 5 35H 6 36H H D 44H 0 30H L Subheader 0 30H 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H H L PLC No 0 30H 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H 0 30H 1 1 31H 31H 1 1 H Command 1 31H 9 39H L 0 30H 1 31H H Sub command 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H Data length target data Data le...

Page 1264: ... 30H 34H 1 H L PLC No 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H Following 1 H 5 35H 0 30H L Subheader 0 30H 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Response data length 1 31H A 41H H 0 30H 0 30H L CPU monitoring timer 0 30H 0 30H 1 1 1 H Command 0 31H 9 39H L 0 30H 1 31H H Sub command 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H 31H...

Page 1265: ...rmat 8 3E frame ASCII format 9 3E frame Binary H L PLC No 0 30H H L Network No 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Response data length 0 30H 4 34H H 0 30H 0 30H L End code 0 30H 0 30H H D 44H 0 30H L Subheader 0 30H 0 30H 31H 31H 1 1 Data length target data 00H 00H End code 00H Netw...

Page 1266: ...etwork No 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H Following 1 1 H 0 30H 0 30H L Response data length 1 31H 6 36H H 0 30H 0 30H L End code 5 35H 6 36H H D 44H 0 30H L Subheader 0 30H 0 30H H Request destination module I O No 0 30H 0 30H L 0 30H 0 30H H L Request destination module station No 0 30H 0 30H H L PLC No 0 3...

Page 1267: ...Subnet Mask 1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway 1 Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected Only for connection via router Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Ethernet Download Port No Set the GOT port No...

Page 1268: ...ity refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Special Interrupt Code Hex Event type 20H Base Screen 1 and Overlap Window 1 Output when the screens are switched according to the change in the switching device values assigned to 1 2 1 Base...

Page 1269: ...stem configuration of the microcomputer connection serial 61 7 System Configuration Examples 62 7 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT16 Handy refer to the following manuals GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT1000Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 62 8 Precautions GOT...

Page 1270: ...62 68 62 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 62 8 Precautions ...

Page 1271: ...MODBUS CONNECTIONS 63 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 63 1 64 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 64 1 ...

Page 1272: ......

Page 1273: ...e shortest specification on the MODBUS equipment side is prioritized 2 When it is less than 31 units the number of the maximum connectable units on the MODBUS equipment side will apply MODBUS RTU Communication driver MODBUS equipment Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Connected equipment Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Total distance 1 N...

Page 1274: ... manual Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 232 cable must be 6m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector refer to the following 6 7 Connector Conversion Box 3 MODBUS equipment side connector Use the connector compatible with the MODBUS equipment side module For details refer...

Page 1275: ...inating resistor selector of the GOT main unit to Disable and connect a 110 terminating resistor 4 2 Back Panel 4 For the terminating resistor of MODBUS equipment refer to the manual of MODBUS equipment to be used Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The total distance between GOT and controllers of RS 422 cable must be 13m or less 2 Connector conversion box side connector For the Con...

Page 1276: ...g POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or ...

Page 1277: ...the controller to be monitored Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller Other Select this item for monitoring other controllers After selecting the item set the station number and network number of the controller to be monitored NW No For the MODBUS RTU connection set 1 For the MODBUS TCP connection set the network No Station No Set the station No Setting of station No 0 Set the st...

Page 1278: ...r sharing communication settings GS570 to GS576 or the GS device used for individual communication setting GS590 to GS617 is validated a When sharing communication settings between multiple channel numbers The table below shows the settings for the GS device MODBUS RTU Communication protocol Representation on GT Designer3 Device name Function code to be used Address Read Write Coil 0x01 0x05 0x0F ...

Page 1279: ... 1 the function code 0F is not used and therefore the setting of GS575 will be disabled GS576 Function Code 10 Specification for the max number of multiple holding register write times 0 100 1 to 123 Specify the maximum number Other than above 123 When Bit1 of GS570 is 1 the function code 10 is not used and therefore the setting of GS576 will be disabled GS device Description Set value Ch1 Ch2 Ch3...

Page 1280: ...ipment by setting GOT internal device For example the faulty station where a communication timeout error occurs can be disconnected from connected equipment For details of GOT internal device setting refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual MODBUS communication control function on the GS device At GOT startup set MODBUS communication control function with project sc...

Page 1281: ...ching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Use the straight cable The use of shielded twisted pair cable STP is recommended in environments in which the performance against noise is required 4 For details refer to the MODBUS TCP equipment manual MODBUS TCP Communication driver Hub Connection cable Connection cable Connector con...

Page 1282: ...ion numbers 64 3 3 Ethernet setting 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 2 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 247 GOT IP Address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not u...

Page 1283: ...tting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following 12 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 64 4 PLC Side Setting For details of the MODBUS TCP equipment refer to the manual of MODBUS TCP equipment to ...

Page 1284: ...ommunication settings between GS590 to GS603 Bit2 0 Configure the Ch3 communication settings between GS570 to GS576 1 Configure the Ch3 communication settings between GS604 to GS610 Bit3 0 Configure the Ch4 communication settings between GS570 to GS576 1 Configure the Ch3 communication settings between GS611 to GS617 GS device Description Set value GS570 Command selection Bit0 0 Using Function Cod...

Page 1285: ... input register read times 0 125 1 to 125 Specify the maximum number Other than above 125 GS 595 GS 602 GS 609 GS 616 Function Code 0F Specification for the max number of multiple coil write times 0 800 1 to 1968 Specify the maximum number Other than above 1968 When Bit0 of GS570 is 1 the function code 0F is not used and therefore the setting of GS575 will be disabled GS 596 GS 603 GS 610 GS 617 F...

Page 1286: ...n which the performance against noise is required MODBUS TCP Communication driver Ethernet module SCHNEIDER PLC Hub Connection cable Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable External device Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT Model Number of connectable equipment Model name Ethernet module 3 Communication Type Cable model 4 Maximum ...

Page 1287: ...ware for SCHNEIDER PLC a For Modicon Premium series Set for PL7 Pro programming software b For Modicon Quantum series Set for Concept programming software Item Set value Processors Connected CPU module Memory cards Memory card to be used Module Connected Ethernet module IP Address IP address for Ethernet module Size of global address fields Setting for device points Bits Coil Input Words Input reg...

Page 1288: ...imit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 Use the straight cable The use of shielded twisted pair cable STP is recommended in environments in which the performance against noise is required MODBUS TCP Communication driver YOKOGAWA PLC Hub Connection cable Connection cable Connector conversion box External cable GOT PLC Connection cable External device Connection cable Connector conversion box ...

Page 1289: ... Double click SD_CMODBUSE_PF mwt SD_CUTIL_PF mwt and SD_CMODBUSS_PF mwt to select it When STARDOM Serial Communication is used for the template SD_CUTIL_PF mwt is inserted as default The library path inserted in the procedures above is as follows InstallFolder LogicDesigner Libraries SD_CMODBUSE_PF mwt Install Folder LogicDesigner Libraries SD_CUTIL_PF mwt Install Folder LogicDesigner Libraries SD...

Page 1290: ...wing manual YOKOGAWA PLC user s Manual Connecting to STARDOM 1 For dual redundant configuration When STARDOM is configured with a redundant system the connection is not supported 2 Not communicating with GOT and STARDOM in a specified period When the GOT does not communicate with STARDOM in a specified period during the GOT is turned on STARDOM disconnects the line for the GOT As the line is disco...

Page 1291: ...nd 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255 are used by the system The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT a...

Page 1292: ...64 12 64 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 64 7 Precautions ...

Page 1293: ...CONNECTIONS TO PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 65 VNC R SERVER CONNECTION 65 1 ...

Page 1294: ......

Page 1295: ...al of the wireless LAN adapter used 2 A straight cable is available When connecting the GOT and PC directly with Ethernet cable remember that the by cross cable is available CPU Software PC Ultra VNC Extended function OS VNC Server Communication driver Ethernet system Connection type dependant Communication driver Connection cable Connector conversion box Personal computer VNC client PLC External ...

Page 1296: ...tsubishi Products 2 Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals 65 3 GOT Side Settings 65 3 1 VNC R server function setting 1 Select Common Peripheral Setting VNC Server from the menu 2 Check the VNC Server of Use VNC Server to set For details on the settings refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 3 Click the OK button when settings are completed 65 3 2 Se...

Page 1297: ...hernet YOKOGAWA Gateway Ethernet IP AB Gateway Ethernet SIEMENS S7 Gateway Ethernet SIEMENS OP Gateway MODBUS TCP Gateway Ethernet MICROCOMPUTER In the peripheral setting set Destination I F in Ethernet Download for the PC Data Transfer dialog box To connect controllers including a programmable controller to the GOT by using the Ethernet connection no setting is required For the details of Etherne...

Page 1298: ...65 4 65 VNC R SERVER CONNECTION 65 4 Setting in Personal Computer ...

Page 1299: ...roller KP AL3000 AH3000 SE3000 JU KE LE5000 compatible TOSHIBA PLC Unified Controller nv Series compatible YAMATAKE temperature controller DMC50 compatible RKC temperature controller RB500 RB700 PF HA RMC MA AG THV compatible Microcomputer connection Ethernet formats 8 and 9 QnA compatible 3E frame compatible Apr 2011 JY997D41201 JY997D41202 C Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1 28E Compatible w...

Page 1300: ...QnUDVCPU compatible MELSEC L models L26CPU L02SCPU LJ71E71 100 compatible FA transparent function FXCPU compatible FA transparent function Setting Monitoring tool for C Controller module compatible IAI robot controller SCON CA PCON CA compatible ALLEN BRADLEY PLC expanded station number setting compatible SIEMENS PLC S7 1200 OP communication compatible May 2013 JY997D41201 JY997D41202 M Compatible...

Page 1301: ...2 U Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 126G C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series is supported MELSEC iQ F Series is supported FA Transparent Function MELSEC iQ R Series MX Component MX Sheet are supported C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series CW Configurator is supported Servo amplifier connection MELSERVO J4 A RJ compatible Apr 2015 JY997D41201 JY997D41202 V Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 ...

Page 1302: ...REVISIONS 4 ...

Page 1303: ... in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product c Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged in the following cases Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range 1 1 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technic...

Page 1304: ...egistered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd in the United States and other countries Other company and product names herein a...

Page 1305: ......

Page 1306: ......

Search results

Summary of Contents for GT16

Reviews:

Related manuals for GT16

Brands by name

Popular brands

Mitsubishi Electric GT16, User Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for GT16

Reviews:

Related manuals for GT16

Brands by name

Popular brands